Processes in Transportation
Management
PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK
INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING
Course Version: 16
Course Duration: 4 Day(s)
Material Number: 50131923
···----·-·
-----------·
-=-==':;..·-
=-----·-==---·-=�=--==-
. ,:-
iv
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
vi
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Contents
xi
Course Overview
1
Unit 1:
Lesson: Evaluating SAP TM
Exercise 1: Identify the Capabilities of SAP Transportation
2
11
Management
Lesson: Evaluating the SAP TM System Landscape
Exercise 2: Log on to the SAP ERP and SAP TM Systems
14
19
27
SAP Transportation Management (TM)
Unit 2:
SAP TM User Interface
28
Lesson: Identifying NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC)
32
35
Components
Lesson: Configuring a Personal Object Worklist (POWL)
Exercise 3: Create a Query to Filter Transportation
39
Requirements
Lesson: Customizing the Screen Layout in SAP TM
43
Unit 3:
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
Exercise 4: List the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
45
49
Lesson: Evaluating the Organizational Structures Used in SAP TM
Lesson: Defining a Condition
65
73
Exercise 5: Display a Condition
Lesson: Determining a Freight Incompatibility
77
82
Exercise 6: View Incompatibilities
Lesson: Determining a Dangerous Goods Shipping Requirement
85
90
103
105
110
117
129
137
142
145
SAP TM Master Data
Unit 4:
Transportation Order Management
Lesson: Triggering the Transportation Management Process
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
Exercise 7: Create a Sales Order
Lesson: Managing the Freight Forwarding Process
Exercise 8: Create a Forwarding Order
Lesson: Booking Capacities
Exercise 9: Create an Ocean Freight Booking
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
vii
E'
157
Unit 5:
Lesson: Defining the Transportation Planning Process
Exercise 10: Discuss the Transportation Planning Process
159
167
171
177
Lesson: Viewing a Freight Unit
Exercise 11: View a Freight Unit
180
184
Lesson: Building a Package
Lesson: Defining a Selection Profile
186
Lesson: Determining a Planning Profile
Lesson: Accessing the Transportation Cockpit
190
Exercise 12: Access the Transportation Cockpit
Lesson: Generating a Transportation Proposal
195
199
206
Exercise 13: Generate a Transportation Proposal
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
213
224
Exercise 14: Create a Freight Order
Lesson: Optimizing a Load
203
239
241
249
254
260
269
273
281
Unit 6:
Transportation Execution
Lesson: Performing a Carrier Selection
Exercise 15: Execute a Carrier Selection
Lesson: Tendering a Freight Order
Lesson: Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
Exercise 16: Create a Delivery
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
287
Exercise 17: Create a Shipment
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse
307
Management (SAP EWM)
Lesson: Generating Outputs
312
323
326
331
339
viii
Transportation Planning
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Exercise 18: View the Events of a Freight Order
Lesson: Exporting a Freight Order
Lesson: Analyzing SAP Transportation Management Performance
Exercise 19: Execute a BCV Query
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
353
Unit 7:
Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
370
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
Lesson: Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
379
384
Exercise 20: Calculate Charges for a Freight Order
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
389
404
Exercise 21: Generate a Freight Settlement Document
Lesson: Calculating and Settling Customer Charges in an FWO
411
Lesson: Distributing Costs
Lesson: Settling Freight Charges in a Group Logistics Company
Lesson: Managing a Freight Contract
355
416
421
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
ix�
x
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Course Overview
TARGET AUDIENCE
This course is intended for the following audiences:
•
Application Consultant
•
Business Analyst
•
Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User
•
Data Consultant/Manager
•
Development Consultant
•
Program/Project Manager
•
Technology Consultant
•
User
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
xi�
xii
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
SAP Transportation
Management (TM)
Lesson 1
Evaluating SAP TM
Exercise 1: Identify the Capabilities of SAP Transportation Management
2
11
Lesson 2
Evaluating the SAP TM System Landscape
Exercise 2: Log on to the SAP ERP and SAP TM Systems
14
19
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
List the benefits of SAP Transportation Management
•
Identify the scenarios supported for each release of SAP TM
•
Explain the components of transportation planning
•
Explain the components of transportation execution
•
Identify the basic capabilities of SAP Transportation Management
•
Explain the deployment options related to the SAP TM landscape
•
Log on to the SAP system
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
1�
Unit 1
Lesson 1
Evaluating SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW
Your company is considering using SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) to manage its
transportation activities. This lesson provides you with an idea of the scope of SAP TM and how it
is integrated into a host of other SAP tools.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
List the benefits of SAP Transportation Management
•
Identify the scenarios supported for each release of SAP TM
•
Explain the components of transportation planning
•
Explain the components of transportation execution
•
Identify the basic capabilities of SAP Transportation Management
Transportation Management at SAP
I Tendering I
I Brokering I
Logistics
Service Providers
Carriers
Shippers
Outbound
Freight
Customers
Inbound
Freight
Suppliers
Figure 1: Global Supply Chains
Companies have been shipping products across countries and continents for centuries. The
concept of managing the transportation of products is not new. However, using new
2
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating SAP TM
methodologies and technology can make a difference in an industry. Today, most economies are
wholly reliant on efficient transportation logistics.
With the shift in recent years towards a global economy, crossing borders has become
commonplace. Reaching customers in more remote locations and sourcing the procurement of
product from multiple vendors or locations has increased the cost of transporting products. As
the world becomes smaller. the team tasked with maintaining logistics needs to respond faster
and more cost-effectively.
Global natural disasters and other dangers show the vulnerability of the global supply chain.
Despite these challenges. the transportation part of the supply chain. in particular. has to solve
the problems that arise in order to keep factories running and customers supplied.
Executive Decisions
The following examples are issues that key executives face:
•
How can I manage my logistics network in a holistic fashion?
•
How can I minimize the risk factors throughout my supply chain?
•
How can I reduce my operational costs and better understand transportation costs at the
customer level?
•
How can I ensure best possible usage of my assets? How do I ensure high customer service
levels and responsiveness to unexpected supply chain events?
•
How do I ensure I am compliant with all the varying regulations and compliance policies?
Transportation management is never an isolated process. Rather. it is always integrated into
other business processes. If transportation management is poorly organized, this may have a
negative impact on related business processes. for example manufacturing or distribution.
Evolution of Transportation Management at SAP
Extending the Scope of Our Transportation Solution
Freight Forwarder I 3PL I LSP Transportation Focus
!:!
ca:
O a.
·- <
'Cl)
.:
&.
• c
�i
.:CII Cl)
ciil
O a.
=:.!:
ca.
-<
'Cl)
.l! ,_
��
0
a.o
ca.
o<
.. :; !.:
.. a
&. .:
.
,--0
Cl)
,_ 0
Cl)
,_!! GI!
1987
1993
2000
ee
Event
Extended
RFID
nagemen,
Planning
Track &
Handling & Ocean
Trace
Booking
2001
2004
SAP
.1&t.8
Holistic
solution
2006
2007
LSP
focH
2010
SAPTII
t.x
2013+
Shipper Transportation Focus
Figure 2: History of Transportation Management Functionality at SAP
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
3�
Unit 1: SAP Transportation Management (TM)
SAP TM 6.0 and 7.0 evolved from the SAP Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TPVS)
solution. With SAP TM 8.0. the architecture was redesigned and execution improved. As time
went on. customer feedback and lessons learned from the early implementations were used as a
basis for improving the solution further. As society and business makes the move to mobile, SAP
TM is evolving accordingly and now includes several mobile-friendly elements. For example,
drivers can input updates using mobile devices and this information can be used to update
customers of possible delays. While previous iterations included integration with Global Trade
Services (GTS) and facilitated compliance. the focus more recently has been on improving the
shipper and freight forwarder elements of SAP TM.
Benefits of the SAP TM System
Logistics
Service Providers
Customers
Suppliers
Order
Management
Transport
Planning
Transport
Execution
Charges &
Settlement
• Track & Trace All Shipments - Monitoring and Visibility- Recognize and React to Changes
• International Trade - Global Compliance - Dangerous Goods - EWM Integration
• Built-In Analytics -Ad Hoc Reporting Capabilities - Learn & Adjust
• Connectivity and Integration - Web Access, B2BIEDI, Mobile - Plug and Play Integration to ERP
Figure 3: Functional Areas of SAP TM
The benefits derived from using SAP TM include the following:
•
Reduced costs and improved operational performance
•
Improved carrier collaboration and resource utilization
•
Efficient, end-to-end order and process management
•
Efficient logistics and fulfillment processes
•
Improved execution visibility and responsiveness
In many cases. responsibility does not end by executing the shipment. Often. strategic contracts
require that the shipments are traced. to provide visibility so that you can recognize and react to
potential delays that could jeopardize customer service. This information is not often made
available to ERP systems. whose concern is more finance-driven than service-driven. Depending
upon the type of products that are being transported to different countries, compliance with
regional regulations regarding dangerous goods needs to be reviewed and adhered to.
4
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating SAP TM
Analytics
Very few software vendors can support the end-to-end business process seen here. Therefore.
integrated analytics are necessary to provide key metrics to ensure that the targeted services
levels are being achieved at a reasonable cost that supports financial objectives. These analytics
should provide the key that allows your business to identify potential opportunities and adjust the
business as necessary. When so many partners are involved in such a complicated business
process. it is necessary to provide real-time integration and connectivity. With SAP TM. access
can be achieved through tools like Web Access. B2B/EDI. and Mobile Plug and Play integration to
SAP ERP.
This ensures accurate and timely data to all parties, to reduce decision cycle times and improve
overall visibility.
Key Features of the SAP TM System
Customer Co-Innovated
Deep Process Integration
r-.customer
SAP -.,J Influencer
Group
Order-to-Cash
Procure-to-Pay
Customs & Compliance Mgmt.
Dangerous Goods Mgmt.
Best�IHI Functionality
SAP TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT 9.3
Flexible
t
1
Mobile &
w.t> Collaboration
lntelflgent
. . - :-.. �
L"
••
L
•
--�
.,.
-·· •
F?"'""""!'
. - - 1'1
.
.:
-·....
-
Figure 4: Key Features of SAP TM
With SAP TM. existing SAP ERP customers can achieve integrated order processing and
management. SAP TM is delivered with out·of·the·box integration, with order·to·cash and
procure-to-pay scenarios to support timely execution updates. In addition, integrated freight
settlement with SAP ERP billing and invoicing is available for customers who want to increase the
speed at which business process cycles are executed. Additional planning features are available
to support comprehensive order management. This includes forwarding. freight (land). and
booking (sea and air) order and intermodal scenarios. This integrated environment provides full
document flow and order lifecycle management. as well as a centralized order data management
tool for planning, tendering. and so on.
Interactive and Mass Processing
With the freight planning and tendering functions, customers can perform advanced interactive
planning using the transportation cockpit. This tool allows users to see order details and maps of
transit routes. It allows planning to happen both interactively and via mass processing. Zero click
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
5�
Unit 1: SAP Transportation Management (TM)
planning functions allow SAP ERP to take the order, and the SAP TM system goes from order to
carrier tendering in one smooth process, with no user involvement.
SAP TM supports both domestic and international shipment planning. including ocean freight
booking and customs.
Document Management
-·-·- - ---·--I SAP ERP
--..-
i
j
,
Sales/Purchase
Order
��-. -Order
Management
----- - -·- - -
--
.-- .
!
t,
Forwarding
Quotation
l
-- - . -.. --- ·-. -- --- . ---·- --. -..- ..- . ----.- ...- . _,] '-----.---'
,--
Delivery-based
Transportation
Requirement
Forwarding
Order
----- -- Unit- -- -- - - ._..._._,, ...:;----,---------------------------------
!
...
Freight
Building
----------·----------------,...
Planning
- ---·---·- --- -
Delivery
Order-based
Transportation
Requirement
,,_..
--•-:___
-·---
Transportation
Network
__
Freight Unit
i
•
-------- ------- - . ......
Planning
:
--"- ...'- -------··
--------
-
<
Freight Order I
Freight Booking
Freight
Settlement
Document
Charges &
Settlement
·---"-"--- -�-. ---�-
''
l
__....�.. � .....•,_,.•__-__. �-·i--------.. -..
Forwarding
Settlement
Document
- ---- -
- . - --·--' ,_,,__
--..... -'"�. -
-- I
l
Accounting Document
,,
,.._,,
,.
,.
,._,.
I
SAP
ERP
.. _,._,.,
,._,,.
Figure 5: SAP TM End to End
As part of the integration. SAP TM supports comprehensive transportation document
management. This includes document creation. status management. printing of bills of lading
(road. sea. air). labels, forwarding instructions. and more. Scenarios for integrated logistics and
fulfillment management with SAP ERP for integrating inbound and outbound processing are
available. Your company can also tie into SAP EHS for dangerous goods handling. For
international shipping. integrated customs and compliance management with SAP GTS is
supported for export document and customs procedure processing.
The graphic gives an overview of the SAP TM document model. Depending upon the extent of
your integration and business requirements, different document types and statuses are available.
Different types of transportation requests can be made on SAP TM by the execution or order
management system. These could include freight forwarding orders (FWO). sales order-based
transportation requirements (OTR). and delivery-based transportation requirements (DTR).
6
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating SAP TM
Freight Units and Freight Orders
Upon receiving transportation requirements. freight units are created and become the basic
element for planning the movement of goods through the network. The freight unit is a transport
unit used in planning. It could be a pallet or container. but it could also be two pallets that need to
be transported together. for example for customs reasons.
Freight orders will record the manual or system-generated transportation planning (intermodal)
activities. These freight orders are the result of planning, consolidation of freight units on a
vehicle. booked capacity. or scheduled means of transport. Once freight orders are created.
carrier short-term tendering works with additional business processes (objects): request for
supplier quote. response for supplier quote. Once this has been completed, transport order
execution can be triggered and follow-on settlement processing can begin.
Business Scenarios Supported by SAP TM
Over recent years SAP has made a significant investment in designing and building a best-in-class
transportation management solution. This solution will continue to evolve as more functionality is
rolled out. Currently. the solution supports the following scenarios for shippers and logistic
service providers:
•
Domestic Inbound Transportation
•
Domestic Outbound Transportation
•
International Inbound Logistics
•
International Outbound Transportation
•
Ocean Freight
•
Air Freight
•
lntermodal Rail Freight
•
Courier Express Parcel
Order Management
The business purpose of order management is providing the ability to handle transportation
requests. which are designated as requirements or demands from an ordering system.
One of the major benefits of SAP TM is the ability to use the system integrated to SAP ERP as the
source demand system: or use it integrated with a company's legacy order management system;
or use it as a standalone planning system. So you can see the flexibility with SAP TM from an
order management standpoint. If you choose to integrate with an SAP ERP system. SAP TM
would be integrated by means of Process Integration (Pl) interfaces. Orders and deliveries from
SAP ERP can be converted into SAP TM transportation requirements automatically. If you run
SAP TM as a standalone system. LSP Forwarding Order creation is either done by manual entry in
the SAP TM UI, or integrated from a customer's system via EDI.
You can use the Forwarding Order Management component in SAP TM to create. edit, and
confirm the forwarding orders from your ordering parties. In addition to creating the forwarding
order. you can also enter the data as a forwarding quotation and send it to the ordering party. You
can then create a forwarding order based on the forwarding quotation.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
7�
Unit 1: SAP Transportation Management (TM)
Transportation Planning
You can use the Freight Order Management component in SAP Transportation Management
(SAP TM) to create and edit freight orders and freight bookings. You use freight orders above all
for land transportation and you use freight bookings for sea and air transportation.
Freight orders and bookings are the result of transportation planning.
One of the major benefits of SAP TM is the ability to perform advanced planning activities. Some
of the tools were originally included in the Advanced Planning and Optimization solution designed
by SAP. However, it was determined that a planning and execution system was desired to support
transportation-related activities for several different industries. Some of the planning processes
delivered with SAP TM are as follows:
•
Transportation cockpit (affords visibility)
•
Planning and optimization
•
Carrier selection
•
Order tendering
Transportation Execution
In addition to advanced planning capabilities in SAP TM. your organization can also gain the
added benefit of integration execution activities in SAP TM.
These integration tasks include the following:
•
Integration with SAP Event Management (EM) for alerts and transportation tracking
•
Generation of delivery documents in SAP ERP
•
Generation of shipping documents in SAP ERP or (via interfaces) other systems
•
Integration with dangerous goods management as part of SAP Environment. Health and
Safety (requires separate license)
•
Document printing
•
Integration with SAP Extended Warehouse Management (EWM)
•
Application of analytics to analyze and adjust business processes
Freight Settlement
When working with customers or subcontractors it may be necessary to collect or pay fees in
relation to the movement of products. With SAP TM. it is possible to introduce a settlement
process in addition to planning and execution activities. The settlement process supports the
following:
8
•
Ability to define transportation charges
•
Definition of freight or forwarding agreements
•
Generation of settlement documents
•
Integration of settlement documents to SAP ERP
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating SAP TM
•
Integration of customer billing to SAP ERP
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
9�
Unit 1: SAP Transportation Management (TM)
10
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 1
Identify the Capabilities of SAP Transportation
Management
Business Example
Your company is considering implementing SAP TM. It is imperative that you have the
information related to the capabilities of the SAP TM solution so that you can relay the concepts
to executives who will decide if this solution meets your organizational needs.
1. Describe the solution coverage of SAP Transportation Management.
2. For which two target groups does SAP TM provide scenarios?
3. What are the main business documents used in SAP TM?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
11
E'
Unit 1
Solution 1
Identify the Capabilities of SAP Transportation
Management
Business Example
Your company is considering implementing SAP TM. It is imperative that you have the
information related to the capabilities of the SAP TM solution so that you can relay the concepts
to executives who will decide if this solution meets your organizational needs.
1. Describe the solution coverage of SAP Transportation Management.
SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) covers the complete transportation process from
order management. through freight planning and tendering, freight execution and monitoring.
to freight settlement. Additionally, SAP TM is supplemented by features from analytics and
reporting, event management. import/export. dangerous goods and compliance. and output
management.
2. For which two target groups does SAP TM provide scenarios?
Shippers and Logistics Service providers (LSPs)
3. What are the main business documents used in SAP TM?
In Order Management for Shippers - Order-Based Transportation Requirement. DeliveryBased Transportation Requirement. In Order Management for LSPs - Forwarding Order.
Forwarding Quotation. In Transportation Planning and Execution - Freight Unit. Freight
Order. Freight Booking. In Settlement for Shippers and LSPs - Freight Settlement Document.
In Settlement for LSPs - Forwarding Settlement Document.
12
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating SAP TM
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
List the benefits of SAP Transportation Management
•
Identify the scenarios supported for each release of SAP TM
•
Explain the components of transportation planning
•
Explain the components of transportation execution
•
Identify the basic capabilities of SAP Transportation Management
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
13
E'
Unit 1
Lesson 2
Evaluating the SAP TM System Landscape
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will learn about the components of the SAP TM environment and
implementation scenarios.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Explain the deployment options related to the SAP TM landscape
•
Log on to the SAP system
SAP TM System Architecture
•
•
•
•
SAP ERP
Enterprise Resource Management
• Human Resource Planning
Purchasing
• Financials
Sales
• Environment, Health & Safety
Inventory Management
• Service & Asset Management
Manufacturing
SAP CRM
Customer Relation.
Mgmt.
• Sales Order Mgmt.
• Claims Management
• Call Center Mgmt.
-
GISI Maps
SAP EWM
Extended
Warehouse
Management
SAP TM
Transportation
Management
SAP SRM
'"
Supplier Relationship
Mgmt.
• Strategic Vendor Mgmt.
Mobile Devices
SAP SCM
Supply Chain Mgmt.
• Demand Planning
• Order Promising &
Fulfillment
• Transportation
Capacity Planning
Supply Chain Execution Platform
•
[
·I
SAP EM Event Management
I
SAP NetWeaver
-
�
]
-'
I
SAP BusinessObjects
Global Trade Services
• Customs Mgmt.
• Compliance Mgmt.
SAP Rail Car Mgmt.
figure 6: SAP Solutions for Transportation And Logistics
A full SAP solution architecture for the transportation and logistics Industries as well as SCM
execution would consist of the solutions shown here. SRM and CRM provide relationship
management capabilities for partnering suppliers and customers. The solutions in this full SAP
solution landscape are. in general. connected with these systems via SAP ERP. In some
scenarios. SAP customers would like to integrate processes between the different solutions
without using SAP ERP as a process step or system in between. In some cases. there are
standard interfaces available. and in other cases. these integrated processes can be created on a
project basis by using business process management (BPM) and service-oriented architecture
14
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating the SAP TM System Landscape
(SOA) solutions in the SAP solution portfolio. SAP TM in particular is designed with SOA and BPM
in mind, to integrate flexibly with other SAP solutions. third-party systems. and legacy systems.
SAP TM Integration Architecture
Business Information
Warehouse Content
Adobe
Document Server
CRM 7.03
EM 9.2
RFC
RFC
RFC
O tio ·
Web Servic
eb Sennce (Direct)
(Direct
TM 9.3
lion 1:
r
Optimizer TM
(SCM 12.0)
Option 1
web Servl e
----._,Direct)
External G1s-�
Pl 7.31
plion 2:
RFC
-"r:._
�lo!l!IJi���
Web Service
(Indirect via IGS)-.-
Master Data
p ion 1:
eb Service
(direct)
- O Scheduling
- rcer Integration
- ehvecy lntegratio
.. nvoice creation
- nvoice Verificatio
Mapping
Option 2:
WebSeivice
WebSeivlce
(Indirect via Pl)
GTS 11.0
wee service
(Indirect via Pl)
SO Scheduling
(Indirect via Pl)
Order Integration
Delivery lntegrati n Web SeMce,IDOC
Invoice Creation
for Shipment Integration
Invoice Verificatio (also) Supported Directly
RFC
ERP
ERP 6.0 EhP7
GTSPI---�
Figure 7: System Landscape Overview
The SAP solution architecture for most of the end-to-end scenarios available at the moment for
SAP TM is shown here. For many SAP customers who already have an SAP ERP system. SAP TM
in combination with SAP EventManagement and GIS integration provides a solid foundation to
support transportation processes already integrated in existing ERP processes. SAP Business
Objects Global Trade Services. and mobile solutions. extend the transportation solution
landscape by providing additional capabilities for export compliance and mobility. respectively.
SAP TM can. optionally. interface with an SAP ERP system. an SAP EWM system. an SAP CRM
system. an SAP Global Trade Services (GTS) system. and an external geographical information
system (GIS). The Core Interface (CIF) is used for master data replication between SAP ERP and
SAP TM. Process Integration (Pl) is used for transactional data integration between the two
systems, and the external GIS system can provide geographical mapping data for transportation
routes. The Internet Graphics Service (IGS) uses this data to show the image on the screen.
System Landscape
SAP TM has to be installed and executed in its own instance. This instance includes the standard
SAP NetWeaver components Process Integration (Pl). TM Optimizer. Internet Graphics Service
(IGS). and SAP Event Management. The Pl interface provides the ability to exchange
transportation data with SAP or non-SAP systems. The SAP Event Management system can be
deployed on either the SAP TM system. the SAP ERP system, or its own system. SAP TM can also
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
15
E'
Unit 1: SAP Transportation Management (TM)
interface with Adobe Document Services to provide additional output functions such as Adobe
Forms and printing. There is also an interface between SAP TM and the SAP BW environment.
Software Component Architecture
SAPTMUI 140
SAP TM Ueer lnteitace 140
U15 �- for "Collabonlllci Portal"
SAPTM 140
SAPTllnlpOl'lallon �9.3
SAPGNTLB 200: SAP Gantt Library 2.0
1.§NITT Chart Bt:llH Com�
SCMBPLUS 713:SCM Basis PLUS 7.13
SCMB_EXT 713: SCMB_EXT 713
l
1
I
I
SAP SCM BASIS 713. SCM Basis 7.13
-
-
SAP_UI 740· SAP UI 7 40
I NW 740: Netweaver Bas,s 7.40
figure 8: Software Component Architecture
When installing an SAP TM server. some components are prerequisites (this also applies for
upgrades and support package installations). You can find the available stack(s) for installation.
upgrades, and Support Package installation on SAP Service Marketplace. SAP NetWeaver (NW),
SAP Business Suite Foundation (BS_FND). and SCM Basis are required for every installation of an
SCM application. When these are installed. certain deployment options are possible. For SAP TM.
this means it can be deployed together with SAP Event Management (SCEMSRV) on one server,
although this is not absolutely necessary.
During post-installations steps. it is mandatory to activate business functions for SAP TM-specific
capabilities on the SCM server. In SAP Event Management it is also mandatory to activate the
business function "SCM_EM_TMCONTENTOl". otherwise transportation visibility scenarios are
not available in the event manager. The SCM Basis component provides many functions in the
area of master data and master data integration with SAP ERP via the Core Interface (CIF). This is
also used for other SCM applications like APO and EWM. but there is a specific SAP TM flavor to
this master data. Most of the APO transactions will have a specific transaction code.
Business Functions For Integration with SAP ERP
In SAP ERP. there are business functions that can be activated to trigger integration with SAP TM.
The basic business functions are as follows:
16
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating the SAP TM System Landscape
•
LOG_TM_ORD_INT (Order Integration - New: EHP 605) - This business function allows your
business to integrate purchase orders. stock transport orders, and sales orders with the TM
system. This functionality allows new features to the various order types.
•
LOG_TM_IV _INT (Invoice Integration - New - EHP 604)) - This business function allows your
business to create. enter. process. or display invoices that belong to documents in SAP TM.
Additional Business Functions
In addition to SAP ERP. there are business functions that need to be activated in the SAP TM
system as well. These enterprise business functions are as follows:
•
SCM_EHS_DG_Cl_l (EH&S Services: Dangerous goods EHP 801) - Most of the APO
transactions have SAP TM specific transaction codes. These transactions have additional data
for TM or APO specific data has been removed.
•
SCM_EM_HIGHVOL (EM Archiving and Web Interface Improvements EHP 801) - Your
business can use this feature in high volume processing and archiving.
•
SCM_EM_CONTENTOl (EM. Visibility process for external TM systems EHP 801) - This
business function allows you to monitor different event handler types. for example, freight
units and freight orders
•
SCM_SCMB_TM_FNDl (Foundation of external SAP TM systems EHP 801) - This business
function enables the transfer of specific customer and vendor attributes from ECC to a
business partner in SCM Basis using the CIF.
•
SCM_SCMB_TR_NETWORK (Enhanced Services for Transportation Network EHP 801) - This
business function enables you to improve the geographical services used in the transportation
network.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
17
E'
Unit 1: SAP Transportation Management (TM)
18
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Exercise 2
Log on to the SAP ERP and SAP TM Systems
Business Example
For project team members performing configuration. the graphical approach to interacting with
the software may present some delays in painting screens. Therefore. SAP still provides an
option for accessing certain transactions and configuring SAP TM using the standard SAP GUI
rather than the NetWeaver Business Client. You are required to give a presentation to team
members on accessing the SAP TM and SAP ERP systems using the SAP GUI.
1. To access the SAP GUI. you need to locate the necessary system IDs in your personal SAP
Logon Pad. From the WTS/Cloud environment, open the SAP Logon window.
2. The SAP ERP system you will use for the duration of TMlOO is ZME. Log on to system ZME
using the following details: Client 800; User TMlOO-## (## represents your unique number
assigned for this course); Password - supplied by your instructor. The system prompts you to
change your password. Enter a password of your choice, consisting of at least six
alphanumeric characters. The password is case-sensitive.
3. The SAP TM system you will use for the duration of TMlOO is ZMT. Repeat the procedure you
have just carried out for an initial logon to ZME. substituting ZMT (SAP Transportation
Management) for ZME.
Log on to SAP TM using NetWeaver Business Client
For many releases. the SAP GUI has been the standard user interface for all levels of business
users. However. as the World Wide Web has grown in popularity, the need for a more userfriendly interface has increased. SAP's response to this is the NetWeaver Business Client.
SAP TM uses an HTML interface instead of the SAP GUI. Therefore. you must log on to the SAP
TM system using the NetWeaver Business Client.
»
Note:
The url may have been copied to your favorites. If so. you can copy the url from there
and paste it into the required field in the appropriate step of the exercise.
1. Log on to SAP TM, client 800. with user ID TM100-## (## was assigned to you by your
instructor). and the password you reset in the preceding task.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
19
E'
Unit 1
Solution 2
Log on to the SAP ERP and SAP TM Systems
Business Example
For project team members performing configuration, the graphical approach to interacting with
the software may present some delays in painting screens. Therefore. SAP still provides an
option for accessing certain transactions and configuring SAP TM using the standard SAP GUI
rather than the NetWeaver Business Client. You are required to give a presentation to team
members on accessing the SAP TM and SAP ERP systems using the SAP GUI.
1. To access the SAP GUI. you need to locate the necessary system IDs in your personal SAP
Logon Pad. From the WTS/Cloud environment, open the SAP Logon window.
a) From the WTS or cloud, open the Start menu and choose SAP Logon.
2. The SAP ERP system you will use for the duration of TMlOO is ZME. Log on to system ZME
using the following details: Client 800: User TMlOO·## (## represents your unique number
assigned for this course); Password· supplied by your instructor. The system prompts you to
change your password. Enter a password of your choice, consisting of at least six
alphanumeric characters. The password is case-sensitive.
a) In the SAP Logon window. highlight the row for ZME and choose Log On. Alternatively.
double-click the row.
b) In the Client field. enter 800.
c) In the User field, enter TMlOO-##.
d) In the Password field, enter the password supplied by your instructor.
e) Press Enter on your keyboard or choose Enter.
f) Enter and confirm a new password as prompted by the system.
g) Press Enter on your keyboard. or choose Transfer.
h) Make a note of your new password for future logons.
3. The SAP TM system you will use for the duration of TMlOO is ZMT. Repeat the procedure you
have just carried out for an initial logon to ZME. substituting ZMT (SAP Transportation
Management) for ZME.
Log on to SAP TM using NetWeaver Business Client
For many releases. the SAP GUI has been the standard user interface for all levels of business
users. However. as the World Wide Web has grown in popularity, the need for a more user·
friendly interface has increased. SAP's response to this is the NetWeaver Business Client.
SAP TM uses an HTML interface instead of the SAP GUI. Therefore. you must log on to the SAP
TM system using the NetWeaver Business Client.
20
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating the SAP TM System Landscape
Note:
The url may have been copied to your favorites. If so, you can copy the url from there
and paste it into the required field in the appropriate step of the exercise.
1. Log on to SAP TM, client 800. with user ID TMlOO-## (## was assigned to you by your
instructor), and the password you reset in the preceding task.
a) In the cloud. choose Start--+ All Programs --+ NetWeaver Business Client 4.0.
b) In the NWBC logon box, highlight the entry for ZMT and choose Logon.
c) Enter 800 in the Client field and your user TMlOO-## in the User field.
d) Enter your new password and choose Log On.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
21
E'
Unit 1: SAP Transportation Management (TM)
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
22
•
Explain the deployment options related to the SAP TM landscape
•
Log on to the SAP system
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following options are main functional areas of SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
D
A Order management
D
D
B Transportation planning
D
D Charges and settlement
c
Transportation execution
2. Transportation via courier parcel is not an option supported by SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
3. SAP TM must be used in conjunction with SAP ERP.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
4. In SAP TM, tracking functionality is provided via integration with SAP Event Management.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
23
E'
Unit 1: Learning Assessment
5. The Core Interface (CIF) is important for its role in which of these processes:
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
D
24
A Integrating geographical information to render maps on screen.
B Integrating data from mobile apps.
C Replicating master data between an SAP ERP and SAP TM system.
D Logging events in the transportation process.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 1
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following options are main functional areas of SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
0
A Order management
B Transportation planning
c
Transportation execution
D Charges and settlement
2. Transportation via courier parcel is not an option supported by SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
0
True
False
3. SAP TM must be used in conjunction with SAP ERP.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
4. In SAP TM, tracking functionality is provided via integration with SAP Event Management.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
25
E'
Unit 1: Learning Assessment - Answers
5. The Core Interface (CIF) is important for its role in which of these processes:
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
A Integrating geographical information to render maps on screen.
B Integrating data from mobile apps.
� C Replicating master data between an SAP ERP and SAP TM system.
D
D Logging events in the transportation process.
That's correct The Core Interface is used for master data replication between SAP ERP and
SAP TM.
26
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
SAP TM User Interface
Lesson 1
28
Identifying NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC) Components
Lesson 2
32
Configuring a Personal Object Worklist (POWL)
Exercise 3: Create a Query to Filter Transportation Requirements
35
Lesson 3
39
Customizing the Screen Layout in SAP TM
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Describe the NWBC structure
•
Navigate in the NWBC
•
Describe the requirements for transportation planning
•
Create a query to filter transportation requirements
•
Describe the screen layout in TM
•
Customize the screen layout in SAP TM
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
27
E'
Unit 2
Lesson 1
Identifying NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC)
Components
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, we'll take a look at interface options and at how to use SAP NetWeaver Business
Client (NWBC) to navigate in the SAP TM system.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe the NWBC structure
•
Navigate in the NWBC
NWBC Structure
Over the last 30 years the interface to the computer has changed immensely. In the 1970s. the
interface to the computer was through printed reports. These were static and often out-dated the
moment they were printed. The 1980s brought the mainframe and the green screen. Everything
was keyboard-driven, much of it through the use of function keys. In the early 1990s the graphical
user interface (GUI) appeared. and the use of the mouse became more prominent. When the
internet was made available to the public, the concept of using graphical objects rather than
keystrokes or navigating through menu paths became more popular.
When SA P's ERP product started to gain popularity in the 1990s. everything was menu and
function key-driven. At the start of the 21st century, SAP began developing more HTML or Weblike interfaces that were more intuitive for new users. replacing a standalone SAP GUI with one
formed in combination with the SAP NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC).
The SAP NetWeaver Business Client is an environment that hosts SAP GU ls to provide a unified
environment with a more efficient. intuitive and complete user experience. Within SAP NWBC you
can move seamlessly between Web Dynpro and SAP GUI transactions.
For the SAP GUI to run within SAP NWBC. it must first be installed. either as part of an SAP
NWBC installation or separately.
SAP NWBC 4.0 is available in two versions: a desktop version and an HTML version. This session
focuses mainly on the former. and this is the version we expect most of our customers to install.
28
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC) Components
Maximizing your users' productivity
• Individual contributor with structured tasks
• Routine, transactional work
• Uses only one or two enterprise applications
• Mainly works with structured data
• Demands fast access
• Sample roles: payroll clerk, customer service rep.,
financial analyst
Figure 9: SAP NWBC for Desktop
SAP NW8C targets the following business requirements:
,
Intuitive. consistent and harmonized user interactions across all SAP Uls
•
High-performance desktop client for frequent. high-volume and expert tasks
,
Zero-footprint. browser client for occasional tasks and 828 I 82C scenarios
•
Quick access to data and information that is pushed to users. or pulled via search
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
29
E'
Unit 2: SAP TM User Interface
SAP NetWeaver Business Client for Desktop
fJ
..
-�-"'""-
·---._._.._.....
>
N
-__-,,_., . ·-�-,....�
___,___
·-·--"-0-
•'-_,_._
.i:.,--
._,
..)
-o---..--
·--r..---\--N
·---
·---__-0.-·-.
--�--·-·-hl'¥MOn1,r
bar
Tab
conce t
_.,.
Content
area
..-__
�--�-,..._
.w----. __....,_o.,
.
Navigation
panel
---�------
Favorites
panel
__ __
,_
Figure 10: N\11/BC Layout
The desktop version of NWBC is aimed at the power user. It is installed on the desktop, embeds
SAP GUI for Windows, and incorporates a full range of functions. It is a rich desktop client that
offers a unified environment for, and a single point of entry to. SAP applications. It considers the
individual contributor or employee who has structured repetitive tasks. Instead of accessing
several applications, the typical user may only be accessing one or two. The transactions the
individual executes are business events that impact day-to-day operations and access structured
data that demands consistency.
NWBC allows companies access to all kinds of data. It provides a solution for hosting classical
dynpros (SAP GUls). Web Dynpro applications. Business Server Page (BSP) pages, portal pages.
and other content. You can use NWBC either with or without the portal. depending on whether
you want to access ABAP back ends directly or not. NWBC also supports generic desktop
functions like drag and drop, popup windows. and so on. through the utilization of the
corresponding APls. The result is an efficient. modern. and attractive client environment ideally
suited to the power user.
SAP NetWeaver Business Client for HTML
NWBC for HTML is a browser-based shell (available only for ABAP systems) for casual use
scenarios. It requires zero installation since it uses SAP GUI for HTML. However. there are certain
limitations: no search function. no overflow menu. no dropdown menus or drag and drop
capability. Within this environment, all SAP GUI transactions are rendered using the SAP GUI for
HTML rendering engine.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
30
Describe the NWBC structure
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying NetWeaver Business Client (NWBC) Components
•
Navigate in the NWBC
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
31
E'
Unit 2
Lesson 2
Configuring a Personal Object Worklist (POWL)
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson looks at using personal object worklists to streamline users' work processes and
bring clear focus to relevant transportation requirements.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe the requirements for transportation planning
•
Create a query to filter transportation requirements
Personal Object Worklist
Query
Active
Queries
Cate ories
Application-related
buttons I Documentbased functionality
AcUV. OU•nts
I> .U�Ulib(\18j
fn!Qlll
r......-.u....
,-,,. � ,.. "--
·-
*41(3)
::,c::=;4 ..,co,.., INlff,
M.
°""'""
Personalization
M 1
,...,.,�!!�
Quick Criteria
Maintenenance
F,..IQ.1\1 OftltfS • A.II
•
"-�!!llo(lt.
$J!X.fJtfnr.lr)J.
woo-
........
,....,,,
"'""
.....
_,,
�
Views
.,,.
-·�
..... ,,...
._,
,_
0-h
.........
....=·
,a,.ql,t,.,i-,
�
Document
Navi at ion
UQ.'1$'N"1
""..,"'-"""'
CW'•S"IAJ'l"VO
.,.......It;
..... . _....._. ·-- --�. .....-"""·.
._
SPl1!1!
Ol,F�A,.PTVQ
--_
....._ .
....
..
_
·-..._ _
....·--_ ·-·
Result List
���o:,,:_...
·---·· �·· _--.
'""'''"
-
o.-
• ·($enlJ��
Change
I Define
Queries
Filtering,
Sorting
ur.o,,,e�.
.,Pooc-
,
..
..
5'1,....� •
W...°'f�
�
'4,fn
11111$**
"'·""°'
<W';n,�$
14(11&".J*4
°"·""""
...._._
""·"""'
i,
•
""""'
""""'
""""''
""""'
....
....
Settings
Figure 11: Personal Object Worklists
One of the more flexible tools available to users via NWBC is the personal object worklist. The
personal object worklist provides central. personalized access to document lists. It gives users a
portal-based interface that they can use to define (and optionally store) queries in a similar way
they are used to from SAP ERP selection screen variants. This tool allows users to easily access
queries. and create. change. delete. or categorize queries. Application-related buttons provide
object-based functions. The data table can be filtered and other settings applied. Users can
personalize the data table and refresh a single query or all queries. The user sees the very latest
32
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring a Personal Object Worklist (POWL)
information thanks to a high performance refreshing and caching mechanism. Updates run
asynchronously and worklists remain available until results are refreshed.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
33
E'
Unit 2: SAP TM User Interface
34
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Exercise 3
Create a Query to Filter Transportation
Requirements
Business Example
You have been asked to create a query for Order-Based Transportation Requirements (OTRs). for
products that fall within your area of responsibility.
1. In NWBC. execute the Order-Based Transportation requirements query.
2. What is the result of the refresh?
3. Your company uses several different document types to manage various processes. Create a
new query by restricting the OTRs to type TR##. Call it OTR Type TR##.
4. What is the result of the steps you carried out in the previous step?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
35
E'
Unit 2
Solution 3
Create a Query to Filter Transportation
Requirements
Business Example
You have been asked to create a query for Order-Based Transportation Requirements (OTRs). for
products that fall within your area of responsibility.
1. In NWBC. execute the Order-Based Transportation requirements query.
a) In NWBC, choose ERP Logistics Integration -> Worklist -> Overview Transportation
Requirements .
b) Choose Refresh (Refresh Current Query) above the result table or in the bottom right of
the screen.
2. What is the result of the refresh?
The query shows all order-based transportation requirements that have been integrated to
SAP TM.
3. Your company uses several different document types to manage various processes. Create a
new query by restricting the OTRs to type TR##. Call it OTR Type TR##.
a) Choose Define New Query (on the upper right of the results table).
b) In the Select Object Type field. select Order-Based Transportation Requirement.
c) In the Select Existing Query as Te,nplate field. choose Order-Based Transportation
Requirements - All.
d) Choose Next.
e) On the following screen, scroll to the top and in the OTR Type field. enter TR##.
f) Scroll down and choose Next.
g) Enter a description for the query as follows: OTR Type TR##.
h) In the Select Category field. select Order-Based Transportation Requirements.
i) Select the Activate Query checkbox and choose Finish.
36
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Configuring a Personal Object Worklist (POWL)
4. What is the result of the steps you carried out in the previous step?
You have created a new query that can be executed to report on a specific order type. At the
moment. the query is not returning any result. This is because no Order-Based Transportation
Requirement with document type TR## has been created. These will be created in later
exercises. after that the query will return those as results.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
37
E'
Unit 2: SAP TM User Interface
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
38
•
Describe the requirements for transportation planning
•
Create a query to filter transportation requirements
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Lesson 3
Customizing the Screen Layout in SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson explores the use of Floorplan Manager to customize SAP TM screens in the most
effective and user friendly configuration.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
Describe the screen layout in TM
•
Customize the screen layout in SAP TM
Floorplan Manager
Floorplan Manager (FPM) is a framework that allows you to create and configure Web Dynpro
applications in Web Dynpro ASAP. You can use the FPM configuration editor to combine
application-specific views of one or more business applications within a new FPM application.
Application
windows
-= ._ ·-·.
-=-�--· -==--'..:•
-- .
�-=-
FPM
configuration
Floorplan
application
__
_.,....
_____
•
-- -- - -_
--H
-- ------- ·--_.. .
- - --- ....
---�-.. ------·...
,,
+ •
�,... � .. � .;;;;l
.. -.-·
-ri'-1-,- - -
.
- - t·-�
- ....._--,
- - t-w •
,,
Figure 12: Floorplan Manager - Combining Application Views
SAP TM UI Advantages
The SAP TM UI with NWBC provides the following advantages:
•
Increased development efficiency for floorplan user interfaces - allows Uls to be created by
configuration only
•
Improved adaptation capabilities for the customer without the need to modify Web Dynpro
coding
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
39
E'
Unit 2: SAP TM User Interface
•
Increased consistency across applications by reusing generic UI building blocks
•
The design of all cross-application components of a user interface is defined by the FPM,
following the SAP user interface design guidelines
•
Users of such applications benefit from a high level of recognition. enabling them to quickly
and easily familiarize themselves with new applications
•
The integration of design templates such as floorplans and generic user interface building
blocks into FPM accelerates the creation of user interfaces. and ensures that the user
interfaces behave consistently across different applications
•
Time-consuming user interface programming is greatly reduced
•
Simple applications are adjusted by configuring the underlying Web Dynpro components and
not by additional programming
•
SAP TM standard roles are delivered as PFCG roles
•
Menu in NWBC is role-based (similar to SAP ERP and other SAP applications)
•
Personal Object Worklist (POWL) displayed under the Active Query section
•
SAP TM is designed with management by exception in mind, so the standard POWL queries
are designed to push work to the user whose intervention is required in any given case
•
A user may have multiple windows open. for example. work on two forwarding orders
simultaneously
•
Queries can be personalized (similar to variants in the SAP GUI)
•
No transaction codes are used in NWBC
•
Fields can be populated with default values (must be defined by the user)
•
Fields can easily be added by the user
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
40
•
Describe the screen layout in TM
•
Customize the screen layout in SAP TM
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 2
Learning Assessment
1. Which elements are available in the NWBC?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Navigation Panel
B Favorites panel
c
Search Bar
D List Painter
2. Which elements are available in the POWL?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Quick Criteria Maintenance
B Personalization
c
Views
D Settings
3. Which of the following is true in relation to FPM?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
A Using FPM. Uls can be configured without coding.
B Floorplan applications always use classical SAP GUI.
C Generic UI building blocks can be used to configure Uls.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
41
E'
Unit 2
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which elements are available in the NWBC?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
D
A Navigation Panel
B Favorites panel
c
Search Bar
D List Painter
2. Which elements are available in the POWL 7
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
0
A Quick Criteria Maintenance
B Personalization
c
Views
D Settings
3. Which of the following is true in relation to FPM7
Choose the correct answers.
42
0
A Using FPM. Uls can be configured without coding.
D
B Floorplan applications always use classical SAP GUI.
0
C Generic UI building blocks can be used to configure Uls.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
SAP TM Master Data
Lesson 1
Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
Exercise 4: List the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
45
49
Lesson 2
65
Evaluating the Organizational Structures Used in SAP TM
Lesson 3
73
77
Defining a Condition
Exercise 5: Display a Condition
Lesson 4
82
85
Determining a Freight Incompatibility
Exercise 6: View Incompatibilities
Lesson 5
Determining a Dangerous Goods Shipping Requirement
90
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
List the master data elements supporting the different activities in TM
•
List the master data elements that define the transportation network
•
Explain the purpose of organizational structures
•
Control outbound freight using organizational structures
•
Control Forwarding Orders (FWOs) using organizational structures
•
Evaluate an organization for planning and execution structures
•
Create an organizational structure
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
43
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
44
•
Determine the conditions used to customize a business process
•
Display a condition or restriction
•
Examine how incompatibilities can be used to control the outcome of business processes
•
View incompatibilities
•
Describe dangerous goods in terms of environment, health. and safety regulations
•
View a dangerous goods master
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Lesson 1
Identifying the Master Data Requirements for
SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW
Master data is an integral part of any planning system. You create and maintain master data over
the course of an object's lifecycle. It offers companies consistency when executing their various
business processes. In this lesson. you will learn what master data is relevant for SAP
Transportation Management. and what challenges your organization may face in managing the
integration of new objects needed to support the SAP TM system.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
List the master data elements supporting the different activities in TM
•
List the master data elements that define the transportation network
Master Data in SAP TM
•
--- -�-
Transfer from
..__
------ --- ----.--- :i:� -l!:
-«
SAP ERP
�
•
-=-
•
•
-·- --�-·-·-
---·---------«-
......_......
-•----·
---
I
t!:
•
;
·-·-···
-
·---··----·
-- JIOI
··----.-!(.
·--"'"'
·-...-
o»
II>
--·-----···-----·-. .--«-·
-·---�,..n•�-
-----·--;,--..,,W
·- -
O O
RQIII
Figure 13: Basic SAP TM Master Data Requirements
The SAP TM system can perform its functions independently of the existing product. location.
and partner master data. The transaction data in SAP TM can be created without existing master
data (optional) in the case of third-party logistics providers (3PLs). 3PLs basically provide a
service. as in the case of an ERP system. master data is not essential. Planning and execution can
be performed in SAP TM with only a minimal master data set that can be created and maintained
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
45
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
exclusively in SAP TM. As an additional scenario, SAP TM can work with master data. customer,
materials. in order to support an end-to-end scenario for a manufacturer or distributor.
For ease of maintenance, an SAP TM owner may wish to create customer master data to avoid
frequent unnecessary entries. In this case, the SAP TM owner may want to reuse existing master
data from SAP ERP. Therefore. SAP TM offers the following choices:
•
Work without certain master data elements
•
Create master data directly in SAP TM
•
Integrate existing master data from SAP ERP. (Note that SAP TM cannot integrate rate master
data from SAP ERP)
ERP Master Data Relevant to SAP TM
Whenever an SAP TM system is implemented and integrated with an SAP ERP system. ERP
master data needs to be synchronized and used in the SAP TM system. Some examples of
business scenarios where SAP TM is integrated with the ERP system are as follows:
•
Domestic/international outbound transportation
In these scenarios. order integration is initiated from SAP ERP as a shipper needs to perform
shipping activities with the SAP TM system. Sales order integration and delivery integration is
the key to this process. Thus. master data for customers. plants. shipping points. and material
master data has to be transferred to the SAP TM system from SAP ERP to support
consistency between planning and execution.
•
Domestic/international inbound transportation
In this scenario, TM is integrated with ERP and the process is triggered by purchase order
integration. Consequently, ERP master data like vendors. plants. shipping points and material
master data needs to be synchronized to plan and execute the SAP TM processes.
•
Outsourced transportation
ERP order creation triggers SAP TM to perform order-based carrier selection. tendering, and
execution. Consequently, the ERP system becomes the lead system for master data for
locations. business partners, products, carriers. and so on.
In certain business environments. SAP TM can be implemented as a standalone system. In this
case. transportation demands can be created directly within the SAP TM system. Consequently,
master data can be created directly in the SAP TM system and executed in the SAP TM system.
SAP Core Interface: Creating and Activating Integration Models
The Core Interface or CIF is the technology that is used to transfer the master data from ERP to
TM. Master data is normally scheduled for batch transfer once a day. The transfer of master data
changes can be scheduled periodically as a job. You have to define a variant (containing the
target system -TM - and the selection of master data objects) for the program RCPTRAN4
(hidden behind transaction CFPl). Please note that SAP has renamed some of the master data
elements in SAP TM versus the names of some objects in SAP ERP (for example. material in SAP
ERP is called a product in SAP TM). Before you transfer the master-data, the following
prerequisites need to be satisfied:
46
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
•
You have completed the SAP ERP system configuration to connect to the SAP TM system.
This defines the specific server and client to which SAP ERP will transmit the data.
•
You have completed the SAP TM system configuration to connect to the SAP ERP system.
Since SAP TM can be integrated with your SAP ERP system. SAP TM needs to know the
physical location and client of the SAP ERP system to which it will transmit planning and
execution data.
Integration Models
Integration models are the first step in transferring master data. These are created using
transaction CFMl (Create Integration Model) in the SAP ERP system. You typically create at least
one integration model for each object and filter the objects you want to transfer to assist you in
building your transportation network in SAP TM. In some cases. you create program variants of
the selection. This allows your company to schedule the creation of an integration model on a
daily basis and integrate any new materials with SAP TM. It also allows the two systems to be
synchronized if updates have taken place in SAP ERP.
Once these integration models have been created. a second background job is triggered to
activate the new integration models. The activation of the integration models triggers the data
transfer from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Note that master data integration only occurs in one direction,
from SAP ERP to SAP TM. to ensure the execution system is still the lead system (system of
record).
SAP TM Additional Master Data
To support advanced planning features and ensure consistency with the execution process. SAP
TM requires additional master data to support its own internal processes. The master data
elements or features that support master data in SAP TM are as follows:
•
Business Partners
Business partners represent a person. organization. group of persons. or group of
organizations in which a company has a business interest. This business object is used for a
variety of business transactions. You create and manage your business partners (BPs) and
the roles they assume for your company centrally. You define the general business partner
data once and assign business partner roles (BP roles) to the business partner. Specific data
is stored for each business partner role. In this way, you do not store redundant data, since the
general data is independent of a business partner's function or application-specific
extensions. When you first create a business partner in the system. the BP role General
Business Partner is automatically assigned to the business partner. In an integrated system
landscape with SAP ERP and SAP TM. the ERP system is frequently the leading master data
system. In this case. the customer and supplier master data is maintained in the ERP system.
from where it is transferred to SAP TM as locations and business partners using the SAP Core
Interface (CIF).
•
Carrier Profiles
A carrier profile identifies the transportation capabilities of a carrier. Carriers are business
partners with the role "Carrier". Within the carrier's profile. you can define characteristics like
freight code sets, transportation lane and carrier-specific parameters. product freight groups.
transportation groups, equipment groups. equipment types. and so on.
•
Products
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
47
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
A product or product master allows your company to edit products that have been transferred
from ERP. You can also generate new products here. but we always recommend you keep a
leading system. like ERP. In an integrated system landscape with SAP ERP and SAP TM. the
ERP system is frequently the leading master data system. In this case. the product master
data is maintained in the ERP system. where it is managed as materials and transferred to
SAP TM via the SAP Core Interface (CIF).
Mass Maintenance
Mass maintenance allows your company to maintain the following objects en masse:
transportation lanes. locations, products. and resources. Where-used features allow your
company to find the following objects and see where they are used: calculation sheet. hierarchy,
location. location/product. product. product-specific transportation lane. rates. resources.
scales, transportation service provider, transportation lane, and transportation zone.
48
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Exercise 4
List the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
Business Example
Before your company implements SAP TM. you have been asked to investigate the basic master
data requirements.
1. What options do you have for creating master data in SAP TM?
2. When is it mandatory to transfer master data from SAP ERP?
3. What master data can be created directly in SAP TM?
4. What master data can be transferred from SAP ERP?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
49
E'
Unit 3
Solution 4
List the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
Business Example
Before your company implements SAP TM. you have been asked to investigate the basic master
data requirements.
1. What options do you have for creating master data in SAP TM?
Master data can be integrated from SAP ERP or can be maintained directly in SAP TM. A
mixture of both approaches is also supported.
2. When is it mandatory to transfer master data from SAP ERP?
If you want to integrate business documents from SAP ERP to SAP TM in a shipper scenario.
the relevant master data first needs to be transferred to SAP TM.
3. What master data can be created directly in SAP TM?
Master data relating to locations. business partners. and products (among others) can be
created directly in SAP TM.
4. What master data can be transferred from SAP ERP?
Master data relating to customers. vendors. plants. shipping points. and materials (among
others) can be transferred from SAP ERP.
50
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
Transportation Network
g-�!o.. _..
/ '/1},;_.j-�e
Transportabon
zones
A TransportationNefwofkis
based on the followino main etemerts:
• LocaliOns
• Trannh!pmenllotations
8
.....
J
�
Cl
�
�
• Transportation lants
• Transportation zones
Figure 14: Transportation Network Overview
The master data in SAP TM can be described as a transportation network. To support proper
transportation planning and execution. several master data elements are needed. When
combined. these elements outline a transportation network comprised of the following elements:
•
Locations (customers. vendors. plants. shipping points. ports. airports. hubs .... )
•
Transportation zones and zone hierarchies
•
Transportation lanes
•
Schedules
Depending on the scenarios that are implemented. the transportation network can be simple or
progressively more complex.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
51
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Locations
ERP Master Data
TM Master Data
• Plant
Creation in TM
• Port
• Customer
• Vendor
• Location with
Location Type
• Shipping point
• Airport
• Railway Station
• Hub
• Gateway
•
• ••
• Locations:
• Are geo-coded (longitude and latitude)
• Can be assigned lo transportation zones
• Can act as transshipment locations
• Can be specific to transactional data (one-time addresses)
• Are the nodes of the transportation networks
Figure 15: Locations in the Transportation Network
A supply chain or network is made up of several different nodes and locations, potentially acting
alone or working together.
Integrated Location Types
Locations are objects that are used for further definitions. such as transportation lanes and so on.
Table 1: Location Types in SAP TM
You can define the following location types in SAP TM.
52
ID
Location Type
1001
Production Plant
1002
Distribution Center
1003
Shipping Point
1010
Customer
1011
Vendor
1030
Terminal
1100
Port
1110
Airport
1120
Railway Station
1130
Container Freight Station
1140
Hub
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
ID
Location Type
1150
Gateway
1160
Container Yard
1170
Warehouse
1180
Carrier Warehouse
1190
Rail Junction
1191
Border Crossing Point
Location Types in the Transportation Network
If a plant. customer. or vendor is transferred from SAP ERP to SAP TM. and a transportation zone
is maintained for this object. then during the transfer of master data. the following occurs:
•
The plant. customer. or supplier location is created.
•
The plant. customer. or supplier location is assigned to the transportation zone in the SAP TM·
relevant hierarchy.
SAP ERP master data is transferred to SAP TM using the APO Core Interface (CIF). Based on
different Customizing entries. master data elements from SAP ERP are reflected in SAP TM as
locations with different types. As these locations are created. a geocoder determines the
geographical coordinates (longitude and latitude) from a given address. These coordinates are
used to determine distances between locations.
In an ERP system that is processing sales orders. situations arise when an order is created for a
new customer that is a one time transaction. Transportation will have to be planned and this
could cause a large amount of master data that will quickly become obsolete. One-time-ship-to
locations can be created in two ways. as follows:
•
Manually, by the user in the forwarding order user interface
•
Automatically (by the system). based on the address of an incoming transportation request to
SAP TM
Temporary locations created in SAP TM can later be deleted in batch. An existing business
partner (for example. shipper or consignee) is needed to make the association of the new
address. The deletion of one-time-ship-to locations is included in the reorganization job for
locations. This batch job checks for the existence of orders for this location. Only when there are
no more orders. for example, sales orders. deliveries. or shipments. is this location deleted. The
report for deleting locations is /SAPAPO/DELETE_LOCATIONS.
Transshipment Locations and Default Routes
Transshipment locations are used for unloading goods from one vehicle resource and loading
them onto another vehicle resource during the transportation process. This function is necessary
when different means of transport or different transportation service providers (carriers) have to
be used to execute a transportation process, for example, truck-ocean-truck; truck-rail-truck.
Transshipment locations may also be used when consolidating or de-consolidating goods to be
transported.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
53
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Default Routes
A default route defines the sequence of stops for a given source/destination location
combination. Default routes can be used in place of transshipment chains with sales orders and
deliveries. forwarding orders. and forwarding quotations. Default routes can be modified
manually where the desired route is different to that proposed by the system.
Where no default route exists between two locations. it is possible to specify a default route type.
The default route type determines the sequence of transshipment locations for a given pair of
locations or, in an LCL ocean freight scenario. identifies the route for a forwarding order. You can
also assign a transportation mode to your default route type to specify, for example. whether
freight is to be transported by road or sea.
Transportation Zones
• Transportation zones can dramatically reduce the effort needed to model
your geographic network. Grouping locations into zones effectively reduces
master data volume in the system.
• Zone types
0
• Direct
0
0
• Postal Code
• Region
0
0
0
0
• Mixed
Legend
0
O Locations
0Hubs I Transshi
Figure 16: Transportation Zones
Transportation zones and zone hierarchies are used to group together a number of locations, as
required by transportation and logistics processes. Again. transportation zones are in turn used
to define other objects such as transportation lanes that define legitimate supply routes. To
improve master data maintenance. the zones are also part of a zone hierarchy. The zone
hierarchy is used in functions like transshipment locations and optimizer transportation lane
definitions.
You can group locations into transportation zones. The system can partly transfer the properties
that you assign to a transportation zone to all its locations. This function reduces the volume of
master data stored in the system.
Transportation zones can group locations (customers. vendors) as well as other zones. One-time
locations are also included in transportation zones. Zones are included with their locations and
sub-zones.
The following zone types are possible:
54
•
Direct Zone - locations are assigned directly to a zone
•
Postal Code Zone - specified by a postal code or postal code range
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
•
Region Zone - specified by a country or region, for example, the state of Florida in the US
•
Mixed Zone - a combination of the three other zone types
Note:
If SAP ERP integration is used, then the transportation zones are automatically
created from the address of the location (for example. customers, vendors, shipping
points). and the location is automatically assigned to the transportation zone.
Transportation zones group locations and other zones.
Transportation Zone Hierarchies
You can define the SAP TM-relevant hierarchy in Customizing. Choose Transportation
Management_, Transportation Network_, Define Transportation Zone Hierarchy.
The following conditions apply when you define a transportation zone hierarchy:
•
You cannot assign a transportation zone to itself.
•
You cannot assign a transportation zone A to another zone B if B already contains A.
Transportation Lanes
Transportation lanes represent the relationship between two locations. two transportation zones,
or a combination of locations and zones that expresses the direct reachability of the locations or
of all locations within the zones for a specific means of transport. You use this business object
when planning distribution and procurement between different locations.
A transportation lane is required to plan transports from one location to another with
a certain means of transport and a certain carrier.
• Represents a direct route between two locations to transport freight from one location to
another.
• Transportation lanes are typically maintained on transportation zone level
• Defined by:
DC
• Source and target locations
�
• Direction
• Available MTR
• Carrier per MTR
• Maintenance:
• Individual
• Mass maintenance
-
...
�Supplier
Customer
Plant
�
C)
Transportation
Zone
Transportation
anes
• Using transportation zones as the start and/or destination considerably reduces the amount of
transportation lanes to maintain.
Figure 17: Transportation Lanes
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
55
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
A transportation lane points only in one direction. To model the reverse direction. you need to
create another transportation lane.
Types of Transportation Lane
Transportation lanes can be defined to run between two locations, two zones. between a location
and a zone. or between a zone and itself.
Information assigned to a Lane
The following information is assigned to a lane:
•
Source/origin and target/destination location
•
Means of transport
Validity
Distance/duration
Costs
Carrier selection settings
•
Carrier (assigned to means of transport)
Business partner
Transportation costs
Priority
Continuous move
Transportation Resources
• Type of transport, e.g.
road or sea
Mode of
Trans� (MoT)
Means of
Transpqrt (MTr)
• Method of transport
• e.g. railcar, truck,
refrigerated truck, LTL,
FTL, barge, vessel
Vehicles I Resources
Vehicle/Resource
• e.g. maintenance of
capacities, depot
locations, .. .for individual
vehicles
Figure 18: Mode of Transport. Means of Transport. Transportation Resources
56
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
To simplify planning (conditions). a means of transport can be assigned to a transportation mode
category - road. rail, air or sea. This category is represented by the transportation mode code.
Means of Transport and Transportation Resources
Means of Transport
•
represents a 'class' of vehicles
•
is used to define cost structures and geographical
availability (via the concept of transportation lanes)
•
is used to determine whether a resource is part of
your own fleet or that of an external provider
A means of transport is used in connection with a
transportation lane to define the following business rules:
• Where is the MTr available (from where to where)...=,_,..____�
•
•
•
a
Which carriers are available for the MTr in this
region/connection?
Cl
How should carrier selection be performed for this
MTr in this region/connection?
s
a
What are the costs for the MTr in this
region/connection?
�
,Q.
Cl
:ig
Ill:!
Q
Figure 19: Means Of Transport
Means of transport are classes of vehicle resources, for example. a container ship or a cargo ship.
You assign a means of transport to each vehicle resource.
The means of transport is used to represent a "method" of transportation such as a truck with full
truck load capacity or a refrigerated truck. The means of transport are assigned to vehicle
resources in SAP TM master data. In addition. the means of transport is assigned to
transportation lanes. Vehicle resources are used to represent a unit of transportation and its
capacity and planning parameters. A vehicle resource is independent of a particular carrier.
Examples of MTrs: ship. aircraft. truck (15 to). truck (25 to) An MTr could also represent
refrigerated trucks with a specific cost structure and geographic availability.
Own Means of Transport
Vehicles belonging to an MTr that are flagged as "Own means of transport" have specific
attributes. as follows:
,
Vehicles belonging to an MTr that have the own means of transport indicator set can have a
depot location. Depending on the Customizing settings, the optimizer makes sure the
resource starts and ends at this depot location within one optimization run.
•
To use the own means of transport function. you have to set the indicator in the means of
transport and assign a location to the resource master data.
,
In relation to planning, on completion of the freight order planned by the optimizer. the vehicle
must always return to the depot location (if the indicator on the MTr is set).
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
57
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Means of Transport Hierarchies
To define a means of transport hierarchy. in the SAP TM Customizing menu choose
Transportation Management-> Master Data -> Transportation Network-> Maintain Means of
Transport. Create a main MTr and then assign this to the sub-Mfr in the Superior MTr field.
Transportation Resources
Vehicle Resource
Passive
Transportation Unit
Calendar Resource for
Opening Times
=�-,
Handling Resources
Figure 20: Transportalion Resources
Transportation resources are instances of means of transport that allow detailed planning to take
place. taking availability. suitability or various restrictions into account.
Resources must be created in SAP TM.
A vehicle resource always represents a specific vehicle. for example:
•
Double-axis truck with maximum number of 20 pallets. 12 tons weight capacity. 37 m3.
•
Unloading forklift with a capacity of 100 tons per hour.
Calendar resources are used to model when a location is available for loading/unloading. They
are assigned to a location.
Handling resources specify the available capacity and the hours in which they can be operated.
Resources can have different capacity dimensions. can contain shifts. and are always assigned to
a means of transport.
Transportation units are used to model cargo units that have to be moved by a vehicle resource.
They include containers - flatbed or chassis. They can only be configured/loaded manually.
Transportation Resource Capacities
A vehicle resource is an instance of a particular means of transport. or a group of identical
instances of means of transport that can provide transportation services.
You use the vehicle resource to map the capacity and availability of vehicles that you want to use
for transportation. You can choose up to eight dimensions and units of measurement to describe
58
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
the capacity (mass and volume are predefined by default). Planning can only take the vehicle
capacity into account if these correspond to the dimensions and units of measurement that you
have defined in a freight unit building rule.
Depending on the MTr, a vehicle resource can be modeled with or without capacity and may be
'active' or 'passive'. as follows:
•
Active • can move by itself
•
Passive· must be pulled by another resource.
MTr combinations can be used to model truck and trailer combinations Multi resources can be
used to model an external fleet in one step.
Compartments
Compartments can be used to indicate a division of the vehicle resource (truck) and also the
trailer into smaller units. They offer the following benefits:
•
Flexible and fixed compartments
•
Incompatibilities can be used to restrict certain freight units from being transported together.
The use of compartments allows you to assign dangerous goods to certain areas of the truck. In
addition. use of compartments improves transportation planning for oil and gas. chemical, retail,
and consumer products.
Capacity constraints can be specified for compartments (for example. for trucks and trailers.
these vehicle combinations are considered simultaneously).
Means of Transport Combinations
A means of transport combination is an instance of a particular means of transport. or a group of
identical instances of means of transport that can provide transportation services. You use this
business object to map the capacity and availability of vehicles that you want to use for
transportation.
MTr combinations have the following attributes:
•
They can be used to model a truck and trailer combination.
•
You specify the number of the objects of each MTr within the combination. for example, 1
truck and 2 trailers.
•
You specify capacities (several UoM): Maximum capacities of the combination.
•
Additional (freely definable) attributes can be used for compatibilities and incompatibilities:
based on a customizable attribute definition (code+ text).
•
Coupling/un·coupling durations are defined per passive MTr.
Integration of Resources into the Transportation Network
Vehicle resources are used to represent a unit of transportation as well as its capacity and
planning parameters. A vehicle resource is independent of a particular carrier. but a means of
transport is assigned to the resource master data to represent the means by which the
transportation between locations is executed.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
59
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Schedules
<
<
<
<
<
<
<
e-
Ocean Carrier Schedule
Port of
Newark
Gateway
•
<
_,._ .....- -. ..
---�..�-..
--=
...
-·- ........
..,-.:.
..,
,
.,
B
•'V'•l'C;:- �
..,
-- ..
_,ICl'Tjt,I
90"·-�
._,
:.
,,.......10
..··.-...
1t,.... ,)
Port of Hamburg
..------------------i
Ocean
Ocean
Gateway
Sailing Schedule with Gateway (CFS)
Figure 21: Schedules
When transporting goods from one location to another, firms don't always have the luxury of
moving the product whenever they choose. In many cases certain partners have strict schedules
they must adhere to in order to make efficient use of resources. and some of these resources
may be rented. In this section, we examine how TM can make use of schedules in order to deal
with means of transport that operate on a strict schedule.
Schedules can be created to define fixed times of departure or arrival schedules for certain
means of transport. such as vessel sailing schedules or airline flight schedules where. due to the
immense infrastructure requirements. capacity is limited and at a premium. Defining schedules
helps determine transportation proposals and optimization.
Schedules define a sequence of transportation stops such as ports. airports, or gateways that is
valid for a specific period of time. Ships, trucks, or airplanes can move goods at recurring times
along the whole sequence or any part of it. The movement of goods depends on the
transportation duration between each of the stops as well as the cut-off times and the length of
stay at each stop.
As part of the schedule concept, you can use different carrier schedules and gateway schedules
to define information about your stop sequence. Schedules are supported by the optimizer. A
means of transport can be assigned to a schedule. Schedule types now exist to support air freight
scenarios.
Application of Schedules
Intensive planning is required when exporting goods to other countries using ocean or air freight.
In such instances, a shipper will have to make use of a freight forwarder or contact a shipping line
directly to reserve capacity on a container ship. Unlike a road-based scenario in which business
partners are typically plentiful. fewer potential partners are likely to be available for ocean
voyages.
60
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
When shipping product via air or ocean. you must take into account that your partners are
typically renting space at a port facility. This facility is being used by many parties and options for
moving product may be limited.
While the road-based scenario can make use of a variety of transportation lanes due to the
flexibility of the carriers. ocean and air carriers often face more competition on the one hand and
more regulation on the other. This limits the flexibility for departures and arrivals. When looking at
this from a transportation planning perspective. the implication is that you may need something
more structured and predictable for scheduling purposes.
With SAP TM. your organization can take advantage of different types of schedules to model
specific departure and arrival rules suited to air and ocean shipping.
Schedule Types
SAP TM allows businesses to create different schedule types to handle the multiple shipping
scenarios they may encounter. Schedules can be maintained for each business partner or carrier.
and can identify different loading and unloading points such as ports and airports.
Carrier Schedules
Carrier schedules describe a sequence of transportation stops where the start stop and the
target stop are not gateways. A gateway is a transportation hub. where freight is consolidated
and deconsolidated.
By specifying departure rules in carrier schedules. you can generate voyages, flights, and
departures automatically. The system calculates the arrival and departure dates and times at
each transportation stop in the sequence. taking into account the transit duration. cut-off times.
and availability of the goods for each stop. You can then modify each generated voyage
individually.
In the standard SAP TM delivery, the following carrier schedules are supplied:
•
Ocean Carrier Schedule: Use the ocean carrier schedule to define a standard sequence of
transportation stops that are served by a ship. By specifying departure rules. you can generate
voyages automatically.
•
Carrier Flight Schedule: Use the carrier flight schedule to define a standard sequence of
transportation stops that are served by a plane. By specifying departure rules, you can
generate flights automatically.
•
Road Schedule: Use the road schedule to define a standard sequence of transportation stops
that are served by a truck.
Gateway Schedules
Gateway schedules are schedules whose start stops and destination stops are transportation
hubs (gateways). such as container freight stations (CFS). When you create a gateway schedule.
you can enter a reference to a carrier schedule and transfer departure rules and voyages from the
carrier schedule to the gateway schedule. (This function is based on the transportation mode and
is available for the sea and air modes only.)
Schedule Time Segments
When creating schedules. you first enter general data. such as the carrier. transportation mode.
and the transportation group for your schedule. When creating a gateway schedule. you must
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
61
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
enter a reference to an existing ocean carrier schedule. If you create a master flight schedule. you
can define an air cargo security status for this schedule.
You enter the standard sequence of transportation stops together with the transit duration, the
cutoff times. the length of stay. and so on. You can also enter a start location and end location.
You enter departure rules to specify the frequency of trips from a transportation stop. You also
define a time period during which the departure rule is valid. For example, you can specify that a
ship sails from the port of Newark every Thursday at 3:00 pm between January 1 and June 30. If
you are working with a sailing schedule and have referenced an ocean carrier schedule. you can
copy the departure rules from the ocean carrier schedule. After you have created your departure
rules. you can have the system automatically calculate the trips (that is. the actual departure
dates/times). If you are working with a sailing schedule and have referenced an ocean carrier
schedule, you can copy the trips from the ocean carrier schedule. This is valid even if you have
referenced a carrier flight plan from a master flight plan.
Distance and Duration Calculation
Without GIS (Geographical Information System)
Runtime Lane Distance 104
Runtime Lane Geo Distance 80
�1
Maintained Master Lane Distance 130
Master Lane Geo Distance 100
Maint. Master Lane 130
Runtime Geo Distance 80 X
Master Geo Distance 100
•Actual Runtime Distance 104
Distance I Average Speed Per Unit= Duration
WithGIS
• By connecting the GIS, distance and duration time can be calculated for each
means of transport within a transportation lane using exact road details.
Figure 22: Distance/Duration Calculation
SAP TM computes the runtime lanes during optimization. Corresponding transportation lanes are
generated between all locations assigned to the transportation zones. In the process. the cost
information is taken from the transportation lanes maintained. The distance/duration is
calculated according to the settings or taken from the transportation lane maintained.
The maintained distance in the master lane includes a factor for road/street map variability. The
factor is obtained from the means of transport. This factor establishes the proportion between
the linear distance between two locations and the actual distance covered by the vehicle
transporting goods between them.
Included in the means of transport is the average speed. The runtime distance is divided by the
average speed to calculate the estimated duration.
You determine whether the means of transport distance is calculated by a geographical
information system (GIS) by setting the corresponding indicator in the means of transport. If the
indicator is not set. the aerial distance is used.
62
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Identifying the Master Data Requirements for SAP TM
If the GIS indicator is set then the low. medium, high average speed is used. GIS systems typically
categorize streets by "slow". "medium". or "fast".
Use Cases for GIS
There are different use cases for GIS. as follows:
•
Geocoding (determine coordinates from an address for a location): This can be performed
automatically when changing the address data of a location. or in background with a report.
•
Distance and duration determination between two locations: For performance reasons.
distances and durations are stored in a buffer table in TM. This buffer table can be filled in
batch mode with a pre-calculation report. If a distance and duration is not in the buffer table
when required. it is determined via GIS integration and stored in the buffer This could be the
case with one-time locations. for example.
•
Route determination.
•
Map display: Map display is provided via SAP Visual Business.
GIS capability provides additional flexibility when integrating with GIS data providers like Navteq,
ESRI and others, as follows:
•
Option to use different providers per country.
•
Option to use different providers per means of transport.
The integration with GIS providers is a project activity that SAP supports with cookbooks and
examples.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
63
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
64
•
List the master data elements supporting the different activities in TM
•
List the master data elements that define the transportation network
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Lesson 2
Evaluating the Organizational Structures Used in
SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson we examine the units in the SAP TM organizational structure. and learn about the
interactions and relationships between units.
At the end of this lesson. you can determine the structures of the purchasing and sales
organizations. and account for the role of both in freight and forwarding orders
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Explain the purpose of organizational structures
•
Control outbound freight using organizational structures
•
Control Forwarding Orders (FWOs) using organizational structures
•
Evaluate an organization for planning and execution structures
•
Create an organizational structure
Organizational Structures in SAP ERP
The foundation of the SAP ERP system is the organizational structure that is configured in the
early stages of your company's implementation of the software. All other configuration or master
data is built on top of the organizational structures.
Client
To understand the enterprise structure in the SAP system. familiarize yourself with the following
definition.
The client is a unit within an SAP ERP system. It is self-contained in legal and organizational
terms. In terms of data. it has separate master records and an independent set of tables. From a
business viewpoint. the client represents a corporate group, for example.
The client is the highest hierarchical level in the SAP ERP system. Specifications you make or
data you enter at this level apply to all company codes and all other organizational units.
Therefore you do not have to enter the specifications and data in the system at client level more
than once. This ensures a uniform data status.
Access authorization is assigned on a client-specific basis. A user master record must be created
for every user in the client in which they wish to work. If the Client field has not been prepopulated. each user must specify a client key when logging on to an SAP ERP client. The client
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
65
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
key is uniquely defined in the system and is a three-digit number. In this way. the user specifies
the client in which he or she wishes to work. All user input is stored and separated by client.
The processing and evaluation of data is carried out on a client-specific basis.
Company Code
A company code is the smallest organizational unit of external accounting for which a complete
and self-contained bookkeeping system can be replicated. This includes the entry of all events
that require posting to the accounts and the creation of a complete audit trail for balance sheets
and profit-and-loss statements. A company code represents an independent unit producing its
own balance sheet. for example. a company within a client.
You can set up several company codes in one client to keep separate sets of financial books. You
can use a special Customizing function to copy a company code. In the process. company-codedependent specifications are adopted for your new company code.
A company code is defined in the system by a four-character alphanumeric key that is unique in
the client.
Organizational units are tightly linked to each other to process the relevant data for a business
area For example. Plant 3100 is assigned to company code 3000. Company Code 3000 is
assigned to controlling area 3000
Therefore. whenever a transaction involving cost occurs in plant 3100. the relevant records in
controlling area 3000 are automatically updated.
Valuation Areas
The valuation area is the organizational level at which material quantities and values are
managed. It is essential for product costing that a valuation area exists for each plant.
Within each valuation level. you can differentiate between values and quantities for valuation (in·
house production and external procurement) by using different valuation types. In Customizing
for materials management. balance sheet valuation is set up at company code or valuation area
level.
The selection of a valuation area level automatically causes the creation of a valuation area for
each plant. To use product costing and order costing. inventory must be valuated at plant level.
Organizational Data In SAP TM
A variety of transportation tasks are assigned to different people in an organization. SAP TM
enables you to structure these staffing concepts with the help of organizational models. Other TM
concepts. such as the use of workflow mechanisms. rely on these models to assign tasks to
individuals who participate in these workflows.
The function of the sales organization in SAP TM is not the same as the sales organization in ERP.
In ERP, the sales organization is used to combine orders and is tied to a company code for
invoicing and settlement. There are no accounting settlements in SAP TM so there is no need for
the sales organization to be attached to a company code.
66
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating the Organizational Structures Used in SAP TM
Organizational Units
"
Sales Org.
Role e.g.
Customer
Service
Agent
r
Forwarding
House (All
functions)
(LSP)
Planning &
Execution
Orgs
TM Org.
Units
Business Units
'-
r
'
,
Role e.g.
Transportation
Planner
'-
'
.,
Purchasing
Org
Role e.g.
Purchasing
Agent
'
Figure 23: Organizational Unit Classification
SAP TM is a system especially designed for transportation. Due to the particularities of the
business. TM offers a modified organizational model that is easy to maintain.
The following are characteristics of organizational units in SAP TM:
•
Organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a company.
•
A company may be structured based on different points of view. such as sales. planning and
execution. or purchasing of freight services.
•
These units also build a framework in which all relevant business processes can be processed.
•
Organizational units are used to determine responsibilities; for example. for approval
processes.
•
Organizational units are used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups within a
company. such as profit or cost centers.
•
lntracompany or intercompany settlement is enabled by organizational units.
•
Organizational units in SAP TM can be maintained independently of SAP ERP. The
organizational structure in SAP ERP and SAP TM can be different.
•
Organizational units define the responsible persons who are allowed to see the data or to
perform certain actions (authorization).
•
Organizational units can be determined automatically based on predefined conditions.
Forwarding houses can be used to represent business units (LSP) and perform all functions
including sales, purchasing. planning, and execution.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
67
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Structure of Organizational Units
-8.
Q)
�
..o
0
Company Code
(1 ... n)
-
Sales
Organization
(1 ... n)
Sales Office ( 1 ... n)
-
Purchasing
Organzation
(1 .... n)
Purchasing Group
(1 ... n)
-
Planning and
Execution
Organization
( 1 ... n)
Planning and
Execution Group
(1 ... n)
.
Sales Group
(1 ... n)
House
- Forwarding
(1 ... n)
figure 24: Orgamzat,onal Structure in SAP TM
The organizational units in SAP TM can be divided into organizational units for sales and
purchase. and organizational units for planning and execution.
The hierarchical relationship of organizational units is fixed. For organizational units with a sales
unit function, you can define the unit roles Organization, Office. and Group. Organizational units
with the unit role Group can be assigned to organizational units with a unit role Office or
Organization. and organizational units with a unit role Office to organizational units with a unit
role Organization.
For organizational units with a Purchasing or Planning and Execution unit function. you can only
assign organizational units with a unit role Group to organizational units with a unit role
Organization.
Organizations and Business Documents
The selling side is responsible for the sale of services. such as organizing the necessary activities
for shipment transportation. For this reason. the sales organization is indicated in the business
documents forwarding documents, order-based transportation requirements. delivery-based
transport requirements, and forwarding settlement documents.
The purchasing side is responsible for procuring the necessary services from vendors (for
example. carriers). For this reason, the purchasing organization is indicated in the business
documents freight orders. freight bookings, service orders. and freight settlement documents.
The sales organization would interact with the purchasing organization for executing the
transportation of the undertaken shipment. This shipment is later settled using intracompany/
68
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating the Organizational Structures Used in SAP TM
intercompany settlements. Thus the information regarding the relevant sales or purchasing
organization will also be contained in the necessary documents.
Organizational Master Data
Roles
Org Structure Elements
Company Code
• Booking/Billing
• Agent
Sales OrganlzaUon
tJ
• Purchasing agent
• Invoice Verification clerk
Purchasing
Organization
TM Touch Points
I TCM I
Forwarding
Order
Freight
Order/
Booking
•
"-----_J Freight Unit
•
•
•
•
Transportation Planner
Truck Driver
Loading Clerk
Warehouse Clerk
Planning and
Execution Group
M Standalone
Freight
Order/
Booking
Freight Unit
Figure 25: Organizational Master Data Setup in SAP TM
The organizational master data setup in SAP TM is divided into a number of elements.
The company code corresponds to the SAP ERP company code containing currency. The
company code in TM is used in transportation charge management for invoicing and charging.
The sales organization is a part of the organizational structure in SAP TM. The sales organization
is used in the creation of forwarding order types. forwarding quotation types. order based and
delivery based transportation requirements.
The purchasing organization and planning and execution organizations are used for freight order
types. freight booking types. and freight unit types.
Organizational Relationships in TM
In TM. organizational units are used to represent the organizational structure of a company.
Organizational structures in SAP TM are flexible. An organizational unit can have the following
organizational functions in SAP TM:
•
Purchasing
•
Sales
•
Planning and Execution
•
Company
•
Corporate
•
Forwarding House (representing purchasing, sales. and planning and execution)
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
69
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Organization Structures
Depending on the implementation scenario. shipper or freight forwarder. a company may be
structured from different points of view such as sales. planning and execution, or purchasing of
freight services. These units also build a framework in which all relevant business processes are
processed. Organizational units are used to determine responsibilities. for example. for approval
processes. Organizational units are also used to allocate revenue and costs to different groups
within a company, for example, profit or cost centers.
In TM multiple sales organizations can be attached to one company code. Multiple sales offices
can be attached to one sales organization. and multiple sales groups can be attached to a single
sales office.
TM can support multiple purchasing organizations tied to one company code. Multiple
purchasing groups can be attached to one purchasing organization.
Multiple planning and execution groups can be attached to one planning and execution
organization in TM.
Supplier Invoicing
I
SAP ERPSD/MM
I
I
SAP TM
I
I
SAP ERP-MM
11
l
Create
Order/Delivery
�
Forwarding
Order
Order-/
DeliveryBased
TRQ
I
I
External
Customer
0 ...
......
,-
.
. .
Purchase
,
Org.
:::.. lntE:9ratio!1 )..,
y
Create PO
Create SES
•
Create Freight Order I
Freiqht Booking
. •
Purchase
Org.
>Information
.
I
Receive
Order
Transportation
Planning
�
Create Order
•
canteltauppler
0
. ·-
E
Determine Freight
Agreement
•
Invoice
verification
•
Calculate Charges
•
Create Freight
Settlement Document
-
�
•
Selfbilling
IERSl
Credit note
Invoice
Figure 26: Supplier Invoicing
Integration of the purchasing organization is required for a shipper using both SAP TM and SAP
ERP that buys the services of carriers. The same is relevant for logistic service providers that are
subcontracting freight to external carriers. The initial integration point is during the creation of
the freight agreement. A freight agreement is a long-term contract that represents the
contractual relationship with a carrier from whom you are buying transportation services. A
purchasing organization is required on creation of such an agreement.
SAP TM generates a freight settlement document (FSD) when a freight order is shipped. The FSD
is sent to SAP ERP requesting the verification of an invoice received from a supplier or carrier.
When the invoice is received, SAP ERP checks it against the data from the FSD. If you perform
evaluated receipt settlement. the automatically generated invoice is based on the data from the
70
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Evaluating the Organizational Structures Used in SAP TM
FSD If you use SAP ERP. you create a service master record to assign to transportation charge
types.
Customizing Settings
Customizing has the following settings:
•
Define category and subcategory codes
•
Define and assign transportation charge types
•
Map organizational units
Customer Freight Invoicing
I
External Customer
I
I
SAP TM (LSP)
I
I
SAP ERP-SD
.
.
I
Create
Forwarding Order
Create Order
J.
.
...
Sales Org
Information
•
.r-
Transportation
Planning
""',
.
l
0
[l
Determine
o Forwarding
Aareement
.L
I
Charge
Calculation
,I,
Create Forwarding
Settlement Document
.
.
0
,{ Sales Org
... Integration
r,-..
•
•
""'
Create Billing
Document
(Invoice)
I
Figure 27: Customer Freight Invoicing
As part of the supported integration with TM. the integration of the sales organization is essential
if an SAP ERP back end is present. In the case of an LSP using both SAP TM and SAP ERP. the
sales organization is integrated at two points. The first integration point is the Forwarding
Agreement in TM. A forwarding agreement is a long-term contract that represents the
contractual relationship with a customer to whom you are selling transportation services. In SAP
TM. a sales organization is required to create such a document.
In SAP TM. you can perform forwarding settlement with your ordering parties by creating a
forwarding settlement document (FWSD) and sending it to SAP ERP for posting to financials.
If you use SAP ERP. Customizing has the following settings:
•
Define category and subcategory codes
•
Define and assign transportation charge types
•
Map organizational units
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
71
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Organizational Planning and Execution Structures
Planning and execution organizational structures are responsible for the planning and execution
of freight orders. They play an important role in LSP scenarios in which different organizational
units have to work together. You use the Interaction Between Organizational Units function to
model how organizational units interact with each other. For example. you can model how a sales
organization interacts with a planning and execution organization.
Planning and Execution Group
Planning and execution groups are used to define responsibilities among a planning and
execution organization.
Multiple groups can be assigned to a planning and execution organization. However. each
planning and execution group is assigned to only one planning and execution organization.
Organization Interaction
Use the Interaction Between Organizational Units function to model how organizational units
interact with each other. For example. you can model how a sales organization interacts with a
planning and execution organization.
Planning and execution groups are used to define responsibilities among a planning and
execution organization. Multiple groups can be assigned to a planning and execution
organization. However. each planning and execution group is assigned to only one planning and
execution organization.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
72
•
Explain the purpose of organizational structures
•
Control outbound freight using organizational structures
•
Control Forwarding Orders (FWOs) using organizational structures
•
Evaluate an organization for planning and execution structures
•
Create an organizational structure
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Lesson 3
Defining a Condition
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson. we examine how conditions are used in SAP TM. Conditions provide a means (of
configuration) to flexibly maintain customer-specific decisions. For example, conditions can be
used in the determination of business document types. the determination of a freight unit
building rule. or the determination of organizational units.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Determine the conditions used to customize a business process
•
Display a condition or restriction
Conditions
Conditions Can Determine Dependent Values
•
Filtering freight units
•
Determining freight unit building rules (FUB rules)
•
Incompatibilities
•
Determining the sales organization
•
Determining transportation charge rate tables and agreements with a charge calculation rule
•
Change controller
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
73
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
There are over 50
predefined condition types
used in:
Cl x
Condlllon Type: All V1lun
I• Show r•er Cttem I
•
Condliln Type
• Printing
JSCMTMS(C_OUANJOL
Cilln;le Conlrdler. Oeterlrine Tolerne
• Approvals
JSCMTMS(C_TOR_STRAT
Chrge Conlrdler: Oeternine S1rotegy
• Change Controller:
Tolerances
JSCMTMSOSO_CS
Dete,mne Carner SelectiMProlile
JSCMTMSAlTRJ'll'E
Oelve,y.Based TR Type de!em,natioo
• Wait times and length
of stay
JSCMTMSfU_LOAOJ)lllA
F,� tri lladA.riloodantiom
JSCMTMSfUJ'N.l_OOST
()itinizer penaly costs tor freigli tri
• Loading and
unloading durations
JSCMTMSfl.llR
FIJI RIAe Delermim Cond.
JSCM�_TYlt
Forwaning Cxder Type deletmilloon
JSCMTMSA'WQ_TYlt
FOIW9roog Glwelion Type determnelion
JSCMTMStt_CARRER
Carrie. lncanpllli�
• Transportation charge
management
• Customer-specific
rules
•
--
..�
• Incompatibilities
Cffil!IM Type Oescr
figure 28: Condition Types
Conditions can be used throughout SAP TM to represent customer-specific rule-based decisions.
They are based on field content which is stored in business documents. The system uses
standard operators (that is, greater than. less than, equal to. and so on) to compare field values
with the customer conditions in a true/false decision-making process. The values can be defined
in the decision table. Using the Data Access Definition tab. you define the criteria for which you
want to determine different parameters.
Conditions in Use
Let's say that you want to define the freight unit building rules that the system uses when dealing
with dangerous goods and with goods that are not dangerous. Basically, there are three things to
consider. as follows:
•
An input
•
A decision (based on the input and a condition that you have specified)
•
An output
In this example. the input value that it is important for the decision to take into account is whether
or not the goods comprising the OTR or DTR are dangerous. You can define this using a data
access definition.
The decision itself is based on the input value and a condition. The condition is based on a
condition type. and specifies what should happen in response to a specified input value.
The output value is the result of the decision. In this example. it will be a specific freight unit
building rule.
Example
Order-based transportation requirement (OTR) TMOl includes a hazardous material. The data
access definition specifies an input value for the decision table which reflects this. The condition
takes the input value into consideration and outputs the appropriate freight unit building rule
(FUBR).
74
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Defining a Condition
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
75
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
76
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Exercise 5
Display a Condition
Business Example
Your department lead has asked you to review the conditions employed in a number of planning
profiles.
Display and Review Condition Types
Review the standard condition types that are available so that you understand the limitless
potential of applying the condition technique.
1. Using NWBC. display the standard condition types. Use the Create Condition transaction to
display these condition types.
2. What condition types can be created?
3. What options are available in the Origin of Condition field?
4. Close the New Condition Definition tab.
Display a Condition
Now that you have reviewed the condition types, display two condition definitions.
1. Display condition MTR.
2. Which condition type does this condition reflect?
3. What is the origin of this condition?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
77
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
4. What will the determined result be if the means of transport (MTr) is Z_FTL_INC?
5. Extra credit: Which data access definition does this condition use?
6. Display condition INC_FU_ TGRP·CHEM.
7. Which condition type does this condition reflect?
8. What is the origin of this condition?
9. What will the determined result be if the transportation group is YTC2?
10. Extra credit: Which data access definition does this condition use?
78
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Solution 5
Display a Condition
Business Example
Your department lead has asked you to review the conditions employed in a number of planning
profiles.
Display and Review Condition Types
Review the standard condition types that are available so that you understand the limitless
potential of applying the condition technique.
1. Using NWBC. display the standard condition types. Use the Create Condition transaction to
display these condition types.
a) In NWBC, choose the Application Administration-> General Settings -c-Coruiitions=>
Create Condition.
b) Use the input help in the Condition Type field to search available options for condition
types.
2. What condition types can be created?
Condition types include the following · approval checks. determination. exclusion.
incompatibilities. change controller. charge calculation, and so on.
3. What options are available in the Origin of Condition field?
Condition Based on BRFplus Expression: Condition Based on BRFplus Decision Table: Direct
Business Object Access
4. Close the New Condition Definition tab.
Display a Condition
Now that you have reviewed the condition types, display two condition definitions.
1. Display condition MTR.
a) Choose General Settings-+ Corditiotvs-« Display Condition.
b) Enter MTR in the Condition field and choose Continue.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
79
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
2. Which condition type does this condition reflect?
/SCMTMS/INC VEHICLE
3. What is the origin of this condition?
B (Direct Business Object Access)
4. What will the determined result be if the means of transport (MTr) is Z_FTL_INC?
z
FTL INC - Because this is direct access. the condition returns the input value as the result.
5. Extra credit: Which data access definition does this condition use?
/SCMTMS/VEH_RES_MTR
6. Display condition JNC_FU_ TGRP-CHEM.
a) Choose General Settings-> Condiiions-« Display Condition.
b) Enter INC_FU_TGRP-CHEM in the Condition field and choose Continue.
7. Which condition type does this condition reflect?
Condition Type /SCMTMS/INC FU
8. What is the origin of this condition?
F (Condition Based on BRFplus Decision Table)
9. What will the determined result be if the transportation group is YTC2?
CHEMICALS
10. Extra credit: Which data access definition does this condition use?
Result: /SCMTMS/TOR TRAN GR (Hint: Choose Data Access Definition from the menu bar at
the top of the screen. To return to the Display Condition screen, choose Back).
80
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Defining a Condition
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
,
Determine the conditions used to customize a business process
•
Display a condition or restriction
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
81
E'
Unit 3
Lesson 4
Determining a Freight Incompatibility
LESSON OVERVIEW
When shipping different products challenges can present themselves as to what items can and
cannot be transported together. In this lesson you will learn about how incompatibilities provide a
means of ensuring particular combinations (for example. productA·productB. carrierl·
customer2) do not occur.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Examine how incompatibilities can be used to control the outcome of business processes
•
View incompatibilities
Incompatibilities
Shippers are often presented with challenges when shipping multiple products. One of these is
the need to take into consideration what materials can be shipped together and what materials
cannot.
You use incompatibilities to define the compatibility of planning data that the system is to take
into account during transportation planning, for example:
82
•
Freight units with different incoterms must not be transported together.
•
Refrigerated goods must only be transported in appropriate means of transport (refrigerated
trucks).
•
A certain means of transport cannot be unloaded at a location. since the location does not
have a suitable loading ramp.
•
A certain carrier should not be assigned to freight orders for a certain customer (blacklist).
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining a Freight Incompatibility
Chilled
Frozen
Figure 29: Compatibilities And Incompatibilities
Incompatibility Validity
When creating an incompatibility definition. one must specify a validity area. Validity areas are
comprised of an incompatibility area and an incompatibility type. Incompatibility areas define
where an incompatibility can be used. Four incompatibility areas exist in TM. as follows:
•
Vehicle Scheduling and Routing (Optimizer and Manual Planning, Transportation Proposal)
•
Freight unit building
•
Carrier selection
•
Delivery proposals
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
83
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
01 - Transportatron Planning
01 - Freight Unit - Freight Unit
(Vehicle Level)
02 - Freight Unit - Freight Unit
(Compartment Level)
03 - Freight Unit - Freight Unit
(Means ofTransp. Combination)
I
04 - Freight Unit 10s - Carrrer Selection I or - Oehvery Proposal
Burldm
52 - Transportation 81 - Carrier 51 - Transportation Request
Request Item
Transportation Order Header - Transportation
Request Root
82 - Transportation
52 - Transportation Request
Order - Transportation Item - Transportation Request
Order
Item
53 - Freight Unit - Freight
Unit
04 - Freight Unit - Vehicle Resource
05 - Freight Unit Transshipment
Location
06 - Freight Unit - Vehicle
Compartment
07 - Vehicle Resource - Vehicle
Resource
08 - Vehicle Resource - Location
(Stay Level)
09 - Vehicle Resource - Location
(Loading/Unloading Level)
10 - Vehicle MTR Combination Location
11 - Freight Unit -Freight Booking
19 - Freight Unit Schedule
figure 30: lncornpatitnbty Validity
Incompatibility Types
The incompatibility type defines between which two objects the incompatibility is set up.
Depending on the incompatibility area. different incompatibility types are supported. Examples
for incompatibility types are as follows:
84
•
FU - FU (vehicle level)
•
FU - FU (compartment level)
•
FU - FU (MTr combination level)
•
FU - Vehicle resource
•
FU - Transshipment location
•
FU - Compartment
•
Vehicle resource - Vehicle resource
•
Vehicle resource - Location (stay)
•
Vehicle resource - Location (loading/unloading)
•
Vehicle MTr combination - Location
•
FU - Booking
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Exercise 6
View Incompatibilities
Business Example
Conditions and incompatibilities are used in the transportation planning process. During this
exercise. you will review settings to define an incompatibility to prevent the consolidation of
chemical products onto a full-truck-load (FTL) means of transport.
1. Display incompatibility INC_CHEMICALS_FTL.
2. How will this Incompatibility be determined? Hint: Look at the Determination Method.
In which area will this incompatibility be used? Hint: Incompatibility area.
Between which hNO objects has the incompatibility been defined? Hint: Incompatibility Type
What is the violation reaction during manual planning?
What is the violation reaction during automatic planning?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
85
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
What is the first condition maintained in this incompatibility?
What is the second condition maintained in this incompatibility?
What does the incompatibility actually state (in layman's terms). Hint Look at the relevant
condition results.
86
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Solution 6
View Incompatibilities
Business Example
Conditions and incompatibilities are used in the transportation planning process. During this
exercise. you will review settings to define an incompatibility to prevent the consolidation of
chemical products onto a full-truck-load (FTL) means of transport.
1. Display incompatibility INC_CHEMICALS_FTL.
a) In NWBC. choose Application Administration-> Planning-> General Settings->
Incompatibility Definitions-> Display Incompatibility.
If a popup message appears. choose Discard Changes.
b) Enter INC_CHEMICALS_FTL in the Incompatibility field.
c) Choose
tJI Continue.
2. How will this Incompatibility be determined? Hint: Look at the Determination Method.
Condition-Based Incompatibility
In which area will this incompatibility be used? Hint: Incompatibility area.
Complete VSR (VSR Opt. and Man. Ping and Transp. Proposal)
Between which two objects has the incompatibility been defined? Hint: Incompatibility Type
Freight Unit - Vehicle Resource
What is the violation reaction during manual planning?
Warning If Incompatibility Is Violated
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
87
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
What is the violation reaction during automatic planning?
Incompatibility Must Not Be Violated
What is the first condition maintained in this incompatibility?
I NC_FU_TGRP-CHEM
What is the second condition maintained in this incompatibility?
MTR
What does the incompatibility actually state (in layman's terms). Hint: Look at the relevant
condition results.
Freight units with transportation group Chemicals must not be loaded onto means of
transport Z FTL I NC. Choose Display Condition to review the conditions from the last
exercise. based on which the actual values are determined during transportation planning.
88
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining a Freight Incompatibility
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
,
Examine how incompatibilities can be used to control the outcome of business processes
•
View incompatibilities
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
89
E'
Unit 3
Lesson 5
Determining a Dangerous Goods Shipping
Requirement
LESSON OVERVIEW
The transportation of goods can become even more complicated if the products you are moving
are hazardous and require government regulation. In this lesson. you will learn about the
integration between SAP TM and SAP Environment. Health and Safety (EHS) to assist you in
moving dangerous goods.
SAP Environment. Health and Safety requires a separate license.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe dangerous goods in terms of environment. health. and safety regulations
•
View a dangerous goods master
Environment, Health and Safety Requirements
Business experts can manage all their EHS topics on one platform
L
'C
Enable Strategy for
) Risk Manaaement
GOVERNANCE
�
Health & Safety
...
Management
C>
Managemem
•
Provendvo&
Occupational
-
A
Environmental
Performanc= _
•
Compianco for�
lng1edients
•
Sustenance &
Mater1al Management
MSDS & Lobel
Industrial
Hygeine & safety
Incident/Accident
Medicine
Ability to Execute
Best pracitces in Business
Product Safety & Stewardship
�
Subatnnce
-
�
i,C:2:
Hazardous
()
Sustainabilit
•
Management
Product Compliance
Recording
Oangerours
Goods
Management
.;::,,...
.• •
Customer & Supplier
Supply Chain
Communlcadon
Suppol't for
_ .. __ �NQ."Cti,,o_..
·-------
J.-t
CoUaboradon
Legal Process
�
....,.
-
..(__)..
Air Emissions
a
R6$0U(08
Consumption
Water Emission
•
Permit
Management
waste
Management
-
a
•• 11 I
TEC:HNtOATA
Figure 31: SAP Environment. Health And Safety
The SAP EHS management solution is one generic platform with strong horizontal and vertical
integration covering today's and many of tomorrow's environmental health and safety
90
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining a Dangerous Goods Shipping Requirement
challenges. Major business areas are organized in three main pillars· Health and Safety: Product
Safety and Stewardship: Environmental Performance.
SAP EHS Organization in More Detail
The three main pillars of SAP EHS are as follows:
•
Health and Safety
Hazardous Substance Management
Observing national regulations. defining how to manage hazardous substances on-site. and
how to protect employees who handles these substances from harm. and hazardous
materials log.
Dangerous Goods
Hazardous materials moved as goods come under the dangerous goods regulation. which
is a UN regulation and is applicable worldwide.
Incident/Accident Management
Manages an incident and accident properly; triggers workflow patterns and does root
cause analyses that are a must today. Integrates HR scenarios with HR master data and
time management. which are the bases for efficient data flows.
•
Safety and Stewardship
This includes substance management and material management. creating and administering
material safety data sheets. product compliance reporting with constituent material
management. customer and supplier communication as well as life-cycle assessment.
•
Environmental Performance
Air emissions. resource consumption. water emissions. and waste balance.
Note:
SAP Environment. Health and Safety (EHS) requires a separate license.
Integration of SAP EHS with SAP TM
When shipping dangerous/hazardous goods. the complexity of transportation management
increases dramatically. If a mistake is made during the loading or shipping of materials. and an
accident occurs where products are spilled or mixed. causing a hazardous situation. your
company is liable for damages.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
91
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Dangerous Goods
• Goods that carry a risk of being a danger to the
following:
• the environment
• other goods
• infrastructure
• people
LPG
•
Figure 32: What Are Dangerous Goods?
Dangerous goods. also called hazardous materials or hazmat. are solids. liquids, or gases that
can harm people, other living organisms, property. or the environment. They are often subject to
chemical regulations that can differ from country to country. Dangerous goods include materials
that are radioactive. flammable. explosive, corrosive. oxidizing. asphyxiating, biohazardous. toxic,
pathogenic. or allergenic. Also included are physical conditions such as compressed gases and
liquids or hot materials. This includes all goods containing such materials or chemicals. or that
may have other characteristics that render them hazardous in specific circumstances.
92
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining a Dangerous Goods Shipping Requirement
Dangerous Goods Regulations and Compliance
"
Companies are required to comply with multitude of EHS regulations.
• To.u:.&.tau111,,:-
floML'YJtt:C
IA•�'*'
_.....
.............
C1�UC
EJlutUKlR
. us
�U•o11�m
�
o.....,
C�\'wlf.•M
CU,CU.
'"""'
RCAA
.......
V'CAA
0$1...
rsCA
CHt
-
OCl&II
_-... ..
Australia
�l'IO..l"��eJ.
' ......, °"
"°""""-
,....,..� t'O""''lill'h..
1•
HO,A
V�1
SE.MARN"
o,<SAS •
"""°
H�WMI*
""'
Jw fOIIIIOI Ml[.PU
IWHEPM
Often regulatory challenges are managed reg,onally and 111 silos
• , 1 II
TICHNIOATA
Figure 33: Regulations and Compliance
Mitigating the risks associated with hazardous materials may require the application of safety
precautions during their transport. use, storage, and disposal. Most countries regulate hazardous
materials by law, and they are subject to several international treaties as well. Laws and
regulations on the use and handling of hazardous materials may differ depending on the activity
and status of the material. For example, one set of requirements may apply to their use in the
workplace while a different set of requirements may apply to spill response. sale for consumer
use, or transportation. Most countries regulate some aspect of hazardous materials. Dangerous
goods are divided into classes on the basis of the specific chemical characteristics producing the
risk
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
93
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
Dangerous Goods Master
ERP
SCM
ALE
EHS DG Master
EHS Phrase
Management
EHS Phrase
Management
Figure 34: SAP TM Dangerous Goods Master Data Transfer
Through the use of Application Link Enabling (ALE) technology. you can transfer the EHS
specifications tied to the material master in SAP ERP to a dangerous goods master in SAP TM.
ALE is the technology for setting up and operating distributed applications. Application Link
Enabling (ALE) facilitates the distributed. but integrated. installation of SAP and non-SAP
systems. This involves business-driven message exchange using consistent data across loosely
linked SAP applications. Applications are integrated using synchronous and asynchronous
communication - not by using a central database.
94
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining a Dangerous Goods Shipping Requirement
Dangerous Goods Checks
"
Order-Based
Transportation
Re uirement
Delivery-Based
Transportabon
Re uirement
Freight Unit Building
Freight Booking
Dangerous goods checks
• Valid means of transport?
Valid quantity?
• Valid packaging?
• Mixed loading allowed?
Freight Order
.... you choose when you want to check!
Figure 35: Integrated Dangerous Goods Checks
Once your EHS data has been transferred to SAP TM. you can use this data to ensure compliance
for dangerous goods shipping and handling. This could include performing dangerous goods
checks at different stages of transportation planning.
Performing Checks
DG-Checks
TM
ERP
�
DG- Print/
XML
(3) Create
I
(3) Creole
asynrc""'--+-.i
.h
Order-Based
(5) Create
Frei ht Orders
(S+1 O)
Create I Update
Delive
as nch
Hl--..;;;.;;.i.;.;.;;......+--1
(7) Trigger
Delivery
Creation
asynch
reate
Delivery-Based
(11)Send
Freight Order
to LSP I Carrier
Figure 36: Dangerous Goods Checks
Not having a check in the transport requirement is only possible if either the sales order or
delivery can be modified in SAP TM. In SAP TM. a logistics service provider (LSP) dealing with
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
95
E'
Unit 3: SAP TM Master Data
dangerous goods. would require the transportation request to perform a dangerous goods check.
Checks can also be carried out during freight unit building and in VSR planning. No check can
currently be performed during delivery building. Freight unit or transportation order checks
should be sufficient. Special packaging checks are carried out on the handling unit level in SAP
ERP.
Dangerous Goods Handling in SAP TM and SAP ERP
ERP
TM
DGCheck
x
x
DG Print Data
x
x
Template I One-Time
Material
x
Mixed Loading Checks
x
Product Release
Standard Check?
x
DGEHP3
Enhancements
x
Function
Comment
Different Interface for customerspecific checks
Something similar planned in TM
(focus LSP)
x
For example, dynamic
classification, exception handling.
HU packing checks
Figure 37: Comparison of DG functions ,n SAP ERP and SAP TM
With the integration of dangerous goods checks. companies can use advanced planning functions
while maintaining compliance with hazardous goods shipping.
To View the Elements of a Dangerous Goods Master
1. In NWBC. launch the SPRO transaction.
2. Choose SAP Reference /MG and then choose SAP Transportation Management ..... SCM
Basis -+ EH&S Services ..... Dangerous Goods Management ..... Dangerous Goods Master.
3. Choose the IMG activity Specify Tab Pages in Dangerous Goods Master.
4. This is the set-up for the Dangerous Goods Master and defines the tab pages that are visible,
their descriptions. and so on. Scroll down to see the full set-up.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
96
•
Describe dangerous goods in terms of environment. health. and safety regulations
•
View a dangerous goods master
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3
Learning Assessment
1. Master data can only be created directly in SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
2. Which of the following elements are part of the transportation network?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Location
B Transportation Zone
c
Business Partner
D Transportation Lane
3. Organizational structures can be maintained directly in SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
4. The purchasing organization can be entered on which business documents?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Forwarding Order
B Freight Unit
c
Freight Order
D Freight Booking
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
97
E'
Unit 3: Learning Assessment
5. The sales organization can be entered on which business documents?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Forwarding Order
B Freight Unit
c
Freight Order
D Freight Booking
6. Only one planning and execution group can be assigned to any planning and execution
organization.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
7. Which of the following best describes the use of conditions in SAP TM7
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
D
A Conditions are a way of setting up rules that the system takes into account when
planning.
B Conditions refer to specific, one-time customer requirements in relation to how an
individual delivery is handled.
C Conditions refer to the handling requirements of specific materials.
D Conditions refer to the guidelines that operators (drivers) must adhere to when
delivering in particular transportation zones.
8. This is a possible scenario for the use of incompatibilities in SAP TM: A driver for carrier A is
careless in his delivery of goods to customer B. The customer makes a complaint to the
shipper and says carrier A should not be used for future deliveries. The shipper or freight
forwarder sets up an incompatibility in SAP TM that automatically prevents the carrier being
assigned future deliveries to this customer.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
98
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3: Learning Assessment
9. The regulations pertaining to any hazardous material are consistent across locations.
activities and lifespan.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
10. A separate license for SAP EHS is required before it can be integrated with your installation of
SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
99
E'
Unit 3
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Master data can only be created directly in SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
That's correct. Master data can also be transferred from SAP ERP.
2. Which of the following elements are part of the transportation network?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
D
A Location
0
D Transportation Lane
B Transportation Zone
c
Business Partner
3. Organizational structures can be maintained directly in SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
100
0
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 3: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. The purchasing organization can be entered on which business documents?
Choose the correct answers.
D
0
0
0
A Forwarding Order
B Freight Unit
c
Freight Order
D Freight Booking
5. The sales organization can be entered on which business documents?
Choose the correct answers.
0
D
D
D
A Forwarding Order
B Freight Unit
c
Freight Order
D Freight Booking
6. Only one planning and execution group can be assigned to any planning and execution
organization.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
7. Which of the following best describes the use of conditions in SAP TM?
Choose the correct answer.
0
D
D
D
A Conditions are a way of setting up rules that the system takes into account when
planning.
8 Conditions refer to specific, one-time customer requirements in relation to how an
individual delivery is handled.
C Conditions refer to the handling requirements of specific materials.
D Conditions refer to the guidelines that operators (drivers) must adhere to when
delivering in particular transportation zones.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
101
E"
Unit 3: Learning Assessment - Answers
8. This is a possible scenario for the use of incompatibilities in SAP TM: A driver for carrier A is
careless in his delivery of goods to customer B. The customer makes a complaint to the
shipper and says carrier A should not be used for future deliveries. The shipper or freight
forwarder sets up an incompatibility in SAP TM that automatically prevents the carrier being
assigned future deliveries to this customer.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
D
True
False
That's correct. this is a possible scenario in which the use of incompatibilities may be useful.
9. The regulations pertaining to any hazardous material are consistent across locations.
activities and lifespan.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
That's correct. In reality, regulations may differ according to jurisdiction concerned, the status
of the material. for example whether it is being transported or stored, and numerous other
factors.
10. A separate license for SAP EHS is required before it can be integrated with your installation of
SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
True
D
False
Correct. SAP EHS requires a separate license.
102
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Transportation Order
Management
Lesson 1
Triggering the Transportation Management Process
105
Lesson 2
110
117
Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
Exercise 7: Create a Sales Order
Lesson 3
Managing the Freight Forwarding Process
Exercise 8: Create a Forwarding Order
129
137
Lesson 4
142
145
Booking Capacities
Exercise 9: Create an Ocean Freight Booking
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Describe the transportation processes
•
List the different types of transportation order scenarios
•
Describe order management documents
•
Describe SAP ERP logistics integration
•
Create a sales order
•
Describe the integration of SAP ERP purchase orders
•
Explain the process of generating transportation requirements in SAP TM from scheduling
agreements in SAP ERP
•
Describe the integration of SAP ERP deliveries
•
Describe the freight forwarding process
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
103
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
104
•
Describe the ocean freight booking process
•
Create an ocean freight booking
•
Describe an air freight booking
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Lesson 1
Triggering the Transportation Management
Process
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson. you will briefly examine transportation processes and scenarios. and how
transportation requirements result from the creation of specific document types in SAP ERP sales orders. purchase orders and forwarding orders.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
Describe the transportation processes
,
List the different types of transportation order scenarios
,
Describe order management documents
Transportation Processes
Before looking at outbound scenarios. it is important to understand the structure of SAP TM. The
application is based on 9 standard processes and 8 scenarios. Here, we'll take a look at the
processes.
Managing
Transportation
Requirements
Managing
Forwarding
Orders
Settling Internal
Charges
Shipper and LSP Scenarios
Settling
F reight Orders
Outbound Domestic
Air Freight
Inbound Domestic
Ocean Freight
Outbound International
I ntermodal Rail Freight
Inbound International
Courier Express Parcel
Managing
Freight Orders
& Bookings
Planning
Freight &
Selecting
Carriers
Settling
Forvvarding
Orders
Executing and
Monitoring Freight
Tendering
Freight
Figure 38: SAP TM Processes and Scenarios
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
105
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Standard Processes
The nine standard processes that comprise SAP TM are as follows:
Table 2: Standard Processes
Process
Description
Managing Transportation Requirements
This may include both outbound and inbound
transportation requirements.
Managing Forwarding Orders
Internal status management within SAP TM.
Managing Freight and Bookings
Ocean carrier booking for international shipments
Planning Freight and Selecting Carriers
Detailed delivery planning and carrier selection.
Tendering Freight
Carrying out the contracting process with
freight carriers.
Executing and Monitoring Freight Shipments
Executing shipment and ensuring timely delivery.
Settling Freight Orders
Managing supplier freight invoices.
Settling Forwarding Orders
Managing customer freight invoices.
Settling Internal Charges
Creating settlements between internal organizations in your company.
Transportation Order Scenarios
The eight transportation order scenarios are as follows:
106
•
Domestic Outbound Transportation
•
International Outbound Transportation
•
Domestic Inbound Transportation
•
International Inbound Transportation
•
Air Freight
•
Ocean Freight (LCL)
•
lntermodal Rail Freight
•
Courier Express Parcel
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Triggering the Transportation Management Process
Order Management Documents
-------�� 1- SAP ERP - -
l
i
.
Order
Management
,
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . - -L
Sales/Purchase
O rd er
! ,------..
Oe 1.,very
[
!
!
Forwarding
.
Quotencn
I
j
l. - . --- . - . -·! --· ---·-. -· - - . -·-·-. -1--· - ·- -·- ·- . } ,----'·....· ---Order-based
Delivery-based
Transportation
Requirement
Transportatlon
I
I
Forwarding
Order
!
t-----,11!
J
1
1!
�
-���,�������,,��������������---��di!
Requirement
Figure 39: Order Management Documents
The initial event that triggers the transportation management process is a transportation
requirement. This document may be created from a sales order. a purchase order. a stock
transport order (STO), or a scheduling agreement. It might also be an outbound or inbound
delivery. All of these transportation requirements request the movement of a material. This
movement may be to a customer (external) or to another facility within the same company.
Integration with SAP ERP is accomplished using XML messages via SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (SAP Pl) or a point-to-point communication.
Logistics service providers (LSPs or 3PLs) can also receive transportation requirements. For
transportation service providers (TSP) and logistics service providers (LSP). forwarding orders
are created in one of two ways - manually, using the SAP TM UI. or through integration with an
external system via electronic data interchange (EDI).
The following are transportation management triggers:
•
Sales orders
•
Purchase orders
•
Sales order returns
•
Purchase order returns
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
107
E"'
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
•
Stock transport returns
•
Scheduling agreements
•
Outbound deliveries
•
Inbound deliveries
•
Forwarding orders
•
Forwarding quotations
Transportation Requests Overview
Depending on the business need, there are several ways in
which transportation requests can be received and created:
From internal SAP ERP system:
• Sales Order
• Purchase Order
• Stock Transport Order
• Outbound Delivery
• Inbound Delivery
• Scheduling Agreements
From external ordering party I customer:
• Via XML message
• Entered manually
SAP TM
---·-__ -..
-___..
....._, --- ---·-...--- -. ._
..
i- --- _,,
... .._ •• (J ·-
...
-----
••
.. ..:.
�
'--"
--·--- ., ---- ·--·
�
,_
I
Transportation
Request
---------------------------------- �-=--·
:-,--:,.,-,
.
-----·
- -------- - ·-=.r..--·�
.--...-�-�-
.
-----
-
,'
Figure 40: Transportation Requests
The TSP /LSP focus is handled in SAP TM as forwarding orders and forwarding quotations. Other
transport request (TRQ) documents can be used for the LSP environment too. utilizing the smart
integration concept, for example, integrating customers' purchase orders and sales orders with
their SAP ERP and SAP TM systems.
Forwarding orders can originate from legacy systems integrated with EDI. A manual entry option
is also available. The shipper /supplier focus is fully integrated with SAP ERP (inbound and
outbound). This includes sales orders (SOs). purchase orders (POs) and stock transfer orders
(STOs). SO. PO and STO returns are also included.
Transportation Requests
Transportation Request: Sales Order
108
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Triggering the Transportation Management Process
Selected SAP ERP sales orders create outbound messages in SAP ERP that are sent to SAP TM.
where an order-based transportation requirement (OTR) is created. The necessary data for the
transportation of goods, such as the customer of the sales order, shipping point. material and
quantities. delivery date and several other requirements for the transport are taken over into the
OTR.
Transportation Request: Purchase Order
Selected purchase orders. using standard purchase order workflow configuration, initiate the
process of sending the purchase order data to SAP TM. In SAP TM. an OTR is created. SAP TM
does not differentiate between inbound and outbound transportation. Therefore. the OTR is used
for both sales orders and purchase orders.
Transportation Request: Scheduling Agreement
Selected MM scheduling agreements and sales scheduling agreements can be integrated to
create OTRs in TM also. The integration is based on delivery schedules. The relevant data,
including dates and quantities. are incorporated into the OTR.
Transportation Request: Delivery
Deliveries can also initiate the transportation process in SAP TM. Instead of integrating the
created sales order or purchase order. only the outbound or inbound delivery is sent to SAP TM.
For deliveries. a delivery-based transportation requirement (DTR) is created.
Transportation Request: Forwarding Order
Forwarding orders can be sent to SAP TM from an external system or can be entered manually.
Forwarding orders require that all data is specifically entered into the forwarding order document
as no preceding document exists from where necessary information could be taken.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
,
Describe the transportation processes
•
List the different types of transportation order scenarios
•
Describe order management documents
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
109
E"
Unit 4
Lesson 2
Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about the integration of SAP ERP and SAP TM. specifically at how the
creation of sales orders, purchase orders. stock transport orders. and deliveries trigger follow-on
actions in the SAP TM system.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
110
•
Describe SAP ERP logistics integration
•
Create a sales order
•
Describe the integration of SAP ERP purchase orders
•
Explain the process of generating transportation requirements in SAP TM from scheduling
agreements in SAP ERP
•
Describe the integration of SAP ERP deliveries
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
SAP ERP Logistics Integration
•
SAP TM
l
•
•
•
Figure 41: Transportation Requirements
The integration of SAP Transportation Management with SAP ERP is available as of SAP ERP
6.05. More integration functionality has been added with later (SAP ERP) enhancement packs.
Therefore. not all functionality described in this or other training material may be available with
SAP ERP 6.05.
As we have seen. the transportation process in SAP TM is started with a transportation
requirement document. This transportation requirement can be created out of a sales order.
purchase order. or delivery created in SAP ERP. The ERP logistics integration process involves
much more than just starting the transportation process in SAP TM. This functionality is explored
in further training classes. and you can find additional information in SAP Help documents.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
111
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Sales Orders
·. .... . ....
......
..... '
...... ..
�--·
-.
_---... .·.---...- · -."'..
---- .-·--....,,- - ---..---.a.
-·
- --·�.
--..
-·- _,
·- -·
--·- - - _
tu.p1,.y r,,t SbtNJ#d Oftltll JSOXJ: OWJ"'-1
"' .. e •*•• o
e,
lM S,µln°""'
"""""'
"""""'
"
..,
..m,!l.11:ta�1•:11c1�aa.r-man
QII• !lilta .a I Xlli!i--.:zi.i ,,,__ mm
.
•
.......
II)-•
I
"11
-
���
...,,,_,,
,._
*' ,a,.
.
=
o...-, 1M1ooe.""" •1 001 , ,ooooo.ot is.so.... 150'10l
••.
_,.,;,.,;,,,o.,,,,A,
NIOX Nm-t?.O·O
p
.. .....
·�
•
�'"11-""11
'
I
-_·----- ·- -�
____
.... -..
-�
�- ----- -··
-
,
..
,_
.
•• ••
·c-c
·c,.• '
• ...
••
'
,. �
---· -----·
-�--
------·----·-- - _..._
•
•
·--*__,,..,-..
••
•
....,
-·-
�
,
--- - ·-- --- -·- -·- -·••
_.,._, ··•
.......... ..
o,....,-..
...
.
•
---. ......
�
•
•
•
�
•
•
•
--
•
•
- -·- .. -• -, . • -
••
•
Figure 4 2: Sales Order Integration
When integrating ERP sales order with SAP TM, the ERP process flow is not altered (compared to
an SAP ERP system not integrated with SAP TM). The sales order is created in the usual way and
saved. Upon saving, the ERP system creates an XML message in the background that is sent to
SAP TM. The corresponding document in SAP TM is the Order-Based Transportation
Requirement (OTR). The OTR is created when the XML message arrives from the ERP system.
The OTR document contains all necessary information about the sales order that is concerned
with transportation. as shown in figure Sales Order Integration.
When creating sales orders, we usually talk about outbound transportation. However (as noted in
earlier lessons). SAP TM does not differentiate between outbound and inbound transportation.
Therefore. the OTR does not state any information about outbound or inbound scenarios. The
ship-to party is taken over into the OTR document as the destination location. It is therefore
mandatory to transfer all master data from ERP to TM using the Core Interface (CIF) framework
before integration of transactional data. The shipping point determined in ERP is used as the
source location of the OTR.
112
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
SAP ERP and SAP TM Integration
"
SAP
ERP
Pl·DEF
PI-OEF
ESR
ESR
Pl�
RUN
'-rV
SAP
TM
SAP
ERP
WS-RM
SAP
TM
Provioes 'lddilion..! r::;ip:lb!hhes
• Logical & technical receiver
addressing separated
• Delegated receiver determination &
message split possible
• Message & protocol adaptation
• Reliable message delivery
• Technical receiver addressing
by sender
• Compatible interfaces required
• Distributed configuration at run-time
• Centralized configuration and
monitoring
F 1gure 43: SAP ERP and SAP TM Integration
The technical communication between SAP ERP and SAP TM is achieved using Web Services I
XML messages. It can be established either with a mediated communication channel using SAP
NetWeaver Pl as a middleware. or by a point to point connection via Web-Service Reliable·
Messaging (WS·RM). The advantages of both communication channels are shown in figure SAP
ERP and SAP TM Integration.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
113
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Order-Based Transportation Requirements
Display ™100 Groop 01 DOT 1100000409 I Sales Order 15020)
-·... ·�·
°"1>""'°"'""-
�PO�-
.........
.........
1--.---
s,:"�..
'
""
'"'
·-...
lo ...."fl ••
t.....l-.llllM�pt.OOJ
....
,..c.,_
o.,...., •.....,
OfO,fllllDOflol o,,�
............
so1.. 0os,o.....,,..,
-�...
........
..,•• Cl'",..
cw.-y""'...""
'l'-lOlllll.,._O)aMIISO",
,..u,o.w.y�,,._....cn.,..
OU.flllt>H
.
--·
--............
__,,,,
. ..n·--
'll-·
.::
UV.,,.. ""'-f""...
""
.J
Jto,t..o
o..,_,.
lnC<liltfl'l'IS
.......... """... a...
·- -· ...
�-·•o.-
.
Q
-��To,1(1
rot.a«'lf�n,�
>=
""
"'
"
"
Items
I hr •'
'.
_.
._
��1EFU�•ll1l1cr°.AI
"""
°'"'""�....... -
"
�-,-�--, -- --,
• ...-.
"'-·.. ··
... •• .......... ep.,�fiiot•c,t...J
i,
'
Je.••
..,.. ,..
'"'
.....
So,.- i..oe....
Tit/I-«'>
Oi>et.w,w,11
SP)lO:,
_,,�:,
•-M
....,_,.
°""""'
""'""'
cutT�t,
,1c1:t1,
0.11>U1...
.......
"
"
""
0,
.. .... ......
-
" .. "
"
"
v.
"
"
l\'T
.
..
"'
,.,,"
i..."CI,.
. . ..
...
..
Figure 44: Order-Based Transportation Requirement
The OTR is the first document created in the SAP Transportation Management system when
starting the transportation process. It is. as already mentioned. created when an XML message is
received from a connected SAP ERP system. The OTR document lists all necessary information
concerning the transportation of the corresponding ERP order. such as products. schedule lines.
delivery dates. locations. and quantities.
The OTR is read only. which means the data contained in the document may not be changed
manually. The reason for this is that in a scenario that includes ERP logistics integration. the
leading (information) system is SAP ERP. This means that every change to the transportation
process is supposed to be triggered from the ERP order. Because the OTR cannot be edited. the
user cannot initiate any follow-on activities from the document either.
In order to be able to perform follow-on activities. such as planning or subcontracting. a
successor document, the freight unit, is created out of the OTR document. Freight units and
freight unit creation is covered in a later lesson.
114
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
Locations on OTRs
"
Display ™100 Group01 DOT 1100000409 (Sales Order 160201
.
-·-
Sou1ce
Addfe'!I.S
.............
Locations and Oatesmmes
....__,__,
-
s,
OX�A:MI
Oubluhon
Mklll!n
o.-_,.,.,.
- ..
"'
--......
..
..lt$190f\$:>M:
-
......
.. ...
"''
"".......
...
"'"
"'
......
�
� Pup ...ci Wc44
CU,?�$
._.....
,._C-,Ot,
.
ttems
•, II i.t
I
1,...,M...-,
• !)) "-lie:
�S:IIHJI
'
"
!. .•
..
M•••
$!,............
T...,..Qofft
Ooo...--tl
=·
tMl
........
-·-
PUOO
QJSlo:>-2�
Ut11l0
OJSTOO.:�
r:
.......,... °"'
t.,,N,}Ofl.
��.-.."""'
,.
.... .....,
lf'<'O"J
1-$.l!).:01'
.....
"
"'
..,..
...
"
"
.
v•
""
"
,."
...
"
"
.....
... .......
. ,.
'"'"
�
... "
'""
, "
Figure 4 5: Locations On OTRs
As figure Locations on OTRs shows. the OTR states source and destination on header level. The
OTR represents exactly one ERP order. Notice that the source location on header level is empty.
This is because the shipping point in ERP is determined per item line or even per schedule line.
Therefore. it can occur that one ERP order contains several item lines or schedule lines that
contain different shipping points.
As you can see in the item area of the OTR. the source location is filled on the item line as well as
on the schedule line. However. because the ship-to party is maintained for the entire ERP sales
order. the destination location can be defined on the header level of the OTR.
If an OTR contains several line items with different shipping points. that is source locations,
several freight units are created.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
115
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
116
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Exercise 7
Create a Sales Order
Review the Domestic Outbound Transportation Process
Business Example
You have been asked to give a brief presentation on the outbound transportation process and
demonstrate the creation of a sales order in SAP ERP and its integration in SAP TM.
1. Name the two business objects that are created in SAP TM and used to initiate planning based
on integration with SAP ERP.
2. What ERP documents generate an order-based transportation requirement?
3. Which ERP documents generate a delivery-based transportation requirement?
Create a Sales Order and Review Integration with SAP TM
1. In SAP ERP. on the SAP Easy Access screen (system ZME). choose Logistics--> Sales and
Distribution -->Sales--> Order--> Create (transaction VAOl).
2. Use the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
3. On the next screen. use the following details:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
117
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Field
Value
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
GROUP##-25
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
120
4. Choose Enter and then Save and make a note of the sales order number. This appears in the
information bar at the bottom of the screen (TMlOO Standard Order#### has been saved).
5. Stay in the screen and repeat steps 3-4 above to create two additional sales orders. Make a
note of the new sales order number each time. Use the following details:
Sold-To Party
PO Number
Material
Order Quantity
CUST00-26
GROUP##-26
PRODTM-00
120
CUST00-28
GROUP##-28
PRODTM-00
120
6. Choose Sa/es Document-> Display.
7. Make sure the number of your last sales order is entered in the Order field and choose Item
Overview.
8. Select the Shipping tab. What plant will this line item ship from?
9. What is the shipping point that this line item will physically ship from?
Review Order-Based Transportation Requirements
To complete your understanding of the integration between ERP and SAP TM. review the orderbased transportation requirement (OTR).
1. In NWBC. view the OTR for the sales orders that you created in ERP.
2. Select the General Data tab. What is the TM document type and what is the original ERP order
type?
118
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
3. What is the life cycle status of this OTR?
4. Review the item details. what is the source location?
5. Select the Business Partner tab. Who is the consignee?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
119
E"
Unit 4
Solution 7
Create a Sales Order
Review the Domestic Outbound Transportation Process
Business Example
You have been asked to give a brief presentation on the outbound transportation process and
demonstrate the creation of a sales order in SAP ERP and its integration in SAP TM.
L Name the two business objects that are created in SAP TM and used to initiate planning based
on integration with SAP ERP.
Order-based transportation
requirement (DTR).
requirement
(OTR).
and
delivery-based
transportation
2. What ERP documents generate an order-based transportation requirement?
Purchase order: sales order: stock transport order (different PO type).
3. Which ERP documents generate a delivery-based transportation requirement?
Outbound delivery and inbound delivery.
Create a Sales Order and Review Integration with SAP TM
L In SAP ERP. on the SAP Easy Access screen (system ZME), choose Logistics :« Sales and
Dlstribution -« Sales--. Order--. Create (transaction VAOl).
2. Use the following data:
Field
Value
Order Type
ZT##
Sales Organization
3000
Distribution Channel
10
Division
00
a) Enter ZT## in the Order Type field, where## is replaced with a number provided by your
instructor. The number assigned by your instructor remains valid for the entire course and
must also be used in the planning profile. For example, when it is required to enter a
planning profile in later exercises. you should use planning profile PLAN_3100_##, where
120
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
the number signs(#) are replaced with the same digits you are entering here for the order
type.
b) Enter 3000 in the Sa/es Organization field.
c) Enter 1 o in the Distribution Channel field.
d) Enter oo in the Division field.
e) Choose Enter.
3. On the next screen. use the following details:
Field
Value
Sold-to Party
CUST00-25
PO Number
GROUP##-25
Material
PRODTM-00
Order Quantity
120
4. Choose Enter and then Save and make a note of the sales order number. This appears in the
information bar at the bottom of the screen (TMlOO Standard Order#### has been saved).
5. Stay in the screen and repeat steps 3-4 above to create two additional sales orders. Make a
note of the new sales order number each time. Use the following details:
Sold-To Party
PO Number
Material
Order Quantity
CUST00-26
GROUP##-26
PRODTM-00
120
CUST00-28
GROUP##-28
PRODTM-00
120
6. Choose Sales Document -> Display.
7. Make sure the number of your last sales order is entered in the Order field and choose Item
Overview.
8. Select the Shipping tab. What plant will this line item ship from?
Plant 3100
9. What is the shipping point that this line item will physically ship from?
Shipping point 3100
Review Order-Based Transportation Requirements
To complete your understanding of the integration between ERP and SAP TM. review the orderbased transportation requirement (OTR).
1. In NWBC. view the OTR for the sales orders that you created in ERP.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
121
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
a) In NWBC. choose ERP Logistics Integration -> Worklist -> Overview Transportation
Requirements.
b) In the Active Queries section, on the Order-Based Transportation Requirements line, select
the query OTR Type TR## that you created earlier and refresh the query.
c) Find the row corresponding to a sales order you generated in the ERP system. You can see
the sales order number in the Original Order column. Click the corresponding link in the
Document column.
2. Select the General Data tab. What is the TM document type and what is the original ERP order
type?
The TM document type is TR## and the original ERP order type is ZT##.
3. What is the life cycle status of this OTR?
The life cycle status is In Planning.
4. Review the item details. what is the source location?
The source location is SP3100 (the shipping point).
5. Select the Business Partner tab. Who is the consignee?
The consignee is the Ship-to party that you entered in the sales order
122
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
Purchase Order
[e:lir-�
0)
...........,...
"""
"""
•
-.....-
. ._i,:n
f�l!f»
• I
··� n V$"W l
•••
-
..
l Oox.-.0 i.1.:1.�:1
..,.,,i;,r-,tDJu
...
•
ttU•.odt.nt
';;;
':oo,
w" -·
..,
..._
¥(ord:f
.... ,�
.,.,.,,,,
.
¢,,,(0.,.,()G
--
c...,.,,�
o.. M:n�
...
...,
�---·
�
--. . - �--.. -·- .
-�·
-M --- . ...---- --- - ----....
-- �. ·-·-·-� -·- -·- - - - -
11\·Ht.»·01 �M��
>HO
I>
1:.-1-11
1,COO.«>M
'
fO�Gio.�
loc..dons .i.nd Oates/T"me-s
,
,_,
"......,
-..
�,.,u
.
�
.
Items
•• ••
·�
•
-o-
",.
•
e.i.... i..- ...
�
�
,_,
..,m
-::»
:• u.:�1'
�
•
•
�
�
�
•
•
�.
•
•
�
"*
»m
Figure 46: Purchase Order Integration
Like SAP ERP sales orders. purchase orders can also be integrated into SAP TM. The integration
technology behind the integration of purchase orders is different to that behind the integration of
sales orders. Instead of output management. workflow technology is used to create the XML
message. However. once the XML message is created in SAP ERP it is sent to SAP TM and the
same process is triggered as for sales orders.
The message received in SAP TM is again used to create an order-based transportation
requirement. Recall from the previous lesson that SAP TM does not differentiate between
inbound and outbound transports. This is reflected in the fact that OTRs are created for both
purchase orders and sales orders.
As shown in figure Purchase Order Integration. for purchase orders. the source location, being
the vendor. is defined on the header level of the OTR. while the destination location is defined on
item level. This is because the receiving plant can differ from item line to item line while the
vendor needs to be maintained on the header level. Freight unit building runs in exactly the same
way as for sales orders.
With purchase orders you can decide whether you want to plan based on the ordered quantities
of the purchase orders. or with quantities confirmed by the vendor. In any case. the OTR is
created based on the ordered quantities. However. if planning should only happen based on
confirmed quantities. the freight unit is not created until the vendor's confirmation has been
posted.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
123
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Stock Transport Order
Order-Based
Transportation
•••
Stock
Transport
Order
Figure 47: Stock Transport Order Integration
Stock transport orders. being a special type of purchase order, can also be transferred to SAP
TM. As with sales orders and purchase orders. stock transport orders transferred to SAP TM
create an OTR document.
Because stock transport orders are a special type of purchase order. the workflow functionality in
SAP ERP is used to create the XML message that is transferred to SAP TM.
Integration of SAP ERP Scheduling Agreements With SAP TM
A scheduling agreement is a framework purchase agreement or sales agreement under which
materials are procured (on buying side). Products are delivered (on selling sides) on
predetermined dates within a certain time period. The future delivery quantities and dates are
entered as schedule lines in a delivery schedule.
To reflect forecasted quantities and dates along with the more detailed requirements. two
different types of scheduling agreement delivery schedules can be used. These are the following:
•
Forecast delivery schedules (FRC schedules)
•
Just-in-time delivery schedules (JIT schedules)
The most important transactions related to scheduling agreements can be found at
Logistics -+ Materials Management-+ Purchasing-+ Outline Agreement-+ Scheduling Agreement
resp. Logistics_. Sales and Distribution -+ Sales ...... Scheduling Agreement.
Up to release TM 9.2. integration of Materials Management (MM) and Sales and Distribution (SD)
scheduling agreements were not supported by SAP TM. With SAP TM 9.3. scheduling
124
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
agreements with their delivery schedules can be transferred between SAP ERP and SAP TM. You
can control the communication between the two systems by using specific time horizons.
Communication is based on eSOA services. supporting both process integration (Pl) based
communication and web services reliable messaging (WS-RM). The integration can be triggered
by the creation of. or a change of delivery schedules.
On the ERP side. the relevant development has been delivered with ECC6.17 SP06. Within SAP
ERP. the functionality is controlled via business function LOG_TM_SAG_INT_I. New IMG activities
allow control over how delivery schedules are transferred between ERP and TM. Batch reports
are available to enable the transfer of schedule lines that were not relevant at the time of the
initial transfer but become relevant over time. These batch reports are as follows:
•
TMINT_SAGMM_TRANSFER (for MM Scheduling Agreements)
•
TMINT_SAGSD_TRANSFER (for Sales Scheduling Agreements)
Using TM Planning and Execution Capabilities
Customer ERP
Customer TM
Supplier TM
Supplier ERP
8
@I]
s
0oGw,y SchtdulH
FRCdoltwry
sci..dut1
�
0..lw,y SchodulH
I 828 I
FRCde4tw<y
sci..dult
lklts
lhts
l,
JITd-y
0111
1<hodu!t
lhts
I 828 I
I A2A I
•
JITdol...-,
S<htdult
I kits
OTR
�ltMlng)
(P1•Mlng)
FOR
..-
I A2A I
•
lnb... nd
Outbound
dtltwry
dtl'-f
§]
§]
�
DTit
MM Scheduling Agreement Integration
I<
FOR
DTR
SD Scheduling Agreement Integration
Figure 48: Integration of ERP Scheduling Agreements into SAP TM
The integration of ERP Scheduling Agreements into SAP TM is based on the exchange of delivery
schedules between a customer ERP system and a supplier ERP system. The relevant schedule
lines are typically transmitted using Business-to-Business (B2B) communication. Both the
customer and the supplier can make use of TM planning and execution capabilities in the
following context:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
125
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
•
A customer can manage their inbound deliveries (purchasing) by creating corresponding
transportation requirements in SAP TM. This is a MM Scheduling Agreement scenario.
•
A supplier can manage their outbound deliveries (sales) by creating corresponding
transportation requirements in SAP TM. This is a Sales Scheduling Agreement scenario.
In both cases. the transportation planning is done based on the planned quantities and dates that
are reflected by the FRC and JIT delivery schedules. Therefore the line items of these FRC and JIT
delivery schedules are transferred from SAP ERP to SAP TM and stored as Order-Based
Transportation Requirements (OTR).
The subsequent planning activities result in Freight Orders (FOR) created in SAP TM. These are
used to define the schedule of the deliveries that shall be created in SAP ERP. To do so. a delivery
proposal for the Freight Order is created in SAP TM and sent to SAP ERP. Based on this, an
inbound or outbound delivery for the scheduling agreement is created on SAP ERP side. which in
turn triggers the creation of a Delivery-Based Transportation Requirement (DTR) in SAP TM.
SAP ERP Deliveries
-·-..._ -_
_.. -·...,...
--- ·-·---
...,_.
.._ ......
_......._._,
._
.__
-- ...
_
--·
.
-----·
--··
------
--...-· ....._........._
-·--·
--.-...........--.-.-_ ......
.__
. .-·---...----- - --....
....,.,
11t,1t,·'O'(t.J-
,
U'l
...
•
•
--
--__
,_._
figure 49: Delivery Integration
Instead of starting the transportation process with the ERP order. the process can also be started
based on a delivery. Regardless of whether an inbound delivery or an outbound delivery was sent
to SAP TM, a delivery-based transportation requirement (DTR) is created.
126
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Integrating SAP ERP with SAP TM
Other than in SAP LE· TRA. inbound and outbound deliveries can be consolidated into one
transport. This is because once they have been transferred to SAP TM. they are only referred to
as DTRs, with no differentiation between inbound and outbound.
Depending on the configuration of the SAP ERP system, the ERP order does not create a
message to be sent to SAP TM. only the delivery does
Delivery-Based Transportation Requirements
Figure 50: Delivery-Based Transportation Requirement
The decision about whether to start the process in SAP TM with either the ERP order or the ERP
delivery depends on the customer requirements and guidelines concerning transportation
planning and execution. If shipping activities other than transportation planning are involved prior
to the transportation process. the process based on the ERP delivery is more likely to be used. If
goods are sold with all shipping activities considered. the ERP order will be the basis for
transportation planning.
Assessing the DTR document as depicted in figure Delivery-Based Transportation Requirements.
you can see that OTR and DTR documents do not differ significantly. In fact. like the OTR, the
DTR. is also read only and must create freight units to continue the transportation process.
Therefore. there is no difference in the continuation of the process between transportation
requirements based on an ERP order and those based on ERP deliveries. As shown in the figure
Delivery-Based Transportation requirement. both documents are capable of triggering the entire
process.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
127
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
128
•
Describe SAP ERP logistics integration
•
Create a sales order
•
Describe the integration of SAP ERP purchase orders
•
Explain the process of generating transportation requirements in SAP TM from scheduling
agreements in SAP ERP
•
Describe the integration of SAP ERP deliveries
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Lesson 3
Managing the Freight Forwarding Process
LESSON OVERVIEW
You can use the Forwarding Order Management component in SAP TM to create. edit. and
confirm the forwarding orders from your ordering parties. In doing so. you can have the system
determine the route and calculate the transportation charges. The orders then form the basis for
transportation planning.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe the freight forwarding process
Freight Forwarding Process
Trucking
Warehousing
I Rail/ lntermodal !
Logistics Service Provider
t
Figure 51: Logistics Service Providers
Outsourcing refers to the process whereby the transportation services are performed by an
external party, often referred to as logistics service provider (LSP), freight forwarder. or thirdparty logistics provider.
A freight forwarder. forwarder. or forwarding agent is a person or company that organizes
shipments for individuals or other companies and may also act as a carrier. A forwarder is often
not active as a carrier and acts only as an agent. in other words, as a third-party (non-assetbased) logistics provider. The agent dispatches shipments via asset-based carriers and books or
otherwise arranges space for these shipments. Carrier types include ships. airplanes. trucks. and
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
129
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
trains. Freight forwarders typically arrange cargo movements to an international destination. Also
referred to as international freight forwarders. they have the expertise that allows them to
prepare and process the documentation and perform related activities pertaining to international
shipments. Some of the typical information reviewed by a freight forwarder is the commercial
invoice. shipper's export declaration, bill of lading. and other documents required by the carrier or
country of export. import. or transshipment. Much of this information is now processed in a
paperless environment.
Third-party logistics provider (abbreviated 3PL. or sometimes TPL) is a firm that provides a one
stop shop service to its customers of outsourced (or "third-party") logistics services for part. or
all of their supply chain management functions. Third-party logistics providers typically specialize
in integrated operation. warehousing. and transportation services that can be scaled and adapted
to the customer's needs based on market conditions and the demands and delivery service
requirements for their products and materials.
Forwarding Orders in SAP TM
/
Figure 52: Forwarding Order Transportation Modes
Logistics service providers operate globally. Therefore. they also operate multiple transportation
modes, as shown in figure Forwarding Order Transportation Modes. Each transportation mode
has its own specific information requirements. which are entered into the forwarding order. In
most cases. the mode of transportation is already predefined by the customer based on the
locations involved in the transportation. The method of processing forwarding orders can also
vary from customer to customer, region to region or product to product.The general forwarding
order process normally starts with the receipt of customer requirements. either as an e-mail,
phone call. or through direct bookings on the forwarding company's portal. A dispatcher or
forwarding agent may only have 3·5 minutes to dispatch a customer requirement. Therefore. it is
extremely important that this customer requirement can be processed quickly. SAP TM achieves
this through the use of fast-entry screens and templates.
130
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing the Freight Forwarding Process
Information and Functionality in Forwarding Orders
•
"
•
AWB
Figure 53: Forwarding Orders
As already mentioned the necessary level of information in a forwarding order is different for each
transportation mode The example in figure Forwarding Orders shows a forwarding order
designed for air transportation processes. The forwarding order comprises the following
information and functionality:
•
Locations
As with OTRs and DTRs. locations are one of the major elements of a transportation
requirement. The locations define from where and to where the transport is supposed to run.
•
Dates/Times
For transportation requirements. 'when' is almost as important as 'where'. Therefore, dates
and times are another major element of the forwarding order.
•
ULD
The Unit Load Device (ULD) is specific to air transportation and. when required. the forwarding
order also carries the relevant information pertaining to the air container types are supposed
to be used in the transportation.
•
Business Partners
The business partners details list all parties involved in the transportation process. For OTRs
and DTRs. this is typically only the shipper and consignee. For LSP driven processes. the
number of involved parties can be much higher, including additional parties such as preferred
carrier, notify parties, payer different to ordering party, and so on. On forwarding orders, in
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
131
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
contrast to OTRs and DTRs. charges can be calculated for the transportation requirement.
The charges calculated can be settled in ERP to create an invoice that is sent to the LSP's
customer.
•
Airports
In air transportation. the LSP usually predefines which airports are included in the
transportation. This is based on a certain rule set (called Default Route in SAP TM). In this way.
the LSP defines how the goods are supposed to be routed in the transportation requirement.
•
Planning and Execution Organizations
For each defined stage of the transportation requirement, the LSP can maintain which
planning and execution organization within the LSP company should be concerned with the
follow-up activities for this transportation requirement. such as planning, subcontracting, or
execution.
•
Output
The LSP can issue documents such as a House Air Waybill (used in air transportation) directly
from the transportation requirement.
•
Items
As with OTRs and DTRs, the forwarding order contains information about what goods are to
be transported.
Shipping Type
ULD
I
Loose
I
I
Carload
I 1ntermodal I
---------------------------------------------------,--------------------------------------------------'
Less th..-i
Truck Load
Full Container
Load
I �tainer Load I
Less than
figure 54: Shipping Type
132
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing the Freight Forwarding Process
Shipping types define how the cargo is given to the LSP or carrier for transportation. In general.
we can differentiate between two transportation scenarios:
,
Consolidation is needed
If consolidation is required, the customer only provides pallets to the LSP. The LSP finds other
customer orders during planning in order to consolidate these orders into one container to
reduce costs
•
Consolidation is not needed
If consolidation is not needed. the customer provides the LSP already with a full container
which can be transported individually as it is.
Stage Definition
Transportation
Mode
- • ·*· • • n
Shipper
• J
-
Airport
Pre- Carriage
•
Airport
Main Carriage
Consignee
On Carriage
Stage Types
Figure 55: Stage Definition
In most international transports. the LSP does a routing of the entire transportation prior to the
planning itself. To do so. the LSP enters stages into the forwarding order on the Stages tab.
Initially, when only source and destination locations are entered, there is only one stage in the
forwarding order. However, the LSP can split this stage and enter intermediate stops as well as
planned arrival and departure dates for each intermediate stop.
These stages are propagated into the freight unit and the planning complies with it. The stages
can be maintained manually or automatically. running a transportation proposal. As different
items of the forwarding order may have different destination locations, the routing can also be
defined for each item individually. This is done on the Ordered Route tab and not in the Item
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
133
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Details section. You can switch the view of the stages between a Stage View. where the different
stages are listed on header level, displaying which items are contained in each stage. and an Item
View where each item is listed on header level and the routing of each item is shown below.
For each stage. you can maintain the required transportation mode. The definition of the
transportation mode per stage is optional but if a transportation mode is defined for a stage, the
corresponding freight units stage may only be planned on freight documents and resources of
this transportation mode.
Furthermore stages can be classified with so called stage types. There are predefined stage types
such as pre-carriage. main carriage and on-carriage as shown in the figure. Stage Definition. The
transportation modes used in the stages do not have to match the transportation mode defined
for the forwarding order. however. the transportation mode of the stage representing the main
carriage should always match the transportation mode for the entire forwarding order.
Stages can be defined as statistical stages which means that they are displayed on the forwarding
order but not relevant for planning and therefore also irrelevant to the freight unit.
Movement Type
'
Movement Types
•
Figure 56: Movement Type
The movement type describes the geographical nature of the entire transportation process. as
shown in the figure. Movement Type. While the shipping type described the nature of what is
going to be transported. the movement type describes the way it is going to be transported.
Common examples for movement types are door-to-door or port-to-port.
134
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing the Freight Forwarding Process
When defining a movement type. the business partner entered as the shipper of the forwarding
order can be used as source location of the forwarding order (that is. the location that has the
business partner defined as shipper assigned). The same can be done for the destination location
which is derived from the consignee of the forwarding order.
Processing Forwarding Orders
Ordering Party
Logistics Service Provider
Request quotation from
logistics service provider
Manually create quotation with
basic transportation data
Perform transportation charge
calculation
(Optionally) assign a validity
period lo the quotation
Communicate quotation back to
ordering party
Convert quotation into
forwarding order and take over
transportation charge calculation
Figure 57: forwarding Quotations
An offer (that is, a quote) is made by a logistics service provider to a customer for the
transportation of goods. The offer binds the logistics service provider for a certain period of time
to execute a subsequent forwarding order for a certain amount of money. The quotation process
in forwarding order management is seamlessly integrated with the tendering process in freight
order management. Forwarding order management is comprised of functions such as creation.
update. and confirmation of forwarding orders. Forwarding orders can be received electronically
via EDI or can be entered through the user interface.
Third Party Integration with Forwarding Orders
Forwarding orders can be received electronically and created automatically. based on the
information of a 828 message. SAP TM offers a predefined interface for 828 communication
between the LSP and the customer. The customer can therefore send a 828 message to the
LSP's SAP TM system. in which a forwarding order is automatically created. The 828 message
contains all the fields of a forwarding order, which means that compared to the manual entry of
the forwarding order document. there is no loss of information. If messages are received in a
different format. they can be mapped to the standard interface using SAP Pl.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
135
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
External
Customer
System
(non-SAP)
SAP TM
SAP Pl
u.
Q)
o
-�
Standard
Web
Service
(XML)
�
u.
--0
Q)
o
·c:
Q)
CJ)
CJ)
CX)
CX)
CX)
Mapping
u.
-
Q)
N
�
c
:::,
-
0
.0
-c
N
CX)
I
XML,
IDoc, Flat
files ...
I
I
Pl Content
'
Figure 58: Third Party Integration
136
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Exercise 8
Create a Forwarding Order
Business Example
A customer calls you - a Logistics Service Provider - and requests a transport from Cologne to
Hannover for 20 cartons, containing 100 pieces of a product. for next week. You create a
forwarding order to capture the details of this transportation request
1. In SAP TM in NWBC, create a new forwarding order using the following data:
Field
Value
Forwarding Order Type
TO##
Transportation Mode
01- Road
Shipping Type
17- Less-Than-Truckload
Movement Type
T2C (TM200-Direct)
Sales Organization
50001426
2. Switch to Fast Order Entry (Land). enter the following data and then press Enter on your
keyboard.
Field
Value
Ordering Party
EU-CUST-01
Shipper
EU-CUST-01
Consignee
EU-CUST-08
Pick-up Date
Next Monday
Delivery Date
1 day after pick-up
3. In the items table, create a package item with a product item below. Use the following data:
Package Item
Item Type
PKG
Package Type
Carton
Quantity+ Quantity Unit of Measure
20PC
Gross Weight+ Gross Weight (UoM)
360KG
Product Item
Item Type
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
PRD
137
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Product
PRODTM-10
Quantity
100 PC
4. Save your forwarding order and make a note of the forwarding order number.
5. Switch to the Forwarding Order page to check if a stage was created for the ordered route.
6. Close your forwarding order.
138
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Solution 8
Create a Forwarding Order
Business Example
A customer calls you - a Logistics Service Provider - and requests a transport from Cologne to
Hannover for 20 cartons, containing 100 pieces of a product. for next week. You create a
forwarding order to capture the details of this transportation request
1. In SAP TM in NWBC, create a new forwarding order using the following data:
Field
Value
Forwarding Order Type
TO##
Transportation Mode
01- Road
Shipping Type
17- Less-Than-Truckload
Movement Type
T2C (TM200-Direct)
Sales Organization
50001426
a) In NWBC. choose Forwarding Order Management-> Forwarding Order-> Create
Forwarding Order.
b) Enter the data from the table.
c) Choose Continue
2. Switch to Fast Order Entry (Land), enter the following data and then press Enter on your
keyboard.
Field
Value
Ordering Party
EU-CUST-01
Shipper
EU-CUST-01
Consignee
EU-CUST-08
Pick-up Date
Next Monday
Delivery Date
1 day after pick-up
a) In the top right of the screen. in the Page field, enter Fast Order Entry (Land).
b) Enter the data from the table and then press Enter on your keyboard.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
139
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
c) Check that the source and destination locations are entered automatically. based on the
business partners. (If the fields are not populated, place your cursor in the Delivery Date
field and press Enter again.
3. In the items table. create a package item with a product item below. Use the following data:
Package Item
Item Type
PKG
Package Type
Carton
Quantity+ Quantity Unit of Measure
20PC
Gross Weight+ Gross Weight (UoM)
360KG
Product Item
Item Type
PRD
Product
PRODTM·lO
Quantity
100 PC
a) Scroll down to the table and choose the Insert button. and then select Package.
b) Enter the appropriate data from the table (rows under Package Item).
c) Select the Package line. then choose the Insert button again and select Product. (Ensure
the product is created under the level of the package, not on the same level.)
d) Enter the appropriate data from the table (rows under Product Item).
4. Save your forwarding order and make a note of the forwarding order number.
5. Switch to the Forwarding Order page to check if a stage was created for the ordered route.
a) In the top-right of the screen. switch from Fast Order Entry (Land) to Forwarding Order to
display all data.
b) Open the Ordered Route tab.
c) Check whether a stage was created for the ordered route with transportation mode Road.
based on the movement type Direct.
6. Close your forwarding order.
140
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing the Freight Forwarding Process
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the freight forwarding process
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
141
E"
Unit 4
Lesson 4
Booking Capacities
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about how SAP TM can integrate your company's requirements for
overseas shipping (by ocean or air) into your standard transportation management activities,
particularly in relation to capacity booking.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the ocean freight booking process
•
Create an ocean freight booking
•
Describe an air freight booking
Ocean Freight Booking
Custornet
••
Pk.k·U'""P
•
Pre-C�rria---+
Th13_0ENUE_CFS_1
Nuernberg
TM3_SHIP1
Wt1Hdcrf
---------
! ,,
••
Maln Carriage
/
Th13_0EHAM_CFS_1 TM3 DEHAI� PORT 1
- �
Hamburg
HamOOrg
Tii11_CAR001
• - - - .-,.
--
••
.,,,
Consignee
;,,
r
Main Carriag:1"--------,+-- On..Cartiage---+ +--- Delivery ---.
TM3_USNYK,.PORT_1
New York
TM3_USNYJ<..CFS_1
New York
TM3_USCHI_CFS_1
Chicago
Th13_CONS1
Chicago
figure 59: Ocean Transport
Ocean transport has been the largest carrier of freight throughout recorded history. Although the
importance of sea travel for passengers has decreased due to the rise of aviation (it is still
popular for short trips and pleasure cruises), it remains hugely important for the transport of
goods. Freight transport by water is cheaper than transport by air. Sea or ocean transport can be
over any distance· by boat. ship. sailboat or barge. over oceans and lakes. through canals or
142
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Booking Capacities
along rivers. Virtually any material that can be moved, can be moved by water. Despite these
benefits. ocean transport is less practical in situations where a speedy delivery is paramount.
When speaking of ocean transport. 'general cargo' refers to goods packaged in boxes. cases,
pallets, and barrels. In the 1960s. a revolution called "containerization" altered the way that cargo
was moved overseas. When a cargo is carried in more than one mode. it is said to be intermodal
or co-modal.
lntermodal freight transport involves the transportation of freight in an intermodal container or
vehicle. using multiple modes of transport (rail. ship, and truck). without any handling of the
freight itself when changing modes. The method reduces cargo handling, and so improves
security, reduces damages and losses. and allows freight to be transported faster. Reduced cost
over road trucking is the key benefit for intracontinental use. This may be offset by quicker times
for road transport over shorter distances.
Ocean Booking Process
Figure 60: Ocean Booking Process Steps
Planning an ocean freight movement is different to planning a domestic freight movement insofar
as the resources are often more scarce and they tend to operate on fixed schedules. Schedules in
SAP TM can mimic the departure days, times. and frequency of ocean-going vessels or aircraft.
One step in the ocean-bound process that is different to the domestic scenario is the use of a
booking. The freight booking is intended to reserve capacity on a vessel or aircraft. The difference
between a (ocean) freight booking and a freight order is that a freight booking is equivalent to
buying an airplane ticket. that is, you book capacity: a freight order is equivalent to checking in
baggage and having it put aboard the plane.
Using Templates
If bookings for the same routes are required repeatedly. it is recommended to work with
templates. Templates can be used to copy a new freight booking directly from the POWL for
bookings.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
143
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Less Than Container Loads
One of the other scenarios that SAP TM will consider is that of the 'Less than Container Load'
(LCL). In this situation a freight forwarder coordinates the ocean shipments for more than one
customer simultaneously.
Prior to the receipt of export requirements. the freight forwarder may decide to book capacity on
a vessel due to a forecast based on previous requirements. When requirements arrive they are
often too small to warrant the use of a full container. In such situations, the freight forwarder
ships the items to a facility where they consolidate the load into a single container.
Depending on who is paying for the freight. the freight forwarder may decide to create freight
orders for both the pre-carriage and on-carriage segments.
��
FWO
�
Order entry
I
-
Consolidation
,
1
Freight
Booking
' .- --�......... .
.........
Confirmation
r
I
•
i.llO�
(' \l\.CO:.,'f«tf !!
r'""""'
rr """"'""
!OC'.IODfflSS
r
A�,Co»i,$$
r $lrl1�am,.,.
r a;�
Web Service
(' CfEnll Elf'l\t:!.'I
.. .........
!U
!II
!!!
..
!U
_l_e.
.""'
....
......
•tan
Figure 61: Less Than Container Loads
144
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Exercise 9
Create an Ocean Freight Booking
Business Example
You need to be able to create an ocean freight booking for capacity reservation with a carrier.
1. Create a new ocean freight booking with booking type OF04.
2. Assign a schedule to your ocean booking.
3. Which data was taken over from the schedule to the ocean booking? Hint: Have a look at the
Genera/ Data and Locations and Dates/Times tabs.
4. Enter capacity requirements of five 20ft containers that should be requested from the carrier.
5. Save your ocean booking.
6. What is the booking confirmation status and the confirmed container count? Hint: Go to the
General Data tab.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
145
E"
Unit 4
Solution 9
Create an Ocean Freight Booking
Business Example
You need to be able to create an ocean freight booking for capacity reservation with a carrier.
1. Create a new ocean freight booking with booking type OF04.
a) In NWBC, choose Freight Order Management___. Ocean
---+
Create Ocean Freight Booking.
b) Enter booking type OF04 - ocean Booking and choose Continue.
2. Assign a schedule to your ocean booking.
a) In the main toolbar. choose Scneoule-« Assign.
b) On the Select Schedule Departure popup, enter the following data:
Field
Value
Source Location
OF-CFS-JPYOK
Destination Location
OF-CFS-USLAX
c) Choose Search.
d) On the result list. select a departure date 4 weeks from today and choose OK.
3. Which data was taken over from the schedule to the ocean booking? Hint: Have a look at the
General Data and Locations and Dates/Times tabs.
The following data was taken over: Under General Data - carrier. voyage, schedule. Under
Locations and Dates/Times - pick-up location. pick-up date, cut-off dates. port of loading,
sailing date. port of discharge. expected arrival date. port pick-up date. delivery location.
delivery date.
4. Enter capacity requirements of five 20ft containers that should be requested from the carrier.
a) Scroll down in the Capacity Requirements area and enter the following data:
Field
Value
Equipment Group
CN
Equipment Type
22GP
Container Count
5
(Container)
(20ft container)
5. Save your ocean booking.
146
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Booking Capacities
6. What is the booking confirmation status and the confirmed container count? Hint: Go to the
General Data tab.
The booking confirmation status is Not Sent to Carrier and the confirmed container
count is o (blank).
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
147
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
Air Freight Booking
Ex
rt
Im Ort
BU Origin
I Shipper I.
BU
Import
�
1§.11
§1
__
..
__
__
..
__
0
l---'--11
0 - • ,�.
•
Nuernberg
Pick-Up
Transfer
FRA
ORD Chicago
•••
Transfer
Consipnee
J
Milwaukee
Delive ·
Air Freight Booking
Traffic Direction = Export
MAWB: 020-81140743
Traffic Direction = Export
HAWB: NUE100001
O
BU = Business Unit
Airport
figure 62: Air Freight Booking
Like ocean freight bookings, air freight bookings can be created in SAP TM as capacity
reservations with airline carriers. During transportation planning. they can be used as capacities.
Before being shipped air freight may be consolidated in one of two ways, namely gateway
consolidation and business unit consolidation.
Gateway Consolidation
In the gateway consolidation scenario, the gateway (freight forwarder) receives freight from a
number of different business units or stations. The gateway is responsible for flight planning.
capacity management, (de)consolidation, MAWB (Master Air Waybill) creation and also for
communicating directly with the air carrier. The gateway is also responsible for transfers to/from
the airport. The business units consume the booking capacity of the gateway. A business unit
issues a HAWB (House Air Waybill) to the MAWB maintained at the gateway. As the gateway
receives cargo from different business units. multiple HAWBs (forwarding orders) may be issued
to one MAWB (air freight booking).
Business Unit Consolidation
With business unit consolidation, as shown in figure Air Freight Booking, the business units have
direct relationships with customers and are consolidating cargo from multiple shippers. This
might also include cargo from other business units. The business unit is responsible for flight
planning. capacity management. consolidation. MAWB creation and communicating directly with
the air carrier. There is no gateway involved (for export or import) in this scenario. In SAP TM. the
MAWB is the airfreight booking and the HAWB represents a forwarding order. In this scenario.
both the HAWB and MAWB are issued by the business unit. In an internal co-load scenario, a
148
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Booking Capacities
booking (air or ocean) arranged by a certain business unit (BUI) is used by a separate.
independent business unit (BU2) to ship their forwarding orders. The cargo (forwarding orders)
of BU2 is co-loaded on the air freight booking of BUl.
Business Process for Air Freight Booking
The following scenario describes operations that involve consolidated air freight at gateways
belonging to the freight forwarding company, lnterforwarders. lnterforwarders is a global logistics
service provider (LSP) with two subsidiaries, one in Japan and one in the United States. The
lnterforwarders transportation network consists of forwarding houses (stations) in Tokyo and
Nagoya, as well as a central gateway and two warehouses at Narita International Airport. On the
U.S. west coast. there are two warehouses and a gateway at Los Angeles International Airport. as
well as forwarding houses (stations) in Phoenix. AZ and San Diego, CA. Typically, the forwarding
houses have direct customer contact, whereas the central gateway serves to coordinate and
consolidate all air traffic. This means that the forwarding houses have contracts such as
forwarding agreements with customers (including both shippers and consignees). which stipulate
charges and state how goods are to be handled. The gateways act as service centers and enter
into contracts such as freight agreements with the carriers to specify optimized, consolidated
cost rates and volume agreements.
Air Freight Schedules
Based on former shipments and growth forecasts. freight forwarders reserve capacity for a
certain route and create master flight schedules for each weekday and carrier. In this scenario.
the lnterforwarders gateway in Narita creates an internal master flight schedule with specific
flights and transportation allocations for each carrier (in this example Japan Airlines and Qantas
Airways) for specific days of the week. Once the departure rules have been assigned the daily
allocations. a master flight plan is created by defining the actual departures in a certain time
period, for example six months). Based on this master flight plan. an operational flight plan
containing all flights with booked capacity is extracted for a shorter time period, for example. four
weeks.
Air Freight Bookings
Once the operational flight plan is in place, the system automatically creates freight bookings for
each scheduled departure and assigns air waybill numbers from a pre-defined number range. The
freight bookings can be automatically requested and confirmed by electronic data interchange or
manually confirmed in the case of manual bookings. Confirmed freight bookings can be used to
link forwarding orders. consolidate the cargo, and issue the necessary documents such as master
air waybills and truck manifests. The transportation planner at the Narita gateway views the
assignment of the forwarding order to a flight (based on the freight booking) and confirms the
assignment after having checked the order for special handling requirements or other
compatibility issues. The forwarding order is loosely assigned to the air freight booking
appropriate to the flight. At the same time, the capacity of the reserved flight is checked along
with the feasibility of meeting the required pickup times at the shipper and delivery times at the
consignee. This determines the final routing selected by the gateway and the approximate
timeline.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
149
E"
Unit 4: Transportation Order Management
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
150
•
Describe the ocean freight booking process
•
Create an ocean freight booking
•
Describe an air freight booking
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4
Learning Assessment
1. Which processes are used in which scenarios?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Managing transportation requirements in shipper scenarios
B Managing transportation requirements in LSP scenarios
C Managing forwarding orders in shipper scenarios
D Managing forwarding orders in LSP scenarios
2. Which business documents can be created and changed manually in SAP TM?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
A Forwarding Order
B Order-Based Transportation Requirements
C Delivery-Based Transportation Requirements
3. A Pl system is a mandatory requirement for transferring sales orders to SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
4. Which business document is created in SAP TM based on an SAP ERP sales order?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
A None
B Delivery-Based Transportation Requirement
C Order-Based Transportation Requirement
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
151
E"
Unit 4: Learning Assessment
5. When integrating ERP purchase orders to SAP TM. there will always be a unique destination
location on the header level of the order-based transportation requirements.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
6. Which of the following are scheduling agreement delivery schedules?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Forecast delivery schedules (FRC schedules)
B Forecast-in-time delivery schedules
c
Just delivery schedules
D Just-in-time delivery schedules (JIT schedules)
7. ERP deliveries can be the starting point of transportation planning in SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
8. Which transportation modes are supported using forwarding orders in an LSP scenario?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
152
A Road
B Rail
c
Ocean
D Air
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4: Learning Assessment
9. Which business document is used to reserve capacity in ocean freight scenarios?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
D
A Freight Order
B OTR
c
Freight Booking
D Ocean Schedule
10. Which business document is used to reserve capacity in an air freight scenario?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
A Air Waybill
B Freight Booking
c
MAWB
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
153
E"
Unit 4
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which processes are used in which scenarios?
Choose the correct answers.
0
D
D
0
A Managing transportation requirements in shipper scenarios
B Managing transportation requirements in LSP scenarios
C Managing forwarding orders in shipper scenarios
D Managing forwarding orders in LSP scenarios
2. Which business documents can be created and changed manually in SAP TM?
Choose the correct answer.
0
D
D
A Forwarding Order
B Order-Based Transportation Requirements
C Delivery-Based Transportation Requirements
3. A Pl system is a mandatory requirement for transferring sales orders to SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
0
True
False
That's correct. As an alternative. point-to-point integration can be set up using WSRM.
154
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 4: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Which business document is created in SAP TM based on an SAP ERP sales order?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
0
A None
B Delivery-Based Transportation Requirement
C Order-Based Transportation Requirement
5. When integrating ERP purchase orders to SAP TM. there will always be a unique destination
location on the header level of the order-based transportation requirements.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
That's correct. The destination location is derived from the receiving plant. which can differ
from item to item.
6. Which of the following are scheduling agreement delivery schedules?
Choose the correct answers.
0
D
D
0
A Forecast delivery schedules (FRC schedules)
B Forecast-in-time delivery schedules
c
Just delivery schedules
D Just-in-time delivery schedules (JIT schedules)
7. ERP deliveries can be the starting point of transportation planning in SAP TM.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
155
E"
Unit 4: Learning Assessment - Answers
8. Which transportation modes are supported using forwarding orders in an LSP scenario?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
0
A Road
B Rail
c
Ocean
D Air
9. Which business document is used to reserve capacity in ocean freight scenarios?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
A Freight Order
B OTR
0
c
D
D Ocean Schedule
Freight Booking
10. Which business document is used to reserve capacity in an air freight scenario?
Choose the correct answer.
D
0
D
156
A Air Waybill
B Freight Booking
C MAWB
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Transportation Planning
Lesson 1
Defining the Transportation Planning Process
Exercise 10: Discuss the Transportation Planning Process
159
167
Lesson 2
Viewing a Freight Unit
Exercise 11: View a Freight Unit
171
177
Lesson 3
Building a Package
180
Lesson 4
Defining a Selection Profile
184
Lesson 5
Determining a Planning Profile
186
Lesson 6
Accessing the Transportation Cockpit
Exercise 12: Access the Transportation Cockpit
190
195
Lesson 7
Generating a Transportation Proposal
Exercise 13: Generate a Transportation Proposal
199
203
Lesson 8
206
Creating a Freight Order
Exercise 14: Create a Freight Order
213
Lesson 9
224
Optimizing a Load
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
157
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
UNIT OBJECTIVES
158
•
Describe the business process and documentation required for transportation planning
•
View a freight unit
•
Describe package building
•
Define the requirements for a selection profile
•
Display a selection profile
•
Describe the parameters used to support planning in SAP TM
•
Display a planning profile
•
Access the transportation cockpit
•
Generate a transportation proposal
•
Describe the freight order and freight order types required for shipping
•
Describe visual planning
•
Describe load optimization
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Lesson 1
Defining the Transportation Planning Process
LESSON OVERVIEW
Your business receives orders for the products it manufactures and must then ship these
products to the end customer. SAP TM has the capability to perform advance planning in order to
increase your company's service level and increase profitability. In this lesson. you will gain a high
level overview of the planning capabilities of SAP TM.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe the business process and documentation required for transportation planning
Transportation Planning Document Flow
__
__
-·
...
I
...
_
I
}
-�----
�
--<:. _____________________________
Freight Unit Building
...:�·---�
Planning
Freight Unit
-------- ------- - . .... t
,.
Planning
' - - - - - - ---·--·· - -I-----'"•.__
Freight Order I
Freight Booking
F 1gure 63: Document Flow - Transportation Planning
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
159
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
The standard planning process begins with creating freight units out of transportation requests.
Any of the following may prompt the creation of a freight unit:
•
Forwarding Order (FWO)
•
Order-Based Transportation Requirement (OTR)
•
Delivery-Based Transportation Requirement (DTR)
Purpose of the Short-Cut Process
Once created. freight units are used by manual or automatic planning activities to build freight
orders. which can subsequently be used for carrier selection and/or tendering processes. The
purpose of the short-cut process is to skip any planning activities. because these may not be
required in certain scenarios. For example. if the sales orders that are received by a company
already state the required truck size. the freight order could be created directly from the
transportation requirement (in this example an OTR). Technically, this is done during freight unit
building by selecting a freight order type instead of a freight unit type.
l
Standard process flow
Order
Management
Plannlng
I
"
...
FU
Execution I
Subcontracting
FO
)
Shortcut process flow no frei ht units, no plannin
Order
Management
_.L-1,,
FO
<
n I
Execution I
Subcontracting
Figure 64: Standard And Shortcut Processes
Reasons for Transportation Planning
The goal of SAP TM is to provide customers with the ability to either manually or automatically
plan and optimize their transportation requests. This includes the ability to perform order
consolidation where a company can group orders with the same ship-from and ship-to locations
for more efficient transportation quantities. If multiple orders are being shipped within a
predefined transportation zone. your company can try to efficiently schedule and route the
multiple orders. and chose the appropriate carrier. The planning and selection can be determined
using the most cost effective and timely route from source to destination while considering realworld constraints. costs. and penalties. The optimizer is capable of making multi-modal decisions
such as sea, air. truck. train. and any combination thereof. The SAP TM planning function can also
perform multi-pickup and stop options.
Within the optimization algorithm is the ability to use the appropriate resources in terms of
availability and capacity. The optimizer can consider incompatibility rules to restrict how freight
orders are built. for example. modeling material-specific transport requirements (for example.
cooled products). In addition, carrier selection allows your company to determine the right
160
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Defining the Transportation Planning Process
combination of carrier assignments based on cost. equipment availability. priority. and business
share goals.
Order Consolidation
Order consolidation is the grouping of orders with the same ship-from and ship-to locations to
create more efficient shipment quantities.
The result of order consolidation is that one or more freight units are combined into one freight
order. A freight unit is a business document representing the smallest possible transportation
unit. Business examples of order consolidation are multiple orders that have been received over
time and can be planned to be shipped together. This can be at individual line item level.
Customers who make-to-order. and do not ship complete orders to their customers. may
consolidate line items from multiple orders as they are produced and as their delivery-due lists
are created.
Transportation Planning Scenarios
planning
(Truck/Rail) ·Tem'Tt aJ...:
�
Full Truck load
(FTL) Planning
Chicago Plan\-'---'----'-'-4,,
3100
US-CUST-08
Lousiville, KY
(LTL vs. FTL)
Multi-Stop
US-CUST·09
Planning
US-CUST -07 Carrollton, KY
Evansville. IN (lTl ,s FTL)
(LTL vs. TL)
��-1
i\f�q=�-d:: ;-,..,
US-CUST-10
Los Angeles, CA
(Truckload)
Dallas Crossdock
US-CUST-01
US-CUST-02
US-CUST-03
US-CUST-04 Pooled Distribution
US-CUST-05
US-CUST-06
Figure 65: Transportation Planning Scenarios
In SAP TM, transportation planning supports multiple variants. There are several scenarios that
can be used. depending upon shipping requirements. as follows:
•
Truckload shipments (FTL or L TL)
•
lntermodal (IM)
•
Direct shipments
•
Multi-stop shipments
•
Pooled distribution
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
161
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Truckload Shipments (FTL or LTL)
Truckload shipments tend to be the simplest of the outbound planning scenarios. The
transportation order received by the shipper is in a full truck load quantity, typically>= 35,000
lbs, or 3,660 cubic feet. or 28 - 32 pallets. The shipment is from one source to one destination. so
very little route planning is necessary, with the exception of carrier selection The ideal situation
would be one product. but multiple line items can be supported. In SAP TM, when orders are
entered with a weight greater than 35,000 lbs. the system can be set up to automatically plan.
tender. and cost the freight order without additional user intervention. This is considered a one
step process.
Full Truck Load
In some industries. goods are ordered and delivered based on full truck load (FTL). because that
is an inexpensive option. Typically, this is used for cheap products where the transport costs are
high compared to the value of the goods. This FTL scenario is also used extensively in bulk
transport. If the order is for multi-line items. SAP TM can perform truck load optimization
planning for freight units. During planning, companies can perform carrier restriction (a carrier is
not permitted). Additionally, if a default carrier is not maintained. companies can perform carrier
selection based on lowest costs. Once planning is done. the transportation order is ready for
tendering. Finally, bills of lading can be created with driver notes when the shipment is picked up.
lntermodal Shipment
lntermodal freight transport involves the transportation of freight in a container or vehicle that
can use multiple modes of transportation (rail. ship. and truck). without any handling of the
freight itself when changing modes. This method reduces cargo handling, and so improves
security. reduces damages and losses. and allows freight to be transported faster. This method
reduces costs compared with road transport. and is the key advantage when deployed for
intracontinental use. The cost savings may be offset by reduced timing for road transport over
shorter distances. however.
lntermodal transport is generally used for two purposes. One is to move goods relatively cheaply
over long distances using ocean and rail transport. The second is to move goods over long
distances very quickly, for example with air freight. Based on the requested delivery date, the
carrier selection process determines whether to use intermodal or truck load as the means of
transport. This is based on the transit time for each means of transport; intermodal container on
flat car (COFC) with a 4 day transit period or TL with a 3 day transit period.
Multi-stop Shipments
Multi-stop or pool shipment is the consolidation of two or more orders into one or more
shipments. Instead of making several (say 5) shipments. sending a separate vehicle to each
customer. your company plans to have only one vehicle visit each customer. This is a truck load
(TL) process. where some planning is required to ensure no constraints are violated. Be aware
that in-transit stops are limited. usually 3 or less. As transportation volumes increase. optimized
multi-stop planning improves operational efficiencies. Routes can be determined by pick-up and
delivery windows at both shipping and receiving locations.
Pooled Shipment
Pooled distribution is prevalent in delivery/distribution scenarios. from distribution centers to
customers. In the postal industry. it is also used to deliver mail to post offices or large customers
162
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Defining the Transportation Planning Process
and institutions. In general, this scenario also includes the collection of empty returnable
packaging from customer sites.
International Transportation
When companies begin to transport goods across borders, the complexity of the logistics
increases. Depending upon how the product gets to its destination, multiple modes of
transportation may be needed. In addition, you have to consider the legal requirements
necessary to import and export products to other countries.
In SAP TM, you can perform container transportation from forwarding order processing. ocean
carrier booking, freight planning, execution and tracking, to order settlement.
Shipper-
$1'1IPJ!er
{'kN¥11,�
Vlardl0t..15t
,.....
(Tren,p. DMliOn)
Dlsd11rge
/-US,\J
(Ro!Mffll. ,'t)A'at)dJ
;
M�°""
""""9 @
�·.lld'lou!e
..,a:n co�coooant�
oocon
C<>,la,,c,s
ITamkm:d
liner {Free On 0oo'd (rOO)) 1.151r,g prc.tlookod
ID poll ct
ieil" "l'"'Y
\1;)
Fin:il dofril}ry Titl wck.
l'om pon of dcsfn.:rion
"""'l
Figure 66: International Outbound Transportation
With international transportation. more planning segments may need to be considered. In the
graphic above, time is allotted for the material to be packaged into 3 20-foot standard dry
containers at the manufacturing location. These containers are then affixed to a trailer chassis.
Then time must be factored in to deliver the three containers to the transportation division's
warehouse in the port of loading. At the port. they will be loaded on to the ocean liner and
delivered to the port of discharge. At this time. incoterms need to be considered. In this case
(FOB) Free On Board would be applied where you need to pre-book freight capacity. Once the
freight arrives at the port of discharge, the containers are either warehoused or picked up for final
delivery to the consignee. Finally, the containers are delivered to the consignee with proof of
delivery.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
163
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Routing, Scheduling, and Carrier Selection
Order
Management·:
Freight Unit: X
Rout:ng:
Freight Unit: X
3
__£
US Road
Planning:
Freight Unit: X-10
+
Carrier Selection
I
+
Ocean Planning:
Freight Unit: X-20
EU Road
Planning:
Freight Unit: X-30
Carrier Selection
Carrier Selection
l
Shipper
{Newatl<., USA)
Port of 01scharge
{Rollerdam, Holland)
Port of LM:l,ng
----------
Con�nee
(Dlluelrlod. Gefmany)
JNe1rark, USA)
figure 67: Routing. Scheduling And Carrier Selection
The graphic Routing. Scheduling and Carrier Selection outlines this process in the following way: a
freight unit Xis first routed using the transportation planning function. for example, a
transportation proposal. Based on this routing, three stages are created for freight unit X, as
follows:
•
A stage for US road pick-up transport
•
A stage for the ocean voyage
•
A stage for EU road delivery transport
Up to a certain point, these stages are planned independently of each other because different
(local) planners may be responsible for scheduling each of the three stages. A freight order is
created as a result of this stage. Finally. carriers are selected based on specific criteria. This is
described as a three-step process but a planner can decide whether to perform planning and
carrier selection in two steps or three. It is also possible for the SAP TM optimization function to
plan all three steps in one run - this planning strategy is called one step optimization.
Process Steps
The steps involved in the process. whether one, two or three step can be described as follows:
•
Three step
1. Determine routing (transportation proposal)
2. Vehicle scheduling and routing to create a freight order
3. Carrier selection
•
164
Twostep
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Defining the Transportation Planning Process
1. Vehicle scheduling and routing to create a freight order
2. Carrier selection
•
One step
One-step optimization determines the route and plan, creates a freight order and selects a
earner
Manual and Automatic Transportation Planning
Manual: Drag & Drop, Assignment via buttons
Manual: Mouseless planning (command line)
Manual: Planning in the map
Automatic: Transportation Proposal
Automatic: Optimizer (various selection options)
Planning strategies
Transportation planning cockpit: One UI for manual (routing)
planning, carrier selection, delivery creation, tendering start
F ,gure 68: Manual And Automatic Transportabon Planning
Transportation planning activities in SAP TM can be performed manually and automatically as
well as interactively and in the background. For interactive planning. the central planning UI is the
transportation cockpit. Both manual and automatic planning activities are performed there based
on planning strategies (for example. one·step optimization).
Transportation Planning Document Structure
Planning relies on three distinct pillars. as follows:
•
Master Data
Master data objects such as the transportation network (locations. transshipment hierarchies.
transportation zones and transportation zone hierarchies and transportation lanes) and
resources are the basis for any planning activities in SAP TM.
•
Selection Settings
Selection settings specify what should be planned in a certain scenario. For example, selection
settings specify the geography for which a transportation plan shall be created. This could be.
for example. all freight units to be transported within California.
•
Planning Settings
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
165
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Planning settings specify the "how" of the process. For example. a planner may only be
allowed to schedule standard trucks and not a helicopter for emergency transports. This
information dictates how the actual transportation is to be carried out. Which resources can
be used and at what cost is specified in the planning settings.
Planning Profile
• Planning strategy
• Planning horizon
Capacity Selection
• Vehicles, trailers
• Freight bookings
• Schedules
Planning Cost Settings
• Penalty costs
Optimizer Settings
• Proposal settings
Transportation Network I Geography
• Transportation zones
• Transportation lanes
• Transshipment locations
Resources
• Means of transport
• Vehicles, vehicle combinations
• Schedules
Constraints
• Operating times
• Handling Resources
Geographical Selection
• Using any attribute of the locations
or zones for the selection of
transportation requirements
• Considering partially-planned
transportation requirements (freight
units)
Time-Related Selection Attributes
• Pick-up and delivery time windows
Additional Selection
• Additional selection attributes
Additional flexible filters
• Runtime
• Maximum number of
transshipment locations
Incompatibilities
Figure 69: Relevant Objects And Settings For Planning
166
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 10
Discuss the Transportation Planning Process
Business Example
You are required to deliver a presentation to colleagues on the transportation planning process,
paying particular attention to rationale. and document structure.
1. What are the three pillars of planning preparation?
2. Which business documents are input for transportation planning?
3. List some steps that can be executed during transportation planning in SAP TM.
4. List some options for manual planning in SAP TM.
5. List some options for automatic planning in SAP TM.
6. Which business documents can be created as a result of transportation planning?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
167
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
7. Outline a scenario in which a short-cut planning process may be employed?
168
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Solution 10
Discuss the Transportation Planning Process
Business Example
You are required to deliver a presentation to colleagues on the transportation planning process,
paying particular attention to rationale. and document structure.
1. What are the three pillars of planning preparation?
The pillars of planning are master data. selection settings and planning settings. Master data
refers to such things as transportation zones. hierarchies and lanes. Selection settings aid
efficiency by narrowing the focus of any planning activity. Planning settings specify the details
of how a transportation activity is to be carried out.
2. Which business documents are input for transportation planning?
Frei ht units
3. List some steps that can be executed during transportation planning in SAP TM.
Routing, Scheduling, Means of Transport Selection. Carrier Selection
4. List some options for manual planning in SAP TM.
Drag and Drop. Assignment via Buttons. Map-Based Planning, Mouseless Planning via
Command Line
5. List some options for automatic planning in SAP TM.
Optimizer Planning (VSR). Transportation Proposal
6. Which business documents can be created as a result of transportation planning?
Freight Orders. Freight Bookings
7. Outline a scenario in which a short-cut planning process may be employed?
Shortcuts may be employed where some or all planning activities are not required due to the
information being already available. For example, a sales order that includes details on the
required truck size means that planning is not required in relation to vehicle size.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
169
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
170
Describe the business process and documentation required for transportation planning
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Lesson 2
Viewing a Freight Unit
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson will explain the role of the freight units and how they are created out of transportation
requirements such as forwarding orders or order-based/delivery-based transportation
requirements.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
View a freight unit
Freight Units in Planning
I
I
Figure 70: Document Flow - F reighl Unit Building
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
171
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
The figure Document Flow - Freight Unit Building shows where the activities outlined in this
lesson occur in the overall document flow.
Purpose of Freight Units
Freight Unit 1
Sales Order I
Order-Based TRQ
Ship-to party
Item
CUST00-16
Material
Quantity/Date
Item 10 PROD01
Schedule line 1
Dest. Loe. CUST00-16
Delivery Nov 01
Item 10 PROD01 20 PC
Item 20 PROD02 20 PC
20 PC
Nov 01
20 PC
Freight Unit 2
50 PC
Item 20 PROD02
Schedule line 1
Nov 01
Dest. Loe. CUST00-16
Delivery Jan 01
20 PC
Schedule line 2 Jan 01 30 PC
Item 10 PROD02 30 PC
Figure 71: Purpose Of Freight Units
A sales order originating in SAP ERP will usually comprise a number of different items with
different schedule lines. This may be because the customer requires the goods at different points
in time. or because of some other specific issue of compatibility or timing. For example, let's
assume a retailer orders ice-cream and milk in bulk quantities from its supplying dairy. Because
of different temperature requirements these cannot be shipped in the same truck. Furthermore.
if the quantities (by schedule line) exceed a truck capacity. the schedule lines may need to be
split because of capacity considerations as well.
172
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Viewing a Freight Unit
Freight Units
Freight units are:
•
A set of goods that can be transported together
•
Used to merge items that can be transported together
•
The smallest unit of freight
•
Used in the planning of freight
•
F ,gure 72: F reignt Units
A freight unit is an object in SAP TM that groups items that are transported together. Freight
units can be created per item and schedule line. but freight units can also group (consolidate)
different items if these have similar characteristics with respect to their transportation options.
The same applies to forwarding orders and delivery-based transportation requirements (DTRs).
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
173
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Creating Freight Units
FU
Sales
Order(s)
FU
Order
Based
Automatically
Transport
Req.
Figure 73: Fre1ghl Unit Creation
The most convenient way of creating freight units is to create them automatically. based on their
predecessor document (FWO. OTR. DTR). Freight units can also be created using a background
report. and the creation of freight units can be manually triggered from worklists. If it arises
during planning that a freight unit has to be adapted (split or merged. for example). this can be
done manually in the transportation cockpit.
Freight Units in Planning
As a result of integration with SAP ERP (or another enterprise resource planning system), one or
more freight units are generated for each transportation requirement being planned in SAP TM. A
freight unit may therefore be described as a collection of goods that are transported together
across the entire transportation chain. A freight unit can include several stages. which are
referenced during transportation planning. A freight unit can be used to merge items from the
following business documents that are to be transported together· FWO. OTR. DTR.
Freight units are built on the foundation provided by business document data and freight unit
building rules. The most important settings for the freight unit are defined in the freight unit type.
The freight unit type allows for settings to be applied in the following areas:
174
•
Customizing options
•
Controller maintenance
•
Checks in relation to creating. saving and deleting
•
Tracking settings
•
Organizational unit determination
•
Direct shipment process
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Viewing a Freight Unit
•
Default values
•
Pick-up and delivery window calculation
Freight unit type determination is based on freight unit building rules applied in the creation of
freight units and on specified conditions.
Freight Unit Building Rules
Transportation Requirement
FWO I OTR I DTR)
Freight Unit
Freight Unit
Freight Unit
Freight Unit Building Rule NA DOM FUBR ORPOO
•
Gene111I Data
Mll1!lC<fd&"::I�
M�Dm
,-�U,ol��
--o...f�
OCtlff $1tt,ngs
•
Consolidate ...
• per Item
• per Request
• as Much as Possible
llof!S-....,.,�klll*')
°""'"�"
-Sc*-..,
Planning QuandtlH
..........
F ,gure 74: Frerght Unit Building Rule
A freight unit building rule (FUBR) is used in the automatic creation of a freight unit based on one
or more transportation requirements. Freight unit building can use the following consolidation
strategies:
•
As much as possible
The items come from different business documents. for example. forwarding orders. The
system groups the items in freight units. In addition to forwarding orders. other possible
business documents are order·based transportation requirements. and delivery-based
transportation requirements.
•
Per request
The system generates freight units separately per business document.
•
Per item
The system generates freight units separately per business document item.
Freight Unit Building
If necessary companies can define that the freight units are split if certain constraints are
present. For example, you define the maximum capacity of a freight unit using the split quantity.
Let's say you have to transport 5 tons of cement. but you can only transport it in batches of 500
kg. In this case. you define a split quantity of 500 kg. and the system generates 10 freight units.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
175
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Note:
Using the process controller. freight unit building can be adjusted to customerspecific requirements using ABAP coding.
Based on the definition of freight units. all items included in a freight order are transported
together from their source to their final destination. However. in multi-modal scenarios. different
planners may be involved in scheduling the different stages of the transport. For this reason.
stage information can be added to the freight unit. This allows a degree of independence when
scheduling the stages.
176
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 11
View a Freight Unit
Business Example
As a manufacturer. you require a planning tool that will support your diverse requirements in
relation to shipping various products. You need to investigate how SAP TM builds and plans
freight units. as well as learning the necessary tools to support planning.
1. In NWBC, open one of the OTRs created in the unit 4 exercise Create a Sales Order.
2. Navigate to the Document Flow tab and locate the freight unit. Open it by clicking the number.
Has a freight order been created for the freight unit?
3. Which freight unit building rule was used to create the freight unit? Which freight unit type was
used?
© Copyright All rights reserved.
177
E"
Unit 5
Solution 11
View a Freight Unit
Business Example
As a manufacturer. you require a planning tool that will support your diverse requirements in
relation to shipping various products. You need to investigate how SAP TM builds and plans
freight units. as well as learning the necessary tools to support planning.
1. In NWBC. open one of the OTRs created in the unit 4 exercise Create a Sales Order.
a) If you are unsure of how to do this. review the steps in the Create a Sales Order exercise.
2. Navigate to the Document Flow tab and locate the freight unit. Open it by clicking the number.
Has a freight order been created for the freight unit?
a) No. a freight order has not yet been created. You can verify this in several ways. as follows:
•
In the Document Flow tab. there is no successor business document.
•
In the Stages tab. you can see that the Freight Document column for this freight unit is
not yet filled.
•
If you navigate to the Statuses tab. you can see that the planning status is Not
Planned.
3. Which freight unit building rule was used to create the freight unit? Which freight unit type was
used?
You find this information on the General Data tab of the freight unit. under Additional Data.
178
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Viewing a Freight Unit
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
View a freight unit
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
179
E"
Unit 5
Lesson 3
Building a Package
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, we look at package building.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe package building
Package Building
New rule-based package building
engine (SCMB)
• Builds product pallets and mixed
pallets (layered)
• Considers product master data
• Considers product to package &
equipment type assignment
• Considers package building
profile
Integrated into freight unit building
• Creates package items in freight
unit
• Can also create freight orders,
trailer units, railcar units,
container units
Figure 75· Package Build Overview
Orders are placed on products which. during the real process. are packaged to create packages
and pallets (HUs. TUs. main cargo items. and so on).
180
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Building a Package
Packaging is a warehouse process. Warehouse-specific information can influence the result (for
example. pick sequence). For the end-to-end process. the package information is required long
before the warehouse is reached.
The goal for SAP TM is to close the gap between orders based on products and the load planning
happening for packages and pallets. as well as to enable a package building function that
considers warehouse information. Therefore. readily available packaging components and
product master data packaging-specific definitions are reused.
Package Building in the SAP Transport Management (TM) Planning Process
Forwarding Order I Delivery-Based I OrderBased Trans�rtation Re9ulrement
Package building can be
Included here ...
Freight Unit Building
(Rule-Based)
Freight Units
--==:::::
..• to create package Items
In the freight units.
"l.
Transportation Planning
(Manual or Optimizer)
Freight Order I Trailer Unit I
Container Unit
--������- -������--
Respects weight and volume
constraints, but does not
determine physical positions
in truck I trailer I container.
Load Planning
(Rules-Based Optimizer)
Load Plan of Freight Order I
Trailer Unit I Container Unit
Determines physical
positions of load in truck I
trailer I container.
Figure 76: Package Building m the SAP TM Planning Process
Package building is inserted into the overall planning process at the freight unit building step. It
allows products to be combined into packages. These packages (within freight units) are later
used in subsequent planning steps (manual and optimizer planning (VSR) to create freight orders
and subsequent load planning).
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
181
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Package Building Selected Features
Layer Types
• Define number of product pieces
inside layer type
•-...._:;�
•
• Define number of layers in package
type
Package Types
• Consider different package types
(length, width, height, weight)
�
• Required package type and
allowed maximum height may
depend on product & customer
figure 77: Selected Features of Package Building
The product and package type assignment defines the target package type. One option is to set
the package material When doing so. the base unit of measure of the package. the dimensions.
and the weight are all considered. The second option is to set the package unit of measure. This
points directly to the product-alternative units of measure for the conversion rules. but no
package attributes are considered. When set in combination with the package material. it can
overrule the base unit of measure of this package. The third option is to set the definition of the
equipment group and type. In SAP TM. this enables the creation of container. trailer, or railcar
units. It does not affect the logic, but the package unit of measure must also be defined.
Furthermore. the definition allows specific limits to be set regarding the weight and height that
the package builder will consider when packing the product. It is possible to set generally valid
limits on the package material (that is, product master data). For example. you can only stack a
EU pallet up to 1.8 meters and put 900 kg on it. In the product and package type assignment. you
can lower the specific product. customer. and location limits.
182
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Building a Package
Package Building Logic
Mixed Package Building (phase 2)
Product Package Building (phase 1)
Product Pallets
Full
Mixed Pallets
Full
Incomplete
Incomplete
110pilal
\
130 pieces Product A
,
,
10 pieces
10piects
10plem
J
70 pieces Product B
13 pieces Product C
Result: 7 pallets
Result: 6 pallets
Figure 78: Logic of Package Building
Step 1
Full package building.
Step 2
Mixed package building takes the incomplete product pallets as input and combines them into
mixed pallets. in order to minimize the total number of pallets.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Describe package building
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
183
E"
Unit 5
Lesson 4
Defining a Selection Profile
LESSON OVERVIEW
Your SAP TM system is full of data. In order to maintain a workspace that is not overloaded and
yet provides easy access to necessary information. you need a way of selecting what it is you
want to work on using specific criteria. Selection profiles are the way you achieve this. helping to
provide a clear and relevant workspace.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Define the requirements for a selection profile
•
Display a selection profile
Selection Profile
Selection Profile
: 'o" ·.
•
•
•
•
•
Figure 79: Selection Profiles
Selection profiles define what is called up for planning in the transportation cockpit.
Selection Objects
Selections can be made on a number of objects. including those outlined in the following list.
184
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Defining a Selection Profile
•
Freight Units
•
Transportation Units
•
Freight Orders
•
Freight Bookings
To group requirements and objects according to different criteria. the selection profile is used to
specify which requirements and selections are needed in a given planning scenario.
Requirement selection is the selection of freight units and transportation units. Freight order
selection is the selection of freight orders and freight bookings.
Selection attributes include geographical selection (using any location or zone attribute), and
time-related selection attributes. such as pickup and delivery windows.
Additional selection attributes can be taken into account - such as planned or unplanned
transportation requirements. An example of an additional selection attribute might be the nature
of the product being selected. such as freight unit type or dangerous goods. Flexible filters can be
used in the selection process.
Geographical Selection Attributes
In a company's planning department. geography is often used as a way to allocate planning
responsibility. For example. an individual or team might be responsible for a specific plant.
distribution center or group of customers in a geographical area. The geographical selection
attributes in the selection profile allow the team to limit their view in such a way that they only see
FUs or FOs for which they have responsibility.
The selection profile can be set up to include or exclude certain shipping/receiving facilities. It
can also be used to include or exclude certain customers.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Define the requirements for a selection profile
•
Display a selection profile
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
185
E"
Unit 5
Lesson 5
Determining a Planning Profile
LESSON OVERVIEW
Planning profiles control how the planning process is carried out. whether planning manually or
using the optimizer. A planning profile must be specified for an optimizer run. which then
considers this profile as it runs through its process. In effect. the settings in the planning profile
control different steps of the optimization process. While the selection profile controls the What
for optimization. the planning profile controls the How.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe the parameters used to support planning in SAP TM
•
Display a planning profile
Planning Profiles
Planning profiles are used to influence and control the outcome of the optimizer. A planning
profile must be specified for an optimizer run and takes into account the various settings set up
for the profile. These settings control different steps of the optimization process. There are
several sub-profiles which must be created for use in the planning profile.
The planning profile includes settings to control the different steps of the optimization. These
steps are controlled by strategies set up in Customizing. Standard strategies are delivered by
SAP - but unique strategies can be created. The strategies are made up of various programs. If
you wish to perform manual planning or a scheduled planning run. there is a standard strategy for
each. You also specify in the planning profile which type of checks will take place in relation to
incompatibilities. dangerous goods. and so on.
186
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining a Planning Profile
Optimizer Settings
"
Capacity
Selection
Settings
Optimizer
Settings
Load Planning
Settings
Planning Cost
Settings
lncompatibilty
Settings
Carrier
Selection
Settings
Optimizer/Algorithm Control Settings (e.g. Runtime)
Planning Strategy
Transportation Proposal Settings
F ,gure 80: Optirmzer Profile
•
Optimizer Runtime
The number of seconds the optimizer runs.
•
Maximum Duration without Improvement
This sets the number of seconds that will cause the optimizer to stop if there is no
improvement within that timeframe
,
Planning Strategy
The planning strategy defines how the optimization takes place. SAP delivers standard
strategies and customers can also set up their own strategies.
•
Maximum Number of Transshipment Locations
This should be kept to a minimum to maximize performance.
•
Transportation Proposal Settings
These control how the batch run processes the result of the transportation proposal. Save
Route Only - Specifies that only the routing is copied to the freight unit as stages. Plan dates
and MTrs are copied to the freight unit as well.
•
Planning Strategy for Trans.Proposal
It is possible to specify a separate planning strategy that can be used for the transportation
proposal
,
Number of Transportation Proposals
The number of proposals that will be determined during the transportation proposal run.
Penalty costs for early/late pickup and delivery can be specified at planning profile level or. in
a more granular form. using a condition. The condition is specified in the freight unit type.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
187
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Cost Profiles
Capacity
Selection
Setton gs
Optimizer
Settings
Load Planning
Settings
Planning Cost
Settings
lncompatibilty
Settings
Carrier
Selection
Settings
- Non Delivery Cost
- Earliness & Lateness Cost
- Means of Transport Specific Cost
- Cost Function
Figure 81: Cost Profiles
The cost profile is one of the sub-profiles used for planning. This profile contains input for the
optimization cost. The costs are internal costs and are not related to a particular currency. The
following settings can be made:
•
Non-delivery cost: This is a mandatory entry. The algorithm used in the optimization takes
non-delivery into account. If there are no costs for non-delivery, the system will deliver
nothing. since this is the cheapest solution. Therefore. a cost setting for non-delivery must be
maintained.
•
Earliness and lateness cost: Sometimes. it is more cost-effective to deliver early or late. if this
means the route/trip can be completed. This setting controls the period for early or late
pickup and delivery.
•
MTr-specific cost: This setting controls the cost in relation to means of transport. and a breakeven calculation can be made to determine the means of transport used. For instance. for very
heavy goods in large volumes, rail is cheaper than road.
•
Cost function: With this function. you can maintain the minimum loading capacity and
optimization cost of less utilization.
Further Settings
Further settings in relation to capacity selection, incompatibilities and carrier selection help to
bring sharper focus to any planning run.
•
Capacity Selection Attributes
In the capacity selection setting, you prescribe the resource capacity that should be
considered during planning. If, for example, you have created resources for both Full
Truckload (FTL) and Less than Truckload (LTL). you can specify both types of resources.
188
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Determining a Planning Profile
These resources can be both active and passive - for example. tractor and trailer. As well as
vehicle resources. schedules can be selected and used as capacities during transportation
planning.
•
Incompatibility Settings
You define the incompatibilities that planning should take into account during a planning run.
For example. if you are shipping a material that is a liquid. you can create an incompatibility so
that dry van trailer resources are not taken into account during planning.
,
Carrier Selection Settings
You can choose to have carrier selection completed during the planning run. Or, you can run a
separate optimization for automatic carrier selection. The carrier selection can be influenced
by incompatibilities. allocations and continuous move opportunities.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the parameters used to support planning in SAP TM
,
Display a planning profile
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
189
E"
Unit 5
Lesson 6
Accessing the Transportation Cockpit
LESSON OVERVIEW
Companies responsible for shipping large volumes of products require a tool that allows planners
to get a high level perspective of their transportation demands while allowing planning activities
to be carried out in a quick and targeted manner. In this lesson, you learn about SAP TM's
transportation cockpit. a central element in the transportation planning process.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Access the transportation cockpit
Interactive Planning
Business Example
John is a logistics coordinator at a shipping company. and needs software that will manage his
company's shipments. He needs the ability to view all of his customer's domestic and
international export orders. and consolidate them to ship as efficiently as possible. To accomplish
this, he needs an easily managed dashboard from which he can plan his orders. For some
shipments. John is using automatic planning. but he still needs to verify the result of the
optimizations. For other shipments. he needs to manually plan the transport requirements.
Depending on the scenario, therefore. he requires different information and different functions to
be available at different times. The specific and differentiated presentation of information
possible in SAP TM allows him to plan efficiently.
190
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Accessing the Transportation Cockpit
Freight
' oking
Freight 36
Order
Frei!
1235
OrdE
1234_,___.
Freight Orders I
Freight Bookings
Freight Units
- :f
Capacities (Resources, Schedules)
Visualization I Maps
Figure 82: Transportation Cockpit
The transportation cockpit can be used for optimized planning with or without user-selected
entries in the foreground. We call this system "supported planning". where the system prepares
a proposed plan based on the planners' selections. Amongst others, the transportation cockpit
includes the following elements:
•
Requirements list (freight units)
•
Capacity lists (vehicle resources and schedules)
•
Order list (freight orders, but may also contain freight bookings as transactional or agreed
capacities)
•
Order details
Tasks in the Transportation Cockpit
The transportation cockpit is a central element in the transportation planning process. and
facilitates numerous tasks.
The transportation cockpit can be used for the following tasks:
Transportation Cockpit Tasks
•
Manual planning
•
Creation of transportation proposals
•
VSR optimization
•
Load planning
•
Carrier selection
•
Triggering of a tendering process
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
191
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
•
Creation of delivery proposals
•
Creation of freight bookings
Profile and Layout Sets
1,
T'rartSP!'!!!_ation cockpk: Profl#t! and Layout sets
..,� J
�-
Sl.wt�n�
I r- ••
I
I
I
Selklbtll'ldt(l'Ut) ISMdlrlfll\-oflt(TUI)
I
[
...,.,.......
f,..m.A>oll•
MJtJAlticl.$1
Kl_<SO...,'U.
__ -
,._--i,;10
View,
1��(1"0t)
OOt«N.$8..0t
IS(Wlws«MO_.lil l(f_$U..,'U.
· --
S..,C.,hodit (f91)
l(f..,'J8,JU
._
e,
Oc)J.(#.$fL,Ot
l(f_CN'AJS.
The profiles allow control on a very granular level:
• Selection Profile: What is to be planned
• Planning Profile: How is it to be planned
Typically, profiles are set up by planning scenario, for example:
•
•
•
Plan main leg for time-critical requirements from Europe to US
Plan all LTL from plant to Nordic countries
Plan on-carriage from distribution center to customers using their own fleet
The layout defines which Information Is visible and how it is arranged
. ·...
Figure 83: Transportation Cockpit: Proftie and Layout Sets
The cockpit requires users to enter several profiles that govern the content of generated result
lists. The selection profile determines what is to be planned. That is. what freight units or freight
orders are pertinent for a particular objective. The planning profile determines how the selected
freight units are planned The capacity selection profile restricts the planning run in relation to the
transportation resources that can be used.
Once the profiles have been determined. planners can use the cockpit to create freight bookings
or manage existing freight orders. The transportation cockpit layout offers flexible settings to
control what information is presented and the processing options available A combination of
selection and planning profile together with a layout can be assigned to a profile and layout set.
such that this specific planning scenario is always shown in this layout while another planning
scenario requires another layout Such a profile and layout set is based on the specific
information requirements of a planner. For example. in one scenario a planner has to plan liquids
on tank trucks and must be able to see the volume of product. while in another scenario the
liquids are in barrels on pallets and the planner requires the pallet count to be displayed. It is
possible to switch between different layouts on-the-fly, for example. if a multi-step planning
process leads to different needs in each step.
192
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Accessing the Transportation Cockpit
Transportation Cockpit: Standard Layout
Example Process: Transportation Planning
����-+e-����•·c--���-+e-����•""'--���-+<
•
••
Order
Processing
Freight Unit
(FU) Creation
Freight
Planning
Freight
Order Creation
Example UI: Transportation Planning Cockpit
Freight Units
Delivery
Prop�al
Link for Subcontracting
/t Carrier selection options:
�-==----:....::
�•
:=::-:-_-z
- �-=-: - ;;
E
-. -�..
Building strategies:
• Freight consolidation I spli
• Maxin:i\Jm transportation
quantities
• Compatibility
Tendering
Vehicle Resources/
Schedules
Variants:
• Road, rail, ocean, air
• Truck load
• Less than truck load
.. ·:-·--::_::- .._ .,,_ -"-
-:- :
'
-=-
=
f':!-- ";"�
--..- �-�---.. -
Map Integration
Graphical routing
e-
Cost, priority, lane
Business share
Freight Orders
Planning constraints:
• Requested delivery date /times
• Time windows
• Trip & un/loading durations
• Transport schedules
• Vehicle availability & capacities
• Incompatibilities
Handling resources
• Costs (load, penalty)
•
Figure 84: Transportation Cockpit Standard Layout
In the standard layout the main screen is broken up into four quadrants (views). The maximum
number of views in any layout is 6. The standard layout contains the following views:
•
Freight units to be planned
•
Available capacities that can be used for planning
•
Freight order I booking list
•
Freight order I booking details
Each view is equipped with processing options using menus and buttons within the views.
Processing options include the following actions:
•
Merge I split freight units
•
Remove resources from freight orders
•
Cancel freight orders
•
Schedule and check freight orders
Each of the available menus or buttons can be personalized in the planning layout definition.
Planning from the Cockpit
Automatic Planning
Both manual and automatic planning are provided for in the cockpit. In relation to automatic
planning, transportation proposals can be generated automatically and the optimizer allows
planners to plan requirements onto resources and freight bookings or orders. Optimizer planning
also creates detailed log information that can be analyzed using the explanation tool.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
193
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Manual Planning
The following options exist for manual planning:
194
•
Drag a freight unit onto a resource. thereby creating a new freight order Add resources/MT rs.
•
Drag a freight unit onto a freight booking, thereby adding the freight unit to this freight
booking.
•
Drag a freight unit onto a freight order. thereby extending the freight order.
•
Command line planning and buttons provide additional options on top of the drag and drop
functionality.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 12
Access the Transportation Cockpit
Business Example
John is an SAP transportation consultant working with his client ABC company. John is assisting
ABC company in the implementation of the SAP TM system. ABC Company will be using the SAP
TM optimization process and has requested that John explain the use of the transportation
cockpit.
1. Using NWBC. navigate to the transportation cockpit.
2. Create your own profile and layout set. For Selection Profile. enter FU_SEL_TMlOO_##. For
Planning Profile, enter PLAN_TMlOO_##. Enter Standard Layout for both Transportation
Cockpit Layout and Layout for Planning Result screen. Enter PROF_##-My Profile as the
description. Select the checkbox to make this your default layout set and save your entries.
3. Choose Continue to enter the transportation cockpit main screen and make sure you are
using the new profile you have just created. If not, return to the profile selection screen,
choose the new profile and then choose Continue.
4. What data is visible in the transportation cockpit?
5. In the freight unit view. what is the planning status of your freight units?
6. Which vehicle resources are considered in planning for these freight units?
7. What is the maximum weight for these two capacities?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
195
E"
Unit 5
Solution 12
Access the Transportation Cockpit
Business Example
John is an SAP transportation consultant working with his client ABC company. John is assisting
ABC company in the implementation of the SAP TM system. ABC Company will be using the SAP
TM optimization process and has requested that John explain the use of the transportation
cockpit.
1. Using NWBC. navigate to the transportation cockpit.
a) In NWBC. choose Planning·> Planning-> Transportation Cockpit.
2. Create your own profile and layout set. For Selection Profile. enter FU_SEL_TMlOO_## For
Planning Profile. enter PLAN_TMlOO_##. Enter Standard Layout for both Transportation
Cockpit Layout and Layout for Planning Result screen. Enter PROF ##-My Profile as the
description. Select the checkbox to make this your default layout set and save your entries.
a) Verify that you are in the Transportation Cockpit: Profile and Layout Sets transaction. If
you are not. expand Change Profile Selection in the menu bar and then choose Profile
Selection Screen.
b) Choose [511/vew to create an empty line for a new entry.
c) Choose FU_SEL_TMlOO_## in the Selection Profile (FUs) column.
d) Choose PLAN_TMlOO_## in the Planning Profile column.
e) Choose standard Layout in the Transportation Cockpit Layout column and in the Layout
for Planning Result Screen column.
f) Enter PROF_##-My Profile in the Description field.
g) Select the Default Set checkbox.
h) Save your entries.
3. Choose Continue to enter the transportation cockpit main screen and make sure you are
using the new profile you have just created. If not. return to the profile selection screen.
choose the new profile and then choose Continue.
4. What data is visible in the transportation cockpit?
There are four views on the screen. as follows: Freight Unit Stages. Freight Orders/Freight
Bookings. Vehicles (that is. capacities · vehicles. trailers. schedules). Overview (that is, freight
order or freight booking details).
196
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Accessing the Transportation Cockpit
5. In the freight unit view. what is the planning status of your freight units?
The status of all freight units is Unplanned. You can tell the planning status by the icon in the
Planned column that indicates the status. Hover over the icon to see a text description of the
status.
6. Which vehicle resources are considered in planning for these freight units?
By looking at the Vehicles layout at the bottom left. you can see that resources (capacities)
US-FTL-01 and US-LTL-01 are considered in planning.
7. What is the maximum weight for these two capacities?
US-FTL-01 has a maximum weight capacity of 45,000 lbs. and US-LTL-01 has a maximum
capacity of 25.000 lbs.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
197
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
198
Access the transportation cockpit
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Lesson 7
Generating a Transportation Proposal
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson shows you how to generate a transportation proposal.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Generate a transportation proposal
Transportation Proposal
A transportation proposal defines how a freight unit can be transported through a transportation
network (which is defined by locations. transshipment locations, transportation zones,
transportation lanes. vehicle resources. schedules and bookings). For a given transportation
demand (freight unit), the system determines a set of alternative transportation proposals.
Transportation proposal functionality serves two purposes.
The first and most obvious purpose is to help the user identify the different transportation
options for a freight unit. In a complex network, in which end-to-end transportation requires
several stages. transportation proposals are an easy way to make the different options
transparent. Transportation proposals can differ in relation to routing, means of transport. time
required. Each of these variables can increase or reduce costs. and the proposals thus provide
the planner responsible with the necessary information to make an appropriate choice.
Secondly. transportation proposal functionality can be used from the forwarding order to create
the stages upfront. for example, to choose the option of ocean transport. because the customer
has placed his order well in advance and this is the cheapest choice. In this use case. no freight
orders are created based on the proposal result. but only the stage information is stored. This
allows the task of planning the different stages to be assigned to different planners and to be
completed at different times.
Figure 85: Visualization or Transportation Proposals
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
199
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Entry Points for Transportation Proposal Determination
Forwarding Order .... Stages ..... Actual Route
-+
Define Route
Transportation Cockpit-« Select Freight Unit(s)-+ Transportation Proposal
Layout of the Transportation Proposal Result
The layout of the transportation proposal result screen can be configured. similar to the
transportation cockpit layout. The results can be displayed in a table format or visualized on a
map. If the transportation proposal has been carried out for several freight units (because these
compete for the same capacity, for example). the solution is always for a valid combination of
assignments. In the table-based layout. each stage is shown in a separate line. In complex
networks. there could be millions of routing options for a given transport. with only minor
differences between them. Depending on the objective of the planner. results can be presented
according to defined criteria. as follows:
•
Lowest cost
•
Shortest duration
•
Carriers assigned
•
Departure days
•
Routes
..__ __ ·--- ,.________
--,
.
•·
--. .. ..
·-•.
-·-...,..
.
. -·- ••
----------..,..,.
-·
•
. . -..... . -----�
.··..........
.
.
·._ ... •••
-�·
. .____
..........
........ ••
·- -·-· -----.
.
.......
_
-·-.
··..-_......-·..-. ••••. . - - ·- -· �.......
-··-··
-·--··
••
-·
-·
-.......
-�·-·····.....-.............._..... ••••••.. - - -· --··
·····..-.......·-·-··��. •• - - -· -M------ _,,_--->-- �.-.----....... ··-·
··-.
...
-••
-·
-••
.
--- .
-·- --
,,,
,,
. .._.,.
�
.
. 'l-·�
• it.... ,..
...
-,� ,1-.,,,.. -..i- _,.,,,,,.,...,
•
•
�
•
•
•
•
•
-
.,
-M
-M
•
. 'l.......
••
•
•
•
#..........
.-
-M
Figure 86: Transportation Proposal User Interface
Features of the Transportation Proposal
The features of the transportation proposal are as follows:
200
•
Implicit definition of transshipment locations by schedules and freight bookings (simplified
definition of transportation network)
•
Mode of transport constraints on freight unit and freight unit stage level
•
Fast determination of transportation proposals. yielding more alternatives according to
predefined variation criteria (for example. route. carrier. departure date) and trade-off
between time and cost (controlled variation according to pre-defined criteria)
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Generating a Transportation Proposal
•
Consideration of preferences for locations. carrier. mode of transport, dates and times
•
Display of multiple solutions on the result map
•
Rough planning (detailed planning on the main leg and rough planning for pre leg and
subsequent leg, based on rough definition of transportation durations)
Rough Planning
Business Rationale:
Rough Planning
. For pre· ane on-carriages. rouon
planning is sufficienl
� neltnerlransportationlanesnor
ven1e1es or scneouies are requlreoror
pre- and on-carriages. thus reducing the
effon for master eatamalotenarce
·-
TfW4t«
""'-
8ttmen
FRA
6:00
Hamburg
FRA
7:30
Saxony
FRA
4:00
Bavaria
FRA
5:00
...
Figure 87: Rough Planning
For many business processes it is not important to plan complete end·to·end transportation in
detail. For example. it may be important to find the right flights. but it is known that the airport
can be reached within a predefined time interval and the planning for this stage of the journey
need not be planned with the same degree of precision. The assignment of transshipment
locations to transportation zones (entry or exit point into a transportation network) allows
planners to specify a duration that can be used for "rough planning". This means that a detailed
transportation network (transportation lanes. for example) is not required for the pre/on·
carnage.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
201
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
202
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 13
Generate a Transportation Proposal
Business Example
As a transportation planner. you need to be able to generate transportation proposals so that you
can make an informed choice on all transportation options available in any given instance.
1. Generate a transportation proposal using the set created in a previous exercise.
2. How many different transportation proposals were presented?
3. Choose the Expand All icon.
How many carriers have been proposed as possible carriers? What is the difference between
them and why have these carriers been proposed?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
203
E"
Unit 5
Solution 13
Generate a Transportation Proposal
Business Example
As a transportation planner. you need to be able to generate transportation proposals so that you
can make an informed choice on all transportation options available in any given instance.
1. Generate a transportation proposal using the set created in a previous exercise.
a) In NWBC, choose the Planning folder and then choose Planning-, Transportation Cockpit.
b) In the Profile and Layout Sets selection screen, choose the set that you created earlier and
then choose Continue.
c) In the transportation cockpit. locate the freight unit for the delivery to CUST00-28 that
you created in the Create a Sales Order exercise in Unit 4.
d) Highlight the row for this freight unit and. in the menu bar. choose Transportation
Proposals.
2. How many different transportation proposals were presented?
The system offers two options - one using US-FTL, the other using US-L TL.
3. Choose the Expand All icon.
How many carriers have been proposed as possible carriers? What is the difference between
them and why have these carriers been proposed?
(MTr) - two carriers have been proposed for each of the two MTrs. This leads to different
transportation durations between the two proposals. These carriers have been proposed
because of the transportation network setup. Customer CUST00-28 belongs to
transportation zone US-MOUNTAIN and in the transportation lane that runs between SP3100
(the source location) and US-MOUNTAIN. these two MTrs are defined.
a) Return to the transportation cockpit (Cancel).
Don't save the result.
204
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Generating a Transportation Proposal
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Generate a transportation proposal
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
205
E"
Unit 5
Lesson 8
Creating a Freight Order
LESSON OVERVIEW
The focus of this lesson is the creation of freight orders. whether this is done manually
(interactively) or automatically using the Vehicle Scheduling and Routing (VSR) optimizer.
Freight orders are a result of planning, and can have different properties based on their freight
order type.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe the freight order and freight order types required for shipping
•
Describe visual planning
Freight Order
Business Example
In his role as an SAP transportation consultant. John has been requested to explain the benefits
of freight orders and how they can get created using optimization criteria. John must describe the
principles of vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimization used in SAP TM as well as explain
the difference of freight units. transportation units and freight orders.
206
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
--.......
Planning
-
...
------------------------
Transportation
Network
-__------(_
_.,.,_
__ .
Freight Unit
Planning
.,
----.... .-'
Freight Order I
Freight Booking
Figure 88: Document Flow - Freight Order Creation
Freight orders represent a single shipment or load departing from one of your facilities (outbound
scenario) or arriving in one of your facilities (inbound scenario) The freight order can be created
manually or automatically, for example. by using the vehicle scheduling and route optimizer.
Freight orders are the basis for carrier selection. tendering, and freight settlement processes.
These topics are covered in separate units.
Note:
A freight booking can also be created as the result of transportation planning, similar
to a freight order. For the sake of simplicity. the term freight order is used in the
course book.
You can use the freight order management component in SAP TM to create and edit freight
orders and freight bookings. You use freight orders above all for land transportation and you use
freight bookings for sea and air transportation. You can use the business documents in freight
order management to enter all the information required for transportation planning and
execution. such as source and destination locations, dates/times. product information. and
resources used. You can create freight orders directly or in transportation planning. For example.
you can assign freight units to the freight orders and have the system calculate the transportation
charges. You can then perform carrier selection, assign the freight orders directly to a carrier as a
suborder or perform tendering.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
207
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Freight Orders in Transportation Planning
Freight
Order
FU 1
•
VSR
Freight
Order
FU_3�
•
��
·
FU 2
FU_3
Figure 89: Creating Freigl1t Orders
In a freight order. freight units from different transportation requests (OTR/DTR/FWO) can be
consolidated. The VSR optimizer aims at finding the lowest cost solution based on the freight
units to be planned. the transportation network (as defined in master data) and. for example. the
costs defined in the relevant planning profile. If freight orders are created during planning and
have the respective settings in the planning profile, the system determines the freight order type
according to the Customizing settings.
Transportation Units
The transportation unit (TU) is somewhere in between the freight unit and the freight order.
Several use cases for TUs are possible as a consolidation option.
208
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
Represents demand
+
+
Default route to define
stages
+
+
Provides capacity
+
+
Different quantities per
stage
+
+
Cargo management
+
+
+
Subcontracting
Figure 90: Transportation Unit, Freight Unit. Freight Order· Comparison
Freight Order Type
The freight order type determines how a freight order is processed in SAP TM. There are some
basic settings allowing for flexible customization options.
Stop Sequence Settings
Number Range Settings
Charges/Settlement Settings
/
Default Units of Measure
Execution Settings
,
Change Controller Settings
Subcontracting Settings
•
Carrier Selection Settings
•
Tendering Settings
\
Customs Settings
'
Dangerous Goods Settings
'
Document Creation Relevance
.............
'
-
I ii LJ .. •1..1;U 'UI
Additional Strategies
•
Service Definitions
I
Organizational Unit Det.
•
Default MTr Determination
,
Output Options
/
Change Tracking
Archiving Settings
Figure 9!: Freight Order Type Customizing
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
209
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Customizing Options
ff� Older T)P9S
ffllictit Omlk T-,pe
11IOO� l.,1Ml00 htJCtar FOT
�
,t__Defal.A l'fl)e
nDtf'al.A Type b ERP �t n�ation
e.m: SetfflQS
,.,,... ft'99 Sol1tttv,
•
Freqlt Odef C� Be SUboorltracted
R�lb�t1Ktn;I
Shtl>er�Oetem'Nbtln
�BasedO'IPredea!ssor 00:u_ •
rtne rcr Dr.tM'IO
� R.noe inteooa
.
t)¥N N.m"Af When SM"9 00
r.;,
0Fk Dco.tnMt WhM �
Q � ()def Can 98 Oelited
seo.ence r.,oe ofStcos
�o:ntrolEl SWi"IQS
Ocbut ChanQc Stmcq,
.
""""' .... .,.....
AO:lti:n,I S.rategle,S
'PU.CH.l.CO
I
Oe;,bon �.lleliJI'
Chat'Qe Sttateo, Deternwiauon <onct.
�itylob-n.Cadbon
Sh'e Sttateo,
ouurr..101_01
o..e ldEw"�(Oroto'I
1---
EIIEIOJtb'I Trade, Rele'r,
�
lr.t� Evont
·1
oefM SEna Lewi
��Con:I.
J
J
!,!)Pr� £,!8Q.ltlr;n lrio
Event �t Soettinos
�O;J)eet Type
§
SErw:e � Determii'lom't
�IOr\ Tt� Wfth &ternlE'vEr'll"9'1_ •
Oec:k COrdtiOn � b Exec"
"""""'
Oelltbon �f.lllQ'
Delal.A MTt Oete!TTW\Jtoi
;°,!;20_TO
,00
!
Qefd MTr for T)Pe
Ccnctiticn b Def MTr
l
I
I
Figure 92: Freight Order Type
Figure Freight Order Type shows a system view of some of the options related to customizing
freight order types.
Route Optimization
As the name suggests. the vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimizer considers routing. and
the sequence in which resources arrive at certain locations (as well as the scheduling of tasks
running in parallel). It evaluates potential changes to the routing and the effect such changes
would have on scheduling. helping to avoid the possibility of delayed deliveries and follow-on
costs.
Essentially, the goal of the optimizer is to assign freight units to vehicles/resources and
determine the route and sequence of freight units per vehicle/resource such that all constraints
are met and total costs are minimized. The optimizer achieves this goal by evolutionary local
search, a population-based meta-heuristic that borrows selection principles from evolutionary
algorithms and relies heavily on local optimization.
210
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
Transportation Planning
4
The optimizer creates a mathematical model out of a real world problem.
Figure 93: Mathematical Model
A more concrete example of the workings of the optimizer may be its handling of potential date
changes. which it handles by applying each date change to all freight units on the affected
vehicle/resource. or dependent freight units on any other resources. in order to derive the most
appropriate choice. This consideration of several aspects in parallel is repeated for other
variables such as transshipment locations. and is necessary to arrive at good plans or to make
improvements on existing plans.
Costs and Constraints
The total cost, which the optimizer is designed to minimize. is a weighted sum of the following
items:
,
Non-delivery/execution penalty (per FU)
,
Earliness and lateness penalty (per FU)
,
Fixed cost (per vehicle or tour)
,
Travel-dependent costs (per vehicle). for example. distance. duration. etc.
•
Load-dependent costs (per vehicle and tour)
,
Sustainability costs such as C02 emissions (from SAP TM 8.0 by BAdl)
Optimizer Constraints
The optimizer can consider various additional constraints. as follows:
•
At some locations. a handling resource for loading or unloading may be necessary. with
attendant breaks or delays.
•
The transshipment time of an order at a specific location can be restricted by a minimum and
maximum duration.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
211
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
•
There may be incompatibilities between orders. vehicles. (transshipment) locations, and so
on. which need to be considered.
•
Driving times of vehicles may be restricted. For example, a planner can define that after 8
hours of travel. a driver needs a 2-hours break and that 10 hours is the maximum daily
traveling time.
Optimizer Constraints
\
r
figure 94: Optimizer Constraints
212
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Exercise 14
Create a Freight Order
Business Example
As a transportation planner. you need to understand the principles of VSR optimization. and how
to create a freight order based on outbound or inbound transportation requirements.
1. Enter the transportation cockpit with the profile and layout set that you created in the Access
the Transportation Cockpit exercise. Create freight orders from SP3100 to customers
CUST00_25. CUST00_26 and CUST00_28 using the optimizer.
2. How many freight orders have been created?
3. What is the maximum utilization of the truck?
4. How long does it take to load and unload the truck at each location? Do you know why?
5. Which freight order type is used? Do you know why?
6. In the freight order. review the means of transport. the vehicle resource. the distance.
duration and the number of visits/stops.
7. Review the freight order's document flow
8. Make a note of your freight order number.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
213
E"
Unit 5
Solution 14
Create a Freight Order
Business Example
As a transportation planner. you need to understand the principles of VSR optimization. and how
to create a freight order based on outbound or inbound transportation requirements.
L Enter the transportation cockpit with the profile and layout set that you created in the Access
the Transportation Cockpit exercise. Create freight orders from SP3100 to customers
CUST00_25. CUST00_26 and CUST00_28 using the optimizer.
a) In NWBC. choose the Planning folder and then choose Planning ..... Transportation Cockpit.
Hint: if the transportation cockpit opens directly, you may have to navigate back to the
Layout and Profile Sets selection screen.
b) Select the profile and layout set that you created in the Access the Transportation Cockpit
exercise and choose Continue.
c) Select the three freight units to customers CUST00_25. CUST00_26 and CUST00_28.
Expand the Optimizer Planning dropdown and choose Selected Entries with All Resources.
d) Upon completion of the optimizer. choose Accept and then Save.
2. How many freight orders have been created?
One freight order has been created.
3. What is the maximum utilization of the truck?
80°/o. Highlight the freight order in the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings view. In the detail view
underneath(Overview tab). you can see that the maximum utilization of the truck is 80%.
4. How long does it take to load and unload the truck at each location? Do you know why?
Highlight the freight order in the Freight Orders/Freight Bookings view. In the detail view
(Overview tab). you can see that each loading and unloading activity takes 10 minutes per
freight unit. Hint: Scroll to the right to compare the start and end times of the activities. In
planning profile PLAN TMlOO ##, it has been defined that the loading and unloading times
are independent of freight unit and means of transport. and that they take ten minutes. To
view this. choose Application Administration ..... Planning ..... Planning Profiles ..... Display
Planning Profile.
214
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
5. Which freight order type is used? Do you know why?
Click the freight order ID to open your freight order. In the General Data tab. under General
Information. you can see the document type is FO##. This is because the "Default type for
Road FO" has been defined as FO## in your planning profile.
6. In the freight order. review the means of transport. the vehicle resource. the distance.
duration and the number of visits/stops.
a) You can find all listed information on the General Data tab.
7. Review the freight order's document flow.
a) Navigate to the Document Flow tab. Sales orders. order-based transportation
requirements and freight units are listed as predecessor documents.
8. Make a note of your freight order number.
_
a) FO Number:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
215
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Visual Planning
SAP Visual Business is used by several key functions
• Transportation cockpit: Overview UI and fullscreen map
.-.
• Master data: Transportation network cockpit
--
�-
....�.;-::--.
--
-I'-�
..
�--·
··-:.... ..:;.'
,;.,-
__,.__
........
_
"7::.- ...- -· .,.
. -···
----·
--·--
·:::-:.
--
·!;:t,,.-,....:..-
,::::<'
� ...._.....,_
•
1
..
.
Figure 95: Transportation Cockpit: SAP Visual Business
SAP Visual Business is a UI technology, which visualizes data in the context of a map. It provides
interactive capabilities and an easy to understand visualization of SAP business data with
geographical information - locations, routes, transportation resources, and so on. It helps
planners to gain a fast understanding of the actual business situation, and allows them to
respond to situations by direct interaction with objects on the map. For example. it is possible to
plan unplanned freight units. displayed as a red arrow on the map. from the context menu (right
mouse click).
216
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
Transportation Network Cockpit
Transpc11atlon Networ1< Cockpit
Oe«MICI
Ollrdl¥tllO!l!ld Sfw:isA,IT�•�
Cle;llllrtPdle
Mast.r Data Selection
"
,,..._
,------,
(
•
�
"
.
- -·-·-·-·-·- +", . ....
'
n,�.-onl.-.s
tti!:
•
Sctt!'6J!,s
l'ml'i'9
ODAR:IJ�
OJP'!
T,w� tocetiw
To lo:e:in
®t
I ......
... ·-.:;;,.'
' • \,
0...
� MM�
•
®T'huncllt&.y
,.
0"""",. 0
GtttftS.r \
1nd� •
0S-. Fat,
-¥11Wll..N
(ai.,�IP'f' Features
Ci:mldal IO loesm
�•tai,ay
r;/••
·
U1 Vogn
� Ar911i!i._,..
,.-,.... ®"':
0Tucson
.._
G.\
::31ates
0
©"·• ....
0�
jh,-�
\i,v
0,,
0s.nJ011
ij-,....o ••
0.......,,
t\\l
(!;)
Otd•tdii\ Ci t V � ''
®
AlluJII...,.
0
_
0
00.rv t
EIPHO
. "'®
�
k...
Display
• Locations
• Transshipment
locations
• Default routes
• Transportation zones
• Transportation lanes
• Schedules
w,
Ii!!
0
J•'*'•"'
,..
""
�
•
0N>M
•
Address search
Route display
Find related objects
Create locations and
zones
Pat h fin d er
Figure 96: Transportation Network Cockpit
You can use the transportation network cockpit to display the following master data of the
transportation network on a map:
•
Locations
•
Transshipment locations
•
Default routes
•
Transportation zones
•
Transportation lanes
•
Schedules
For the individual master data objects. you can determine other master data objects that have a
relationship to them. Select a master data object and then one of the search functions available in
the context menu. The system adds the master data objects determined to the map view.
Address Search
You can use the context menu of the map to start the address search and display the search
results on the map. The address search is based on the geocoding of the location. This allows you
to perform several address searches and display the search results simultaneously on the map.
You can use the context menu of the map to hide the search results individually or completely.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
217
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Route Display
You can use the context menu of a connection line to determine a route display along real street
routes (georoutes). This function is dependent on the geographical information system available
in the system. Alternatively. you can use the context menu of a resource to display the
connection lines of all freight orders assigned to this resource.
Path Finder
You can use this function to search for legs in your transportation network and take the following
into account in the process:
•
Locations
•
Transshipment locations
•
Transportation lanes
•
Schedules
•
Transportation zones
This enables you to easily determine whether a connection exists between two locations and,
therefore. whether you have correctly configured your master data.
Interactive Planning on the Map
---. -- --- --..-- ----·•
.
•
.. -
·-·.........
�
··......., ..,,_,
........... -
.
-
.
·....
��-.
•
• •
.........
'
0
.
0..-Wcloit
,
·-
•··-
.
•·
Features
• Assign freight units I freight orders to
resources
• Add intermediate location to freight
unit or freight order
• Proximity search
• Show related transshipment locations
r.
k:':�
,. ..�
�\AJ
�
I
}·-(
........
••
-�
.....
�
-
•••
�-
-\....:::.
- ·-
,/""'
�·-=·----
Options
• Drag and drop
• Context menu
figure 97: Interactive Planning on the Map
Interactive Planning on the Map
The map can be displayed as an own screen area in the transportation cockpit or in full screen.
However. having the map displayed in an own screen area of the transportation cockpit enables
218
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
the planner to directly see the selected freight units. freight orders/bookings, transportation
units and resources on the map.
Display Options
When you display the map. you can choose whether all of the planning objects or only selected
planning objects are to be displayed. Furthermore. you can select which planning objects are to
be displayed on the map, for example, just freight orders or just freight units, in a display profile.
You can call up the display profile with the toolbar.
Planning Functions
You can carry out your planning on the map. If, for example, you select unplanned freight units
and start planning from the context menu, the system shows the possible assignments of the
freight units to the resources. Select the assignments that you require.
You can also assign unplanned freight units or multirelations that contain unplanned freight units
to resources by using drag and drop. When you do so, you can either assign the freight units to
the resource or the resource to the freight units. You can use the proximity search in the context
menu to find unplanned freight units and transportation units that are within a specific radius of a
resource or a location.
If you want to split a stage that is displayed on the map. you can assign an unplanned freight unit
or multirelation to a location using drag and drop. Once you have selected the required planning
option. the system adds the selected location to the freight unit stage and updates the map
accordingly. This process also applies to freight orders. You can also display transshipment
locations that are not necessarily part of your planning activities. You display these locations by
choosing Show Related Transshipment Locations from the context menu.
If a freight order does not have a vehicle assigned to it. you can also assign the vehicle by using
drag and drop. To do so, you assign the freight order to a single vehicle resource or a multispot
that contains at least one vehicle resource or passive vehicle resource and select the relevant
planning option from the menu. You can use the proximity search in the context menu to find
available resources that are within a specific radius. You can also specify the exact position of a
resource at any time in the context menu of the map. The system displays all of your
transportation planning activities on the map. When you leave the display of the map, your
planning activities are also displayed in the table view of the transportation cockpit.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
219
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Gantt Chart: Display of Resources and Documents
�--
.....
Visibility
• Usage of trucks and trailers
• Load utilization of trucks and
•
................c............3 •.9 .. Iii w ,.;, � ... - -. t
trailers
•••
El•, ..,...,
DI """"'11.••
--·\
.
�
,,. ••
..� I 111 0 -.11oq1t• Downtimes and nonworking
.,,.�
11 c O ·-\llf
times
_,,
• Execution status and reported
I ". G.-.vi
times for freight orders, trailer
units and their activities
••.o.,u:oi
••o�•
• Notifications for overload, empty
lllt..Wt."'
movements, and time conflicts
•1:0,-.�� �w. nx���
••
WC ·ww,
.,;a
....
�
.
.
.
.,,
"°NY' - �
Usability & Flexibility
..
rEl•• •' 10 _..._,._
• Time zoom in and out
t-·
-·- ---.,..
••
• Aggregated and detailed view
11:4.wuvi
l.<Wstll...['� I
11,q -.A. �,.., � �
• Hierarchicalviews
IT.U..-.t� ec......\XI.I.)
�
IL.O..--,i v.:,v.,
11CUJflw� • i"°,UUI '""'!fl"' c"M en+ � '"'�
• Single and dual view (horizontal
UUJ� I
lt(;.,W,IJI�
- ......
and vertical)
I r.u......o UI.W,.•
fr
..·-·... . _
�-
·H·�·
·-- ·�· ...
..
•
. ...
)I
111)31
"""'" ·====
--�
�,
.t,().�U
IV(.Sl,1.W.
t;(.W..,V
',IQ,).J�
lm.wui �
uu..�
, ):::
•
·--
-
...·.
_
_
-·-�---,J-
a @.:;ams �-
Figure 98: Gantt Chart: Display of Resources and Documents
Gantt Chart
When performing transportation planning. a planner usually considers two main aspects:
availability of resources and utilization of the used resources. With the conventional use of the
transportation cockpit. the sequential order of freight orders using a particular resource and the
availability of a resource for a certain timeframe is not (graphically) shown. Using a Gantt chart.
which is often used in project planning as well. helps to visualize the availability of resources and
the sequential order of transports. The Gantt chart is fully integrated into the transportation
cockpit.
Transportation planning can now also be done using a Gantt chart. In the Gantt chart. freight
orders and vehicle resources are displayed as a time bar and planners can manually plan
transports by using drag and drop.
The Gantt chart provides a visual platform for performing transportation planning. With an
intuitive and graphical user interface. the Gantt chart enables you to perform transportation
planning visually, interactively. and more efficiently.
The Gantt chart is a screen area in the transportation cockpit. which can be enabled in a page
layout of the transportation cockpit. All standard functionalities. such as, positioning the Gantt
chart anywhere on the transportation cockpit as well as maximizing the screen area to full screen,
are available in a Gantt chat.
The Gantt chart displays planned and unplanned freight orders and resources in a time bar. It is
configurable: additional sets of information should be displayed next to the time bar. The time bar
itself shows the activities planned for the document and resource. Depending on the layout
chosen. the planner can use a single view. which only shows planned and unplanned freight
orders or resources exclusively or a dual view (as shown in the figure, Gantt Chart: Display of
Resources and Documents) that displays two entities next to each other. Similar to the dual view
220
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
in the transportation cockpit, the dual view can be configured vertically or horizontally. The
scrollbars of both screen areas can be synchronized.
A zoom bar on top of the screen area can zoom in and out to be able to see a more detailed view
of a day or week or a more general view of the year.
An important factor for transportation planning is the utilization of a vehicle. The utilization of the
vehicle can be displayed with the utilization view which can be enabled when needed. The
utilization view shows the utilization of the vehicle over time in a graph. The graph is displayed in a
detail line below the actual resource or document. In this case. the single-view is chosen. this
enables the user to see all the execution information within one screen. Multiple loading acts are
only displayed as one item in the Gantt chart. This keeps the chart clean and easy to understand.
Gantt Chart: Interactivity and Planning Scenarios
Interactivity
• Assign and schedule trucks and
trailers by drag and drop
-.. __
._
,__,,.,.._..,!_.�:
........-
• Re-sequencing by drag and drop
• Fix and unfix freight orders, trailer
units, and their activities
• Context menus and hyperlinks
Planning Scenarios
• Truck planning (freight orders and
truck resources)
• Truck and trailer planning (trailer
units and trailer resources)
• Re-planning based on events
from execution
3 •• ..-
�o
It
\,; M
4'
lilt
ill -
.._
"
,-.� ""·-
....,._-.,..
..-.�
Ill')*
·• 9'\.....»..lo'
""'.,,..
........IMll,.IO
......
.,..,....
•
••
.....-..0, ··-
,.....�,, W>,OIA
·-
·--�v __.,.
........-..
,..Mo
,.... _ .. >'f';o,,\
·•'11'1.-..-
·-·---· ··-
•>-
,..;...;.
1
,
, . ..w,-« ,.,-a
•
;-c·-r ·c
,-a"
-·----
�-
�·
_.. �£ .. ·-
.,., _. ........ _.-..
....c. . >·r
e·«
",·ct
"
-..,.... r ,·r..r ,:;..:...;.,
.
- -
.
- -
lflll'l-111> "'·""'
IW..JIWJll'-' 1'11>.WI.
·-
....71...:.t»
...�
,-.,W,V, ,..-
Figure 99: Gantt Chart: Interactivity and Planning Scenarios
The main benefit of this functionality is to have a good overview of the status of the trucks. Replanning can be simply done by drag and drop. Freight orders can be fixed or unfixed by just
clicking one button. Furthermore it is possible to navigate directly to the resources or trailer units.
The main focus is the planning of road transport. The truck and trailer planning can be done easily
from this new feature in the cockpit. When execution events make a change to the planning
necessary. this can be immediately done via this overview. Other mode of transports. such as air.
sea or rail, are currently not supported in this cockpit.
Interactive planning can be performed in the Gantt chart using drag and drop. Unplanned freight
orders can be assigned to resources. Likewise, resources can be assigned to freight orders. The
freight order is dropped on the time bar of the resource. If the freight order is not dropped at the
same date it was originally planned, the date where it was dropped is taken over into the freight
order. Scheduling is only performed when requested using the Scheduling button on top of the
Gantt chart. The dual-view can be selected, to have the unplanned freight orders displayed on top
and the available resources below. This enables the user to work with one window to plan freight
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
221
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
orders. The dual-view can either be displayed horizontally or vertically. The size of each area can
be changed by dragging with the mouse.
The Gantt chart enables the planning of unplanned freight orders by dragging on vehicle
resources as well as the creation of transportation units. When dragging and dropping the loading
activity of one freight order into the time bar of another freight order. both freight orders are
combined.
Overlap means that a resource has been planned multiple times and is therefore not executable.
for example, if a trailer is already planned and newly planned during the next step, an overlap is
caused. which is displayed a red line to the user.
Similar to the utilization view. an overlap view shows if several documents on a resource overlap.
This overlap can be overcome by scheduling the resource.
Gantt Chart: Interplay with Map
• Select objects in Gantt chart and show them on map
• Gantt chart and map integrate geographical and time perspective
Tran1portation Cockpit: JG Gantt
o.
J,
_....,_
_..
�
in
•
.,.,,S(lt •••
•
in"'""'"
in
(!QNltlll
«l fTlll»!�.w
•
•
..
..
..
---• __
-· -- -�- -- --· ... .... -·- -.,�-·......
.
,
•
'
o.-,...o..:_
....,�
11,0...,.
""'-""
r..t't.}l.tJi,CN
fa!O»I&
""·""
.........
l>'lf'I.W.M:;N
1110:rM
l)TOJIMf
•• JL�� Jl...
.__... ""
't: �,.,..,.°'°" ..._,,,.
- J(I\....
,...,_....
..............
.
.. .!L
..
• •oo�c.,111r
u.1nm•�ct1
• .GO,wc,,tO
13.tJ»ur,�eu
• a,00....-0.b'
I
..
-
,
nv,.nu::iur
T
_
•
•
,,....,,,,.
13.»:m� (!lt5.1XICET
-·�....�����������������-�
�
-�_"c "'��������������-'-' A
,.- ..·-. 1-'·--
,...,o.. ... -.............80: u
�
I
.-
!aii I. "" •
E •• • •D
1
At.
...
l*I(
.,.....
·-- ... -- ,-,-, ,....
R"
••
••
.....
"' ._ ,e s: ;;; ,-
t
CL
""
c....
.....
t1of"\j.. ,..,.. ,- II Gll""'rf
-
JI
•
Figure 100: Gantt Chart: Interplay with Map
Another feature is the integration with the map panel. A Gantt chart freight order can be selected
and it will automatically be displayed on the map. This provides the planner with a good overview
so that they can re-plan freight orders based on map input. For example. if the map shows that
two freight orders have the same destination. the planner can consolidate the freight into one
resource. if enough capacity is available for the resource.
222
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Creating a Freight Order
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the freight order and freight order types required for shipping
•
Describe visual planning
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
223
E"
Unit 5
Lesson 9
Optimizing a Load
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn about the possibilities for load optimization in SAP TM. Load optimization
allows a much finer view of how loads are put together than simply tare weight and volume. and
facilitates planning down to the level of item position within a trailer. stackability. and axle weight
distribution.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe load optimization
Load Optimization
.........
·=---,'
• Loading pallets into trucks,
trailers, containers
• Rules-based load
optimization,
considering:
• Dimensions
• Axle weight constraints
\.I-
-.:_ --- --- -------------, ••
-·.• - -·.......... -- ..•
. - ----· --- --u.. -- .... . .
... .·-- ··- --- ·....- . .
---·-
... -
•
__...
I .. -
• Stacking rules
• LIFO loading
• Etc.
• 3D visualization of load
plan
--.Dt --- .. - ---...
• ..
•.- ...._.....
·-----=-- ·-- .
.....,..
......
..
"'-""
..,...
. ..
...
·-.
-·
... - - '...
... . .. ..
...
...
_
.
·--·----.
.
.
·
-.. -···.. . ··-- _,,.,
-_,..
•. ·,,_
. ·- ..·-- .. ··-·
-·-.···.
--··
·
·- ... ·
····
·
·-·-· ·- . ------.
_ --
I
.._
··-
•
•
•
•
->-·
•
·-
Figure 101: Load Planning
Take the following business scenario: Katie is working in the road department of a Logistics
Service Provider (ABC Company). She plans hundreds of road freight orders on trucks every day.
Previously. the system has supported her by comparing the total weight and volume of the cargo
and the truck. However. in some cases. cargo has been left at the warehouse because to carry it
would contravene the guidelines of the truck (for example. axle weight distribution). Katie
requires system support that optimizes the load plan regarding weight. dimensions. stackability.
224
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Optimizing a Load
axle weight distribution. and further rules. This support would enable her to create a detailed load
plan that could then be used in the warehouse to guide the loading of the truck. The load planning
functionality of SAP TM provides this support.
Load Planning in the SAP TM Planning Process
Package building can be
included here ...
Forwarding Order I Delivery-Based I Order·
Based Trans�rtatlon Re ulrement
Freight Unit Building
(Rule-Based)
... to create package items
in the freight units.
Freight Units
Transportation Planning
(Manual or Optimizer)
Freight Order I Trailer Unit I
Container Unit
Respects weight and volume
constraints, but does not
determine physical positions
in truck I trailer I container.
Load Planning
(Rules-Based Optimizer)
Load Plan of Freight Order I
Trailer Unit I Container Unit
Determines physical
positions of load In truck I
trailer I container.
Figure 102: Load Planning in the SAP TM Planning Process
You can plan the loading space of box trucks. trailers. semi-trailers. and containers in the
transportation cockpit or directly in one of the following business documents:
•
Road freight order
•
Trailer unit
•
Container unit
Planning is carried out at the level of business document items.
When you plan a road freight order on a box truck. trailer, or semi-trailer. the system takes into
account capacity restrictions in terms of the height. width. length. and weight of the loading
space. The same capacity restrictions also apply to the planning of a trailer unit on a trailer or
semi-trailer. It also takes into account the maximum axle load of your box truck. Furthermore, in
the system you can add a split deck to your trailer or semi-trailer and consequently plan two
decks. When you plan a container unit on a container. the system also takes into account capacity
restrictions in terms of the height. width. and length of the loading space as well as the total
weight and the empty weight of the container. In both the transportation cockpit and in the freight
order. you can check the results of load planning as a 3D load plan or a table load plan in the form
of a list of business document items. In the 3D load plan, you can show or hide individual objects
as well as entire rows, columns. or stacks. The systems also provides you with information about
the current load distribution and utilization of the loading space.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
225
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Transportation Cockpit Load Plan
Transportation Cockpit: Torsten. Load Planning
(> l4(111$�$lltlrfl;,t-O,o61�o,,,�IH4KI
4>--------.
--.
.
.
--�
4)Ni> __,.. ..... ,,t-.i-�-�
•
Freight Orders
[)�.... .0
ti " o.e:u-.
• t!OOOl�
"' 0100�
I a. ,,ooo,s,m
•
tJ
...
".
..
11,n
•
-v..-
.,,.. ...
• ,�a
' -...
....
"
• ""' ""
•
0
CUT'(.
12
••
12 '12'.II)
n::
12 ,1.2013
23;!.
c
c
•
•
l).11 ::01,
». II 201')
....
tl11200
:>
...... ' ,. • . . ..
... c '• ..•=.,. "
...
c
<l,Jl<I
<I.JU
c
<1,)1•
'
.......... ' ........
,.,._
ce,...
" •'"-"
51.1� TO
0
�
�
�
'"-
..,
"•
•a ' • ,_,
•• •• ....,,,
·•
.....
•
w
•
",
•
..••
•
·•
....MO
n l'DII
·-· •• . . " " • ""'' • -�
'"""
,_,
•
•
•
•
IU/,K�
CUTCE..
•
....
....
..
.....
.
_
··........- ..= ' ""......
....
....
'
• •
•
•
•
.' ...........,,.
•
• '
• "'""
• ....,,
•
•
.......
��
>
Figure 103: Transportation Cockpit Load Plan
Note:
The load planning functionality is useful for LSPs and shippers alike.
When entering the transportation cockpit. you select the appropriate Planning and Selection
Profile. The example layout shown in the figure Transportation Cockpit Load Plan shows a list of
all selected freight orders in the top area. In the lower area. you can see the Load Plan tab.
Choosing this tab for a selected freight order shows a list with all main cargo items along with the
30 visualization of the vehicle. Only the main cargo items of a freight order are relevant for load
planning. so if you have a pallet where products are assigned as sub-items. those products are
not shown in the list. only the pallets. In the case of multi-items (the item type can be defined in
the freight order type). the level below the multi-item is used for load planning.
Clicking the Load Planning button (above the freight order list) runs the load planning
optimization. The load optimizer fits the cargo items onto the vehicle. taking their dimensions into
account and ensuring that no rules are broken.
Information about the planned load is displayed in the table to the left of the visualization image.
and includes information on the following points:
226
•
Position in which the item is loaded (loading sequence) on the truck
•
The stack row and level on which the item is loaded
•
Weight
•
Dimension
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Optimizing a Load
•
Non-stackable indicator
Using the load planner. the planner can see immediately how much space for further items is left
on the truck. If the planning of forwarding orders is carried out in the transportation cockpit. the
planner can now continue to load forwarding orders into the freight order and can then repeat the
load planning.
30 Visualization
Rotate the vehicle view
Hover over an item to see item info
Right-click to hide or unhide items
F 1gure 104: 30 1/isualizat,on
The visualization provides the planner with an enhanced overview of the loading of the truck. The
planner can rotate the view, hover the mouse over particular items to see more information about
the items. and they can hide or unhide special items to get a complete impression of the current
loading.
Load Planning
•
Optimizer ensures that freight order cargo fits onto a truck while taking dimensions. weight.
and further rules (e.g. reasonable load distribution) into account.
•
A rotatable 3D visual load planning result per freight order is generated.
•
Information on the exact position of each main cargo item is provided.
•
Manipulation of the visualization to view the details of the load plan is possible.
•
Load planning is available in the transportation cockpit and the freight order UI.
•
Definition and prioritization of load planning settings is possible.
•
Optimizer run data can be reviewed in the explanation tool.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
227
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Load Plan in Freight Order UI
Edit F,eight Otder with Subcontracting 6100005032
X�ne.i
Qs...
Q11119"<$tllt1Mi«�
I�
ooe,-o,ie
f;
[l_
�
an�,.
S..a.ll!,. SttlllmM.i•. '-��
CU�!"IS.
eu,r1T1�Cfctorl
C.t>Qt!Otw-t<"•
cargo
9.11
Cl!tdl,l.folowUo,.:S<:rltwliq.� su�uctno. Cr.a1ts-o,11t1
UIMt.allOtl
&.01101.11,111111"lleho
LQ,11d Planning
"' �·
......o
"
"
...
..,.
....
"
"'
•
•
•
•
•
•
••
•
•
•
..."
• - .. -·
• • • •
• • • •
It
4
•
• • • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4'�
figure 105: load Plan in Freight Order UI
The load planning tab is also available in the freight order UI. You can trigger load planning out of
the Freight Order UI by choosing Follow-Up-> Perform Load Planning.
Load Plan
The load plan is the result of load planning. It provides you with an overview of how the loading
space available for transporting a business document is currently used. In both the
transportation cockpit and in the business document. you can display the complete load plan as a
30 load plan or a table load plan of business document items. You can show and hide grid lines in
your decks in the 30 load plan. You can also show and hide individual objects as well as entire
rows, columns, or stacks and fill with different colors.
The load plan contains the following information about the business document item:
•
Resource
•
Item in the resource
•
Loading sequence
•
Row. stack, and level in the loading space
•
Gross weight
•
Height, width, and length
•
Stackability
You also get information about the load distribution as well as additional statistical data about the
current load on separate tab pages. This includes the following:
•
228
Number of loaded business document items
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Optimizing a Load
•
Used area on the lower deck of your double-deck trailer
•
Utilization of the loading volume as a percentage
•
Used area on the upper deck of your double-deck trailer
•
Maximum weight for each axle group compared to the current weight for each axle group
•
Maximum trailing load compared to the current trailing load
Load Optimization Process
Common restrictions which are observed during load optimization:
,Weight
,Dimensions
, Stackability
,Axle weight distribution
,Further rules
--------------
... Priority of the rules
-Locations: which item is unloaded at which location
(according to the First In Last Out principle)
Which freight units belong together
Figure 106: Load Planning Functionality
Load Planning Prerequisites
•
The latest version of Visual Business (Visual Business 2.1) for 30 Visualization is installed on
your local PC.
•
The visualization is set up the layout of the transportation cockpit (in the Order area).
In the Order area. enable the Road Freight Order Hierarchy or Freight Order list. In the Details
area, enable the Load Planning button. In the Order Details tab, enable a new detailed tab
(Load Plan) for road freight orders.
•
You have specified capacity details in the Resource Master Data for the truck on which
planning is to take place. If the relevant dimensions are not maintained. the optimizer is not
able to perform the load planning. The dimensions maintained here are used by the optimizer
and the 3D·Visualization for the load planning.
In relation to the last point. the following data is critical:
•
Capacity
Mass: Gross vehicle weight
Internal length: length of loading space
Internal width: width of loading space
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
229
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
Internal height: height of loading space
•
Physical Properties
Tare weight: empty vehicle weight
Cargo body distance: from front of truck to beginning of loading space
•
Axle Group
Axle type: Single, tandem, triple, and so on.
Axle group distance: distance from front of truck to axle.
Dist. between axles: relevant in case of more than one axle.
Max weight on group: maximum weight on axle group.
Emp. weight on group: weight of empty vehicle on axle group.
•
The load planning settings and rules. The planning profile contains a new field - Load Planning
Settings - in which you enter the load plan. In the load planning settings. you can maintain
certain rules that are considered by the optimizer during the load planning run. for example,
height difference within a row: maximum deviation. and so on. You can set each rule as active
or inactive. and you can prioritize the list of rules.
Load Planning Settings
Capacity
Selection
Settings
Optimizer
Settings
Load Planning
Settings
Planning Cost
Settings
lncompatibilty
Settings
Carrier
Selection
Settings
-Optimizer/Algorithm Control Settings (e.g. Runtime)
- Load Planning Strategy
- Load Planning Rules
Figure 107: Load Planning Set lings
Log Tool
The explanation tool. as may be familiar to you from the existing optimizer, is also available for
load planning.
You can review input and output (result) tables showing optimizer run data. items used in a run.
and results (position of an item, sequence, and so on).
230
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Optimizing a Load
To access the log tool in NWBC. choose Application Administration-> General Settings->
Remote Control and Communication Framework-> Log Display. Alternatively, start transaction
RCC LOG in the SAP GUI.
Choose your log using your user ID, date, time, and application (the TVSO application refers to
load planning).
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Describe load optimization
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
231
E"
Unit 5: Transportation Planning
232
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following are options for transportation planning in SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Manual planning using drag and drop
B Optimizer planning
C Transportation proposals
D Map-based planning
2. Which of the following business documents can serve as input for freight unit building?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
D
A Forwarding Orders
B Order-Based Transportation Requirements
C Delivery-Based Transportation Requirements
D Freight Orders
E Freight Bookings
3. Provide an overview of package building in the SAP TM planning process.
4. Which profile can be used to select freight units for transportation planning?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
A Layout Profile
B Selection Profile
C Transportation Profile
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
233
E"
Unit 5: Learning Assessment
5. What can be maintained within a planning profile?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
A Master data
B Cost settings
C Capacity selection settings
6. A profile and layout set can be chosen when entering the transportation cockpit. This defines
what should be planned, how it should be planned. and how information should be arranged.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
7. The assignment of transshipment locations to transportation zones (entry or exit point into a
transportation network) allows planners to specify a duration that can be used for "rough
planning".
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
8. What is the optimizer taking into account during vehicle scheduling and routing?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Incompatibilities
B Internal costs
c
Real costs from TCM
0 Opening hours
9. Provide an overview of what is offered by SAP Visual Business.
234
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5: Learning Assessment
10. The axle weight distribution can be considered during load optimization.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
235
E"
Unit 5
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following are options for transportation planning in SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
0
A Manual planning using drag and drop
B Optimizer planning
C Transportation proposals
D Map-based planning
2. Which of the following business documents can serve as input for freight unit building?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
D
D
A Forwarding Orders
B Order-Based Transportation Requirements
C Delivery-Based Transportation Requirements
D Freight Orders
E Freight Bookings
3. Provide an overview of package building in the SAP TM planning process.
Package building allows products to be combined into packages. These packages (within
freight units) are later used in subsequent planning steps (manual and optimizer planning
(VSR) to create freight orders and subsequent load planning).
236
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 5: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Which profile can be used to select freight units for transportation planning?
Choose the correct answer.
D
0
D
A Layout Profile
B Selection Profile
C Transportation Profile
5. What can be maintained within a planning profile?
Choose the correct answers.
D
0
0
A Master data
B Cost settings
C Capacity selection settings
6. A profile and layout set can be chosen when entering the transportation cockpit. This defines
what should be planned. how it should be planned. and how information should be arranged.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
D
True
False
7. The assignment of transshipment locations to transportation zones (entry or exit point into a
transportation network) allows planners to specify a duration that can be used for "rough
planning".
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
D
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
237
E"
Unit 5: Learning Assessment - Answers
8. What is the optimizer taking into account during vehicle scheduling and routing?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
A Incompatibilities
D
c
0
D Opening hours
B Internal costs
Real costs from TCM
9. Provide an overview of what is offered by SAP Visual Business.
SAP Visual Business is a UI technology. which visualizes data in the context of a map. It
provides interactive capabilities and an easy to understand visualization of SAP business data
with geographical information - locations. routes. transportation resources. and so on. It helps
planners to gain a fast understanding of the actual business situation. and allows them to
respond to situations by direct interaction with objects on the map.
10. The axle weight distribution can be considered during load optimization.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
D
238
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Transportation Execution
Lesson 1
Performing a Carrier Selection
Exercise 15: Execute a Carrier Selection
241
249
Lesson 2
Tendering a Freight Order
254
Lesson 3
260
269
Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
Exercise 16: Create a Delivery
Lesson 4
273
Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
Exercise 17: Create a Shipment
281
Lesson 5
287
Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Lesson 6
307
Generating Outputs
Lesson 7
312
323
Monitoring Transportation Events
Exercise 18: View the Events of a Freight Order
Lesson 8
326
Exporting a Freight Order
Lesson 9
331
339
Analyzing SAP Transportation Management Performance
Exercise 19: Execute a BCV Query
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
239
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
UNIT OBJECTIVES
240
•
Define the carrier selection process and parameters
•
Describe the order tendering process
•
Tender a freight order
•
Describe the delivery integration process
•
Create a delivery
•
Integrate a freight order with a shipment
•
Create a shipment from a freight order
•
Create a freight order from a shipment
•
Integrate SAP EWM based on a shipment
•
Integrate SAP EWM based on a delivery
•
Integrate SAP EWM for transit warehousing
•
Generate outputs
•
View a freight order event
•
Describe visibility scenarios
•
Monitor the freight order process
•
Process an international shipment
•
Execute a query
•
Execute a Business Context Viewer (BCV) query
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Lesson 1
Performing a Carrier Selection
LESSON OVERVIEW
Carrier selection is used to determine the right combination of carrier I carrier assignments
based on cost. equipment availability, priority, and business share goals. In this lesson, you will
learn about assigning suitable carriers to freight orders - either manually or automatically.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
,
Define the carrier selection process and parameters
Carrier Selection Process
Execution &
Subcontr.
.di!!====�
Freight Order I
Freight Booking
Subcontracting
Figure 108: Document Flow - Subcontracting
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
241
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Once a freight order has been built. a shipper needs to choose (and communicate with) the
business partner responsible for moving the product. We will refer to this as carrier selection.
Carrier Selection
Carrier selection is used to assign a suitable carrier to your subcontractable business documents
(for example, freight orders), either manually or automatically. The aim is to find a carrier with the
lowest costs under consideration of the defined constraints.
In manual carrier selection, you manually assign the required carrier to your business documents.
If you have configured a check against transportation allocations. the system takes this into
account and checks transportation capacities (transportation allocations) that you have defined
for the individual carriers. If. during the allocation. the system finds relevant transportation
allocations without capacity or that certain rules are violated by the allocation, warning messages
appear.
A separate optimization is available for automatic carrier selection. It takes selected optimization
options into account when determining the most cost-effective carrier for all business documents
that you have selected. If none of the carriers are available, the system does not assign any
carrier to the relevant business documents.
-Freight Order/Booking
Transportation Cockpit
Execute Carrier Selection
·-Carrier Selection
t-step Planning
Determine Carriers
Check Incompatibilities
Determine Priority/TCM/lnternal Costs
Transportation Allocations
Continuous Move
Business Shares
Build Ranking List
•
Automatic Assignment
Tendering
I
�
Action
•
I
Manual Assignment
Assign Carrier to FORIFB
figure 109: Carner SelectJon Process Flow
Strategy Options
During planning in SAP TM. strategies are defined which are optimization options for carrier
selection. The system takes these strategies into account during the automatic carrier selection
process.
You define strategies either in the transportation lane or in carrier selection settings. Initially, the
system considers the appropriate transportation lane for each freight order. This allows it to
consider different settings in one run. Taking strategies and settings into consideration. the
optimizer then creates a carrier ranking list containing the different carrier options. The strategy
options supported are as follows:
242
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Performing a Carrier Selection
•
Cost and Priority
•
Business Share
•
Transportation Allocation
•
Continuous Move
Costs and Priorities in Carrier Selection
In carrying out carrier selection, the system can put more weight on priorities or costs.
In terms of priority. the system can determine the most favorable carrier based on the priorities
you have defined. In effect. this means that the system chooses the carrier with the highest
priority, while taking into account the various restrictions that may be in place.
Alternatively. the system can determine the carrier on the basis of lowest total cost. Costs in this
case can refer to internal costs or to charges calculated in charge management (we will look at
this option in a separate lesson).
Internal Costs
Internal costs draw on transportation costs and carrier costs as defined for your carriers. For
example. you may have defined a transportation cost per business document (freight order. for
example). or you could have defined a transportation cost per unit of weight or volume. Carrier
costs are typically defined per unit of distance - kilometers or miles. You define internal costs in
the transportation lane or in the carrier profile.
Note:
When we speak of internal costs here. we are not speaking of real world costs. Internal
costs are used for weighting only. as part of the carrier selection process.
Business Share
Formalized firm relationships often exist with carriers in the form of contracts. These contracts
can guarantee an amount of business to be allocated to a carrier. If the required allocation is not
met. penalties may result. SAP TM has the tools to track these relationships and to divide
business appropriately between different carriers. This supports the negotiation of freight
agreements. and avoids dependency on a single vendor. The idea is to use a fixed percentage to
dictate the assignment of jobs to certain carriers. The system can also take the capacity of a
carrier in relation to certain routes or geographical areas into account when generating
assignments.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
243
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
30°/o
Carrier 1
Total Freight
Carrier 2
Figure 110: Business Share
When defining the business share context. you create business share buckets. These define the
actual business share a carrier is allowed to have. There are different types of buckets available
for business share creation - yearly, quarterly. monthly, weekly, and daily.
Business Example
Carrier A has a weekly bucket equating to 75o/o of the business share on the lane between
Hamburg and Frankfurt, between the validity period 03.01.2015 to 05.31.2015. In the same
context. Carrier B can have a defined weekly bucket of 25%.
Penalties
You can define tolerances and penalty costs in relation to business share. As long as the business
share for a specific carrier is within the tolerance limits. it does not affect the cost calculations
during carrier ranking. Once the share allocation goes beyond a defined level. however. penalties
start to apply. Tolerances are always defined in percentage terms. Penalties are maintained as
numeric values. This number (the penalty) is multiplied by the deviation percentage (the amount
outside the defined tolerance range) to arrive at the penalty cost.
Example
A penalty of 1.000 is defined. An excess tolerance of 10% is also defined. During business share
calculation. if the excess is 12°/o. the excess liable for penalty is 2°/o. This 2 is multiplied by 1.000
to arrive at the total excess penalty cost of 2,000.
Currencies in Penalty Costs
When calculating the total costs for a carrier, if you are working with charge management costs.
there will be a currency assigned to the charge management costs. To assign a currency to
business share penalty costs. this has to be defined under Carrier Selection Profile-> Advanced
Settings -> Common Currency.
If you are working with carriers from multiple geographic locations with multiple currencies. to
arrive at the correct ranking, the system uses the internal common currency (maintained in the
244
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Performing a Carrier Selection
carrier selection profile) for its calculations. The currency displayed in the carrier ranking list is
always the local currency of the carrier (the one maintained in the freight agreement). All freight
orders in a business share context are selected for the business share penalty calculations,
although these freight orders are not selected during the planning run.
Business Example
Assume that in a business share context we have two carriers. A & B. No tolerances have been
defined. Carrier A is awarded 60o/o and carrier B 40%. There are already 10 freight orders
awarded. of which carrier A is assigned 6 and carrier Bis assigned 4. Now let's perform carrier
selection for an 11th freight order. If carrier Bis assigned this FO. carrier A will have a shortfall of
business share. If the freight order is assigned to Carrier A, carrier B will have a shortfall of
business shares. Both options are evaluated by the system and ranked according to their
suitability.
Allocation
Transportation allocations allow companies to assign defined quantities of capacity to certain
business partners. This includes set minimum or maximum capacity restrictions that regulate
how much business is allowed with a certain carrier in a certain region for a certain means of
transport. A separate business object is used to model these allocations.
Carrier 1 allocates 20
truckslday (capacity)
Freight from
Location!Zone A to
Location!Zone B
Carrier 2 allocates 40 truckslday
(capacity)
Figure 111: Transportation Allocation
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
245
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Carrier Selection Settings
•
Plammg Prrole
Capacity Selection Settngs
Oit,nize< S..,,ngs
Plam1""9 Co$1S Settmgs
�cs
I
o..-.
(illlAC¥ner�
Olectnto�--
D
�tblyStl!n;t
L
i)'l)t Of Cefl'ief Sd!QCn SfllilO,.
!Gtfllfll C.l'f'W' Stll<NII
1 ...
,u11Q1
Otl'ltt St.tul\9l
Genenll O.ta
Oll'T« � Sftti'lo,:
Cmie, Seledion Settings
lnoo.1bdfy Sett1,gs
I
' ·!
Trsp. .ldoc. Uuga.
:DollelUstTJl!!f!!lta!IIIIMcmll ..
8$Uwpe:
:Do Net Uk &1$1'.CU $Nrt$
St•;,,:
;u.e Thl�lffl Uil\e St!lni!:
I
·I
·I
C.rrlef Cost Of;rr
1
Uae Trtl'llPOfl,ltcll!, Lint Se=nt5
:)
--..1
............
·�99l'agy:
�"'
I
eonw;e. lb!'IAl�ffe11 n f"111eil D
Actli:n re, Mlntal Rrii,91,
� Mo-l'f T,i,t.
al
'
•
0-.-tral Cert*Awl!itfty.
.!!!!>
D
TflMc,crt;e!ffl Chqe lrte!p!Mal(
'.AocecitClmf 'lttbCN!i!! OfZttt
Connan o..mcy-
,WA.
Actlc1l A1'ier C4n'e! � M
� Best C.rrer
� Mo-vt tltomclolt
D
RNaioatoCMAwmt
'.ite...... e.- Rrinp(CA)
� o.t. .io l)ir,:
e.,ilnJM; M,c..,.. ll1'rc.N�
ll1
po fill CtHlt COIO!ulut iw,e
D
D
,,,
•l
tMCcst� tcrffll·
. .!
Us.eJ•rodOtitffliotO;ari:.-ion
Te«er'fflr��«$1esut
__
.,
••
O
0
TetdemgMal�
i��lle:
'
Figure 112: Carner Selection Settings· Planning Profile
Included in optimization is a carrier selection profile. Although some of the same settings are
available in the carrier settings on the transportation lane. these settings override settings
maintained directly on the lane. The settings in this profile are based on strategies such as lowest
cost. business share. and priority. It considers continuous move options and equipment
allocations and can tender automatically based on the tendering strategy. The profile also
contains more enhanced settings. such as the ability to automatically perform carrier selection
after vehicle scheduling and routing.
Carrier Selection Ranking
When using automatic carrier selection. the system will create a carrier ranking list of the relevant
carriers for a particular freight order/freight booking. For each relevant carrier. users can see a
variety of information that influenced the selection process. This could include the means of
transport cost. delivery performance ratings. and others. After automatic carrier selection has
been performed. the ranking list will be visible in the freight order
246
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Performing a Carrier Selection
Freight
Order/Booking
1
$1100
2
$1150
3
$1275
Figure 113: Carrier Ranking Lisi
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
247
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
248
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Exercise 15
Execute a Carrier Selection
Business Example
You have been asked to investigate the carrier selection process for a typical load between a
given origin and destination location.
1. Open the freight order that you created during transportation planning in unit 5. lesson 6.
2. Is this freight order relevant for subcontracting? Hint: Select the Subcontracting tab.
3. Has carrier selection been processed for this order? Hint: Select Carrier Ranking in the
Subcontracting tab.
4. Perform carrier selection for this freight order. Use carrier selection profile CSEL_3100_00.
5. How are the carriers ranked?
6. Why is carrier CARR-00-01 ranked first?
7. While this order has triggered carrier selection. how can you tell if it has been tendered? Hint:
Go to the Tendering Overview tab.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
249
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
8. Has a carrier been chosen and assigned to the freight order?
9. Select carrier CARR-00-01 and assign it to the freight order.
10. What is the subcontracting status now? Hint: Go to the Statuses tab.
11. Save the freight order.
250
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Solution 15
Execute a Carrier Selection
Business Example
You have been asked to investigate the carrier selection process for a typical load between a
given origin and destination location.
1. Open the freight order that you created during transportation planning in unit 5. lesson 6.
a) In NWBC. choose Freight Order Management-> Road-> Display Road Freight Order.
b) Enter your freight order number and choose Continue.
2. Is this freight order relevant for subcontracting? Hint: Select the Subcontracting tab.
Yes. based on the Subcontracting Relevance field, which is set to Relevant for
Subcontracting. This is a result of the freight order type settings defined during
configuration.
3. Has carrier selection been processed for this order? Hint: Select Carrier Ranking in the
Subcontracting tab.
No. No carriers are listed on the Carrier Ranking tab. You could also navigate to the Statuses
tab and review the subcontracting status. which is set to No Subcontracting Result.
4. Perform carrier selection for this freight order. Use carrier selection profile CSEL_3100_00.
a) In the menu bar. choose Edit and then choose Subcontrecting=« Carrier Selection.
b) In the Carrier Selection Settings window. enter CSEL_3100_oo and choose OK.
5. How are the carriers ranked?
On the Carrier Ranking tab. CARR·OO·Ol is ranked first. and CARR-00·02 is ranked second.
6. Why is carrier CARR·OO·Ol ranked first?
The strategy was set to rank carriers based on real costs calculated in charge management.
Carrier CAR·OO·Ol has a cost of 1.366,81 USO, CARR-00-02 has a cost of 1.642,76 USO.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
251
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
7. While this order has triggered carrier selection. how can you tell if it has been tendered? Hint:
Go to the Tendering Overview tab.
The order has not been tendered. You know that because the Tendering Overview tab of the
freight order is blank. Had the order been tendered. there would be additional information
here.
8. Has a carrier been chosen and assigned to the freight order?
No. The Carrier field in the Subcontracting Data area is empty.
9. Select carrier CARR-00-01 and assign it to the freight order.
a) Select the line with carrier CARR-00-01 and choose Assign Carrier. Verify that the Carrier
field has been populated.
10. What is the subcontracting status now? Hint: Go to the Statuses tab.
Navigate to the Statuses tab. The subcontracting status is Carrier Assigned.
11. Save the freight order.
252
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Performing a Carrier Selection
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Define the carrier selection process and parameters
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
253
E"
Unit 6
Lesson 2
Tendering a Freight Order
LESSON OVERVIEW
Once a freight order has been built and a carrier selected. your business needs to let the
appropriate parties know they have been selected. In this lesson you will investigate how SAP TM
can support this process of order tendering.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe the order tendering process
•
Tender a freight order
Order Tendering Process
Fxe ut Carri r Selection
i
Tendering
•
Assign Carrier to FOR/FB
Figure 114: Subcontracting: Tendering· Context Process Flow
Once carrier selection has taken place. communication with the selected carrier needs to be
initiated. This process is referred to as order tendering. Different tendering processes can be
deployed depending upon the technology used by the carrier. You use this process to tender
(offer) a freight order to one or more potential transportation service providers (TSPs).
Tendering is a bidding process. in which you request one or multiple TSPs to submit a quote for a
transportation service that is defined in a freight order. You can select the TSP that you want to
execute the transportation service by evaluating the quotes. The main characteristics of the
254
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Tendering a Freight Order
tendering process are flexible configuration and the reduction of required manual interaction to
support ease of use and lower total cost of ownership (TCO).
Example Process: Tendering
• •
Freight
Order
.
Carrier
Selection
• Ranking
List
•
Freight Order
Tendering
• Request for
Quotation
(RFQ)
creation &
publishing
•
Carrier
Quotation
• RFQ
acceptance I
rejection with
quotation
(FQ)
•
Freight Quotation
Evaluation &
Carrier Assignment
• Automatically or
manually
• Embedded analytics
for decision support
•
Freight
Order
Update,
& Sending
to Carrier
Figure 115: Order Tendering Process
Tendering Types
In general, there are two types of tendering. as follows: Long-term tendering is where contracts
are negotiated for a longer period, for example. a year. Long term tendering is a process that is
covered in Strategic Freight Management. which we will look at in the Managing Freight Contracts
lesson. Short term tendering is where tendering is executed based on specific orders. This is
known as order tendering. SAP TM supports the following short term tendering scenarios:
•
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
•
Broadcast Tendering
The strategies for each are determined in tendering profiles in SAP TM.
Parties and Roles in the Tendering Process
At least two parties are involved in the tendering process - a customer who wants to subcontract
a transportation service that is defined in a freight order. and a supplier (subcontractor) or TSP,
who potentially carries out the transportation service. There are two roles on the customer side of
the tendering process. The first is a transportation dispatcher. who is responsible for the
transportation service. that is, the freight order The second is the tendering manager. who is
responsible for configuring and executing the tendering process and acquiring an acceptable
quote from a TSP to perform the transportation service.
Manual and Automatic Tendering
When a transportation dispatcher initiates the tendering process, they have two options: manual
process configuration or automatic tendering. If they want to tender only a single freight order.
the transportation dispatcher can choose between the two options. If they initiate a tendering
process using manual configuration. the tendering manager must configure and start the
tendering process manually. If the transportation dispatcher wants to tender more than one
freight order, they must initiate automatic tendering and use the automatic tendering
configuration in the system.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
255
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Peer-to-Peer Tendering
1.
Carrier ABC
2.
RFQ
Carrier XYZ
3.
Carrier 123
4.
Carrier DEF
5.
Carrier 789
Sequential Processing
, y_pe
T
L step.Ca_rr__. · �· T_end_e_ng_
l I • Step 1 Peer-to.Peer Tendering. Response Requred
� Tendering Process
• Frelgl'II RFQ Based, Award 1\1.iornallcdy
Freig,t RFQ Based, Award Nknlaliy
freig,t RFQ Based, Awatd AlAornaticaly
Direct Tendering, Send Freight Order Ofrectly
..
.
Figure 116: Peer lo Peer Tendering
Peer-to-peer tendering is a process whereby freight orders are tendered sequentially or "offered"
to preselected carriers or transportation service providers (TSPs). Peer-to-peer tendering
involves the sequential sending of freight requests for quotation (freight RFQs) to each proposed
carrier. The system waits until the carrier sends a freight quotation (FQ) or until the maximum
response time has passed. If the TSP does not send a quote within the maximum response time.
the peer-to-peer tendering process continues, and the system sends a request for quote to the
next TSP. If peer-to-peer tendering ends without an acceptable quote. the tendering process
continues with the next tendering process step that you have configured. If the TSP sends a
quote before the maximum response time has elapsed, the system evaluates the quote and can
either accept or reject it. In the case of rejection. a new RFQ is sent out. The process continues
until at least one acceptable FQ has been received. The system awards this a Quotation
Acceptable evaluation result and the process ends successfully. There are two types of peer-topeer tendering: response required and no response required.
Broadcast Tendering
Broadcast tendering is a tender process whereby freight orders are simultaneously tendered
(offered) to preselected TSPs. All TSPs have to respond within a given maximum response time.
There are two types of broadcast tendering: best offer and first acceptable offer. Depending on
which one of these is being used, either the first acceptable quote wins or. after the maximum
response time. the system evaluates all the acceptable quotes and selects the TSP that has
submitted the quote with the lowest price. If broadcast tendering ends without an acceptable
quote, the tendering process continues with the next tendering process step that you have
configured.
256
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Tendering a Freight Order
Carrier ABC
Carrier
RFQ
xa:
Carrier 123
Carrier 456
Carrier DEF
First Come, First Served
I
Sl'l)A'.:lllT...
• Slep 1
,
Tendeting Type
,
&oadcost Tendeting. Best Olfer
TendemgProce,s
• Freigtl RFQ 80$ed, Awa,d..A!.ioma1lcaly
Frefg'I RFQ Bosed, Awa,d Manualy
Freq( RFQllosed, Aw0td Aticmoticaly
Direct Tenderng, SerlCI Fre� Order Oireclly
Figure 117: Broadcast Tendering
Tendering Profiles
The tendering profile contains basic tendering data and is a prerequisite for automatic tendering.
You can use a tendering profile when you manually create a tendering plan. Within the profile. you
can define multi-step tendering. This allows a company to mix tendering types. For example. you
can first use peer-to-peer tendering, and if this is unsuccessful you can use broadcast tendering.
In a tendering profile. you can make settings in relation to the following options:
•
Choose from tendering types - peer-to-peer, broadcasting (best offer, first acceptable offer)
•
Choose from tendering processes - direct or RFQ·based
•
Choose fully or semi-automatic rules-based tendering (response time and price limits,
automatic re-tendering)
•
Configure the tendering process and RFQ publishing
•
Set up web-based, e-mail. SMS. 828 tendering communication
•
Set up authorization-based RFQ processing and data visibility (carrier authorization to change
the price and delivery dates, view tender price limit. stop date and rejection code reasons,
support of free text and attachments)
•
Make settings in relation to currency
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
257
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
l
, Slep.Qlrr...
I
f9f'ldetn.lf'fl)$
J ...... ,..Peer-to.Peer Tenderqi • R$$f.'IOl'lMRec,Jred
Peer-to-her
· R&ponse Re(JMed
-
.
•
Tencserng
Poor.to""'er T,no;,hg . No R�pons.e Rcq,Jr�
BrOlldCl$t tendering. Pest Olre,
er·oadcast TMtlerinO . f'•st .A.ccefllellle oner
"""' ....
��
Tenoemg Proceu
rr"'°"*'
- jc...... ___
leooamQ lyf)!I
• 'Step 1
Peet-boher TfflClemg • No litespons.e �
Get carriers
•
• f,et;ttAfOBesecl, AV<l#'d A.l.mMxfll(
lfh91,;ittR1Qe.sed, Awtrd�y
FrogttM'OBased, Aw#'CI kt�ef'(
Ohet T«der'i'Q, SW fr� Order Clirectly
-
•
trOr'n Renk#'lg llS1
Oct Con� lrom � Li�
Oct Corrio,$ from lre,n;:por1otion l.onc MNtcr Oeita
Get Asslone<t Cl'lrrier rromF'r� Order
AsSignC.rWs�
RfQ l.p:tat� lAL an ..
,.,_.
No l,l)dale
•
Reillive P1be _..
-....Resp... Ctrrier-SpecifL
,oor.
VisHly Sdli'lgs
0
915S
J>e'AULT
Upda!e; DoNol free L\i) TAL L\i)MRejedion
Updole; Free L\i) T�.l ond BS (%>onR<;oction
•
.
.
Figure 118: Tendering Profile
Tendering Communication Methods
As part of the tendering process. it is important to review the communication methods that
support the tendering scenarios. For carriers who may not be able to support EDI (electronic data
interchange) scenarios. SAP has developed a Web-based collaboration portal to improve
communication. This requires subcontractors to log on to SAP TM using the Web in order to
process a freight order. On a periodic basis. each subcontractor views their RFQs (modeled as
tendering requests) and submits quotations (modeled as tendering responses). Each
subcontractor is provided with their own user IDs and passwords. as well as the relevant
authorization to restrict visibility to only the loads that have been tendered to them.
Additional methods are supported, such as receiving RFQs by e-mail and SMS and submitting
quotations by e-mail without the need to access an SAP TM system at all. In this case. an RFQ is
sent to a carrier by e-mail or SMS message. The carrier responds to the e-mail using a regular email client on a PC or a mobile device. The e-mail is then converted (using Pl) into a quotation.
Carriers can accept RFQs directly. reject them with a specified reason, or accept them with
changes.
Mobile tendering using a smartphone app is also supported and allows a mobile device to receive
new RFQs, respond to RFQs, and include changes to dates and prices. Users can check addresses
and routes on a map, e-mail or phone the contact person, create a calendar entry for awarded
tenders. and check other appointments in the calendar.
258
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Tendering a Freight Order
::...==..-=-=-=
••
SAP Transport Tendering '\
Collaboration Portal
�"..:.! - - ...
- •
'
-
�
-
� �
--··
Ii
.::.. �::
__
-·___.__.___ _
·-�-___ .
----------···--«-
._ ...
----·
.... ·--
<
EDI Message (XML)
=·=---
. . . ,._
,_
-� l�tui•-<rl
Figure il9: Tendering Communication Methods
Advanced Communication
If a subcontractor is more technically advanced. 828 communication can be used.
In this situation. a copy of the freight order is created for the carrier (the tendering manager or
system administrator can control what is included in the copy that is visible to the carrier). The
copy is persisted in the system to retain what was communicated to the carrier. A freight request
for quotation (tendering request) is sent via Pl and received as a forwarding quotation in the
supplier's SAP TM system. The carrier can accept the order directly or. if the first carrier rejects
the order. the freight order will be sent to the next carrier. Finally, a quotation confirmation is sent
back to the customer and is converted into a quotation (tendering response) in the customer's
SAP TM system. The Change Controller allows you to react to changes in the FO. for example. by
stopping tendering when there are major changes in the FO.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Describe the order tendering process
•
Tender a freight order
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
259
E"
Unit 6
Lesson 3
Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson describes the delivery integration process and it shows you how to create a delivery.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe the delivery integration process
•
Create a delivery
Delivery Integration Process
SAP ERP Order
SD
MM
Delivery integrated to SAP TM
Sales order
Outbound delivery
Customer return
Inbound delivery
Scheduling
Agreement
Outbound delivery
Purchase order
Inbound delivery
Stock transport
order
Outbound delivery
Returns purchase
order
Outbound delivery
Returns stock
transport order
Scheduling
Agreement
---- Outbound delivery
J
Inbound delivery
Figure 120: Delivery Integration with SAP TM
Employees using other processes for buying and selling may also need to complete shipping
activities. The delivery document controls. supports. and monitors numerous subprocesses for
shipment processing, such as picking. packing. loading. and posting the goods issue. In addition.
260
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
the delivery document can be used as a reference document for the creation of other shipment
documents, such as a bill of lading.
Outbound deliveries and inbound deliveries that are created in SAP ERP can be transferred to
SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM), where they are stored as delivery-based
transportation requirements. They can be transferred as a starting point for TM integration or as
follow-up documents of ERP orders. In the latter case. either an outbound or inbound delivery is
expected by SAP TM based on the preceding order.
Delivery integration between SAP ERP and SAP TM is standard integration by Web Service.
Delivery Integration Process
Delivery creation in SAP ERP can be triggered from SAP TM based on the results of
transportation planning such as consolidation and dates. taking into account transportationplanning-relevant information such as resource availability and transportation durations.
After creation of the delivery in SAP ERP. the delivery is transferred to SAP TM to create a
delivery-based transportation requirement. Deliveries can be transferred to SAP TM regardless of
whether the delivery creation was triggered by SAP TM or not. The delivery-based transportation
requirement replaces the order-based transportation requirement as the requirement relevant
for transportation planning and execution.
SAP ERP is the leading system - updates to and cancellations of deliveries need to be carried out
in SAP ERP and are transferred to SAP TM to update or cancel the delivery-based transportation
requirement. If a delivery is changed. split. or deleted in SAP ERP, this information is sent to SAP
TM. SAP TM adjusts the corresponding delivery-based transportation requirement based on this
information.
You can also split an outbound delivery in SAP ERP based on planning changes in SAP TM. and
you can update the goods issue date. loading date. transportation start date. and delivery date in
the outbound delivery based on changed dates in SAP TM.
Since TM 9.1, it is also possible to transfer planning changes in SAP TM back to SAP ERP to
update delivery times or to split deliveries. SAP TM is the triggering system in this case.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
261
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Delivery Creation from SAP TM
SAP ERP
SAP TM
�
'"
Create Orders
(SO, PO, STO,
Returns), or
Scheduling
Agreements
(SD, MM) ,
-
.;,
Create
Deliveries
.'.
Create
Shipments
-.
Log
Create OTR
Confirmation
,
Create Freight
Units
'-.L
Perform
Transportation
Planning
·-
,..
l
Create
Delivery
Proposal
"'
Create DTR
_)
I
'I'
Consume
OTR
\,
l
l
Adapt
I
Transportation
..... Planning
l
r;::
Save Planning
.i
Results
)
figure 121: Delivery Creation from SAP TM
Creation of a delivery document can be triggered in either SAP ERP or SAP TM (and then sent to
SAP ERP).
Triggered in SAP ERP
When the delivery is created. it is sent to SAP TM as a Delivery-Based Transportation
Requirement (DTR). This is a specific instance of the Transportation Request Object (TRO). Due
to the fact that the source document (the delivery) originates in SAP ERP, not all functions and
changes are possible (in comparison with a forwarding order created in SAP TM).
Triggered in SAP TM
The second scenario is one in which the creation of deliveries is triggered from SAP TM and based
on transportation planning performed in SAP TM. This solution offers the possibility of combining
and planning multiple orders in SAP TM, and of creating a single delivery and transport. If
handling unit management is being used in SAP ERP, these handling units are created as
packages in the DTR in SAP TM.
SAP TM can generate proposals for delivery creation in SAP ERP based on order-based
transportation requirements. based on dates and quantities according to transportation planning
results, and taking into account transportation constraints such as resource availability and
transportation durations. SAP TM can also trigger the creation of deliveries prior to
262
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
transportation planning. SAP TM can propose inbound deliveries and outbound deliveries and
send these proposals to SAP ERP to trigger the creation of deliveries.
After the delivery proposals have been created and sent to SAP ERP, the system creates an entry
in the application log. The application log entry includes the delivery proposals that were sent to
SAP ERP. Furthermore, the freight units for which a delivery proposal is sent to SAP ERP are
marked with a send timestamp.
SAP ERP creates the deliveries when it receives the request to do so. These can be inbound or
outbound deliveries. SAP ERP may split the proposed deliveries further. for example. based on
additional split criteria. However. SAP ERP will not change the dates that were proposed by SAP
TM nor consolidate proposed deliveries. Once the deliveries have been created. SAP ERP sends a
confirmation to SAP TM. together with a request to create a delivery-based transportation
requirement in SAP TM.
SAP TM creates an entry in the application log. The application log entry includes the system
messages that were created in SAP ERP during delivery creation as well as the numbers and
document IDs of deliveries created in SAP ERP. If an error occurrs during delivery creation in SAP
ERP. SAP TM generates an alert.
When a confirmation is received, SAP TM sets a confirmation timestamp in the relevant freight
units. The timestamp is used to monitor whether SAP ERP has responded.
Note:
For error handling purposes, two additional worklists are available:
•
One for all OTRs for which delivery creation has been triggered but no response
has arrived from SAP ERP
•
One for all OTRs for which delivery creation has been triggered and the
confirmation has arrived from SAP ERP. but for which an error occurred during
delivery creation (and for which the delivery creation needs to be triggered again)
Methods for Delivery Creation
•
Background Report
•
Interactive Delivery Creation
Background Report
Delivery proposals can be created for order-based transportation requirements by using a
background report (report /SCMTMS/DLV_BATCH). The user can enter selection criteria or use
a selection profile. In both cases, the user can also enter a delivery profile. Delivery profiles
include settings for delivery creation and will be covered later. The system selects the
documents. creates the delivery proposals. and sends them to SAP ERP. If a freight unit is used
for the creation of a delivery proposal, but no delivery-based transportation requirement is
ultimately created, the same report cannot be used to create a new delivery proposal for that
freight unit. Instead. a new delivery proposal must be created interactively in SAP NetWeaver
Business Client.
Interactive Delivery Creation
The following list shows the possible interactive delivery creation approaches:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
263
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
•
Input Selection with Profiles
The user specifies one or more profiles according to which the system selects and displays a
list of documents. The user can then select the relevant documents in the list and trigger
delivery proposal creation. The user can review the delivery proposals before sending them to
SAP ERP.
•
For Specific Documents
The user can trigger delivery creation for specific business documents from worklists. The
system automatically sends the proposals to SAP ERP to create deliveries. It also displays the
proposals before sending. The following are worklists from which delivery creation can be
triggered:
OTR Worklist
Freight Unit Worklist
Freight Order Worklist
Ocean/Air Freight Booking Worklist
The user can also trigger the creation and sending of delivery proposals for a specific freight
order in the freight order UI.
•
After Planning
The user can trigger delivery creation for specific documents after carrying out planning in the
transportation cockpit. The system displays the delivery proposals, which the user can then
review before sending them to SAP ERP.
Data Sources
SAP TM considers data for delivery creation from the order-based transportation requirements
and from the assigned freight units. freight orders. and freight bookings. Based on the chosen
input. SAP TM creates delivery proposals. A proposal consists of groups of freight units that can
be delivered together.
Data Collected by SAP TM
•
Dates
SAP TM uses dates from the freight order or freight booking. If the order-based transportation
requirement is not planned. that is no freight order or freight booking exists. then SAP TM
uses dates from the freight units.
•
Quantities
SAP TM uses quantities from the freight units.
•
SAP ERP Document References
SAP TM retrieves document references (such as order document number) from the orderbased transportation requirement.
Consolidation
If order-based transportation requirements have been planned. and freight orders or freight
bookings exist for the transportation requirements. SAP TM uses only one freight order or one
freight booking for each delivery proposal. That is. only freight units that belong to the same
264
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
freight order or freight booking can be consolidated into a single delivery proposal. In this way.
freight units from various order-based transportation requirements can be consolidated into a
single delivery proposal if they belong to the same freight order or freight booking. If. however.
freight units from a single order-based transportation requirement are distributed across
multiple freight orders or freight bookings, then multiple deliveries are proposed for the freight
units of this one order-based transportation requirement.
If order combination is not allowed for an order-based transportation requirement. SAP TM does
not group freight units from this transportation requirement together with freight units from
other order-based transportation requirements. If freight units for such order-based
transportation requirements have been consolidated into the same freight order or freight
booking during planning. SAP TM does not include them in the same delivery proposal. but
instead creates multiple delivery proposals.
In addition, freight units can only be consolidated into the same delivery proposal if the following
data is the same:
•
SAP ERP system from which the order was received
•
Source location
•
Destination location
•
lncoterms
•
Shipping conditions
•
SAP ERP document type. such as purchase order or sales order
•
Start stop (if planning has already been done)
•
Destination stop (if planning has already been done)
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
265
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Freight Unit Consumption
1
creates
0 .. 1
•
•
•
1.. �
•
�
1 ..
E
11:
:,
0 .. 1
1/1
e
•
1
creates
: Delivery
•
-
•' ' •
..
• .i,...,
0 .. 1
•
1 .. •
8
•
•
SAP TM
SAP ERP
Figure 122: Freight Unit Consumption
When a delivery is created in SAP ERP. a delivery-based transportation requirement (DTR) is
created in SAP TM. The DTR consumes the freight units assigned to the relevant order-based
transportation requirements (OTR) if the corresponding orders were previously sent to SAP TM.
SAP TM uses the SAP ERP order (base document) number that is referenced in the DTR item to
find the corresponding OTR items (the base document number and item number is also
referenced in the OTR items). If there are differences between the freight unit or item and the
DTR. SAP TM adapts the freight units accordingly so that the information in the freight unit
corresponds to the transportation requirement.
Determination of Freight Units
As described under Freight Unit Consumption (above), the system can determine the freight
units which are assigned to OTR items. SAP TM reassigns the freight units from the OTRs to the
DTRs If multiple freight unit items are determined. SAP TM assigns the freight unit items to the
items of the DTR in chronological order (according the dates of the schedule lines that the freight
unit items reference). Once a freight unit is assigned to a DTR. the freight unit cannot be assigned
to another DTR. If SAP TM does not determine any freight units. SAP TM can build new freight
units for the DTR, as long as automatic freight unit building is allowed for the DTR type. This
situation might occur. for example, if deliveries are created in the SAP ERP system without a
preceding delivery proposal being sent from SAP TM.
Splitting Freight Units
266
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
If. in the course of transportation requirement consumption. a freight unit is to be reassigned. but
not all freight unit items or quantities are relevant for the DTR. SAP TM splits the freight unit. One
of the resulting freight units contains only the relevant freight unit items and is assigned to the
DTR. The other resulting freight unit contains the non-relevant freight unit items and is assigned
to the OTR.
If the quantity in a DTR item is less than the quantity in the associated freight unit. SAP TM splits
the freight unit. If there are other differences between the freight unit or item and the DTR. SAP
TM adapts the freight units accordingly so that the information in the freight unit corresponds to
the transportation requirement.
Updating an OTR
During the consumption process. the open quantities and the consumption status are updated on
the OTR.
The open quantity in an OTR represents the quantity that has not been assigned to a DTR. When
freight units are reassigned to a DTR. the open quantity of the OTR is reduced accordingly.
Initially, the OTR has the consumption status Not Consumed. If at least one OTR item. or part of
an item. has been consumed by a DTR item. the consumption status of the OTR changes to
Consumed Partially. If all items in an OTR have been consumed, the system changes the
consumption status to Consumed Completely. Once the consumption status is Consumed
Completely, the system changes the life cycle status to Completed.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
267
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
268
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Exercise 16
Create a Delivery
Business Example
You intend to use delivery documents for recording and monitoring the shipping process after the
shipment has been planned. You need to understand how trigger delivery creation from SAP TM.
1. Create a delivery. Use the following data:
Field
Value
Selection Profile (FUs)
FU SEL TMlOO ##
Selection Profile (FOs)
FOR SEL TMlOO ##
Delivery Profile
NA DOM OB DELY
- -
-
-
-
-
- -
2. What message is returned by the system?
3. Review your OTRs. What is the consumption status? What is the life cycle status?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
269
E"
Unit 6
Solution 16
Create a Delivery
Business Example
You intend to use delivery documents for recording and monitoring the shipping process after the
shipment has been planned. You need to understand how trigger delivery creation from SAP TM.
L Create a delivery. Use the following data:
Field
Value
Selection Profile (FUs)
FU SEL TMlOO ##
Selection Profile (FOs)
FOR SEL TMlOO ##
Delivery Profile
- -
-
- NA DOM OB DELY
- - -
a) In NWBC, choose the ERP Logistics Integration folder and then choose Delivery
Creation _. Create Deliveries in ERP.
b) Choose New and enter the values from the corresponding table.
c) Save your data.
d) Select your new profile settings and choose Start Creating Deliveries.
e) Select the freight order that you want to use to create this delivery (the freight order you
created previously) and choose Create Delivery Proposals.
f) Choose Send Delivery Proposals to ERP.
2. What message is returned by the system?
The system returns a message saying delivery proposals have been sent to ERP.
3. Review your OTRs. What is the consumption status? What is the life cycle status?
Review that the consumption status (Consump. Status) has changed to Consumed
Completely and that the life cycle status (Life Cycle Status) has changed to Completed.
a) In NWBC, choose ERP Logistics Integration --+ Worklist--+ Overview Transportation
Requirements.
Review the data for your order-based transportation requirements.
b) If necessary. refresh the screen.
270
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Triggering Delivery Creation from SAP TM
c) Choose the Order-Based Transportation Requirements query and highlight the appropriate
row in the table.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
271
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
272
•
Describe the delivery integration process
•
Create a delivery
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Lesson 4
Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson. we look at shipment integration and shipment-based freight order scenarios. We
also look at creating a shipment.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
Integrate a freight order with a shipment
•
Create a shipment from a freight order
,
Create a freight order from a shipment
Shipment Integration Scenarios
Shipment Integration Outbound/ Freight Order Based Shipments
FO
in
Creates
Shipment
in
ERP
TM
Shipment Integration Inbound/Shipment Based Freight Orders
Shipment
in
Creates
ERP
FO
in
TM
Figure 123: Freight Order · Shipments Integration
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
273
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Note:
The terms inbound and outbound . in the context of SAP ERP shipment integration.
are from the perspective of SAP TM.
The shipment integration process is typically used when customers have multiple systems.
SAP Enterprise Resource Planning (SAP ERP) performs tasks such as the purchasing of material
from external and internal suppliers, the storage of material in plant warehouses, and the
shipping of these materials to customers. Transport to and from the warehouse can be managed
by a transport module or transport system.
Transport planning is performed in an external system· SAP Transportation Management (SAP
TM). SAP TM can be used to perform certain functions of the transportation process (such as
planning. tendering, and charge calculation). However. transportation management as a whole is
performed in SAP ERP.
Shipment Scenarios
There are two possible variations of this business scenario:
•
Shipment integration outbound
In this scenario. SAP ERP has deliveries (inbound or outbound). which contain the necessary
information for the fulfillment of the orders. The deliveries are transmitted to SAP TM, where
they become Delivery Based Transport Requests (DTR). Planning is performed in SAP TM
resulting in freight orders. These freight orders are then sent back to SAP ERP. where they
become SAP ERP shipments so the execution can proceed. In this scenario, the transportation
planning is performed in SAP TM and the SAP ERP shipment is used only for execution.
•
Shipment integration inbound
In this scenario, sales orders created in SAP ERP result in deliveries that are relevant for
transportation. A shipment is created for the deliveries. When the shipment is ready for
tendering, indicated by its status. and saved, the shipment is sent to SAP TM and a freight
order is created. Tendering is then carried out in SAP TM. The tendering result is sent back to
SAP ERP and the shipment is updated with the proper forwarding agent.
Both of these scenarios are used by customers who have already implemented and are using SAP
LE·TRA, the transportation component of SAP ERP. and have invested in enhancements
development and want to protect these investments. In such cases, they use SAP TM only for
specific purposes. The terms inbound and outbound. in the context of SAP ERP shipment
integration. are from the perspective of SAP TM.
There is a 1:1 relation between the SAP ERP shipment document and the SAP TM freight order.
Hint:
It is also possible to use SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) for the
purpose of execution. SAP EWM integration is covered in a different enablement.
274
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
Freight Order-Based Shipment Scenarios
• local Mapplog In ERP
without Pl $upported .si,ce
SAP ERP El<PS SP09
(SOA21doclldoc2SOA
Integration)
'
Delivery
Process
DTR Processing
Create/Update
Delivery-Based
Transportation
Requirement
lntracompanyTransportation
Transportation
Planning
RequestReque-st_ln
Create/Update
Transportation Order
Create/Update
Shipment
IDOC
Mapping*
i,o+-������---, Message
Cancel Shipment
to IDOC
SHIPMNTOS
Shipment
Processing
!DOC
TPSSHT01
ExecuoonReques1_0u1
r.-��������
Cancel
Transportation Order
TransportatiooOrderSCM
ExecutlonCancetlatlonRequest
Update Shipment
IOOC
Mapping*
IDOC to
Message
F O R Processing
Execution Updates
TransportaliooOrderSCM
E>:ecutionS!atusNotificatio nl n
SHIPMNTOS
SAP ERP
TransportalionOrderSCM
SAP Pl
Figure 124: Creating Shipments from Freight Orders
In this scenario. you carry out transportation planning in SAP Transportation Management (SAP
TM) for transportation activities that are based on deliveries received from SAP ERP. You can
then carry out transportation execution in SAP ERP for the freight orders that were created
during transportation planning.
Note the following:
•
SAP TM creates a Delivery-Based Transportation Requirement (DTR) for each delivery
received from SAP ERP. There is always a one-to-one relationship between an ERP delivery
and a DTR.
•
SAP ERP creates an ERP shipment for each freight order received from SAP TM. There is an
one-to-one relationship between DTRs and a freight order; and. therefore. between the ERP
deliveries that were originally sent to SAP TM and the ERP shipment that SAP ERP creates
based on a freight order.
Outbound integration of shipment processing enables you to do the following:
•
Transfer freight orders from SAP TM to SAP ERP and create shipments in SAP ERP based on
the freight orders.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
275
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
•
Update a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is changed in
SAP TM and the changes are transferred to SAP ERP.
•
Delete a freight-order-based shipment in SAP ERP if the relevant freight order is deleted in
SAP TM.
•
Send a confirmation from SAP ERP to SAP TM when a shipment is created in SAP ERP based
on a freight order in SAP TM.
•
Update the execution status of a freight order in SAP TM based on the overall status of the
corresponding shipment in SAP ERP using a status notification.
•
Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changes to deliveries assigned
to a shipment in SAP ERP.
•
Update a freight order in SAP TM based on a notification about changed item and handling
unit assignments to container handling units of a shipment in SAP ERP.
When the freight order is updated, the related shipment document is updated automatically.
Note:
The outbound integration scenario can also be used when the execution is performed
in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (EWM). instead of SAP ERP. In this case
the EWM system needs the packaging material information for planning purposes.
The necessary information for creating handling units must be sent from SAP TM to
SAP ERP and is essential for scenarios where an EWM system is used to pick/pack/
load.
Process
1. You send ERP deliveries to SAP TM. and the SAP TM system creates DTRs for the deliveries.
2. You plan the transportation process in SAP TM based on the DTRs. During planning, you
create freight orders.
3. You carry out tendering for the freight orders in SAP TM (optional).
4. You send the freight orders to SAP ERP to carry out transportation execution.
5. SAP ERP creates a shipment for each freight order.
276
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
SAP ERP
<,
SAP TM
Create Orders
(SO, PO, STO,
Returns)
Create Orderbased TRQ
'
"'
Create Freight
Units
J,
Perform
Transportation
Planning
u
J,
Create
Deliveries
Create
Delivery
Proposal
Log
Confirmation
Create
Delivery-based
TRQ
.I
Consume
Order-based
TRQ
J,
Adapt
Transportation
Planning
I
I
,I,
,!,
-,
I ngger
Create
Shipments
.,/
-,
Shipment
'
.
Figure 125: Freight Order Based Shipment Creation
In a freight order-based shipment, the freight order can be created using SAP TM. The freight
order creation can be based upon sales orders sent to SAP TM as Order Transportation Requests
(OTRs).
The delivery may be created via the delivery proposal process in SAP TM. The delivery proposal
can be triggered using a batch job or online in the Personal Object Work list (POWL) of the OTR or
in the Transportation Cockpit. When the delivery is created in SAP ERP. the TRDO output is
created. The output triggers the DTR to be created in SAP TM.
Once the DTR is created in SAP TM. the freight order is automatically enabled for shipment
creation.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
277
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Shipment Creation
Different methods to trigger shipment creation from the
freight order
Batch Job Process Freight
Orders
(/SCMTMS/TOR_FO_PROC)
Using the Freight Order UI as
follow up function
Figure 126: Shipment Creation
The shipment can be triggered from SAP TM fright order using the following processes:
•
Batch Job Process Freight Orders (/SCMTMS/TOR_FO_PROC). When you use this report.
you can select freight orders using a selection profile or by specifying selection criteria
explicitly.
•
In the freight order UI, you can choose to trigger the shipment directly.
»
278
Note:
You do not need to be in change mode to trigger this process.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
Freight Order Shipment Integration
TM
ERP
Create I
Update ERP
Shipment
Receive
Confirmation
Output
Create ERP
Shipment
Execute
Shipment
Figure 127: Freight Order Shipment Integration
When integrating the SAP TM freight order with SAP ERP shipment. configure the following
settings:
•
In SAP ERP. determine output condition types for confirmation and status notification
•
Determine partner profile for message type SHPMNT05 with the following message codes:
CRE - to create the SAP ERP shipment the first time
CNF - to process confirmation message. This message updates the shipment number
reference in the TOR Root
STA - to process the status change messages from SAP ERP
UPD - to update the SAP ERP with the changes from SAP TM
•
Generate output condition records from SAP ERP for confirmation and status changes
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
279
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
280
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Exercise 17
Create a Shipment
Business Example
As a transportation planner. you create freight orders in SAP TM from the planning process. Your
company requires the shipment document in SAP ERP to execute warehouse processes.
1. Create a shipment.
2. What is the new Transmission-to-ERP status? (Hint: Go to the Statuses tab.)
3. Review the document flow.
4. What is the shipment number associated with the sales order?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
281
E"
Unit 6
Solution 17
Create a Shipment
Business Example
As a transportation planner. you create freight orders in SAP TM from the planning process. Your
company requires the shipment document in SAP ERP to execute warehouse processes.
L Create a shipment.
a) In NWBC, open the freight order you created during optimizer planning.
b) Choose the Freight Order Management folder and then choose Rced-« Display Road
Freight Order.
c) Enter the ID of your freight order and choose Continue.
d) In the menu bar. choose Edit and then choose Follow Up
---+
Create/Update ERP Shipment.
e) In the popup window. choose OK.
2. What is the new Transmission-to-ERP status? (Hint: Go to the Statuses tab.)
Initial Transmission Started, Not Yet Confirmed by ERP.
3. Review the document flow.
a) Navigate to the Document Flow tab.
Verify that the shipment has been created under Successor Documents.
4. What is the shipment number associated with the sales order?
The same ID as your freight order.
a) Log on to the ZME system (ERP) and launch transaction VA03 (Display Sales Order).
b) Enter VA03 in the Launch field, or in the menu choose Logistics-« Sales and
Distribution -, Sa/es -, Order-, Display.
c) In the Order field. enter the order number of one of the original sales orders on which the
freight order you have been using was based.
d) Choose the Display Document Flow icon.
282
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
Shipment-Based Freight Order Scenarios
Shipment Inbound SceN1rio
'
.,R_
Delivery
Process
IR
Shipment
Processing
Mapping
IDOC
to
Message
�)
Create Update
Shipment
IDOC SHIPMNT05
Cancel Shipment
IDOC TPSSHTO 1
Create Update
Transportation Order
Transportation Order
cancel Transportation
Tor
Tendering
Order
(R
Update Shipment
IDOC SHIPMNT05
R)
I
Mapping
Message
to IDOC
SAP ERP
SAP Pl
SCMCancetatlonRequest
TransportalionOrder
SCMRequest
(R
Update Shipment
Message
TransportatlonOrderSCM
TenderingResultNotlficatlon
Carrier
Selection
Appllcatlon Data
Figure 128: Inbound Shipment Integration
In the shipment-based freight order scenario. the transportation planning functions are carried
out in SAP ERP or a 3rd party logistics system and not in SAP TM. SAP ERP shipments are
created as a result of this process.
The SAP ERP shipment is then integrated with SAP TM for one or more of the following scenarios:
•
To perform tendering functions
•
For freight costing and rating purposes
»
Note:
There is a one-to-one relationship between an SAP ERP shipment and an SAP TM
freight order An SAP TM freight order must be synced with an SAP ERP shipment if it
is used for freight costing purposes.
To carry out the inbound shipment integration. do the following:
•
The shipment to be integrated to SAP TM must have the output created. The output should be
set up to create IDOC of type SHPMNT05
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
283
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
•
SAP Integration system. SAP Pl must be setup to process and map the SHPMNT05 to the
appropriate message for SAPTM
•
Customizing must be established in both SAP ERP and SAP TM
The interface shown in the figure. is based on services (inbound and outbound) in SAP TM and
I Docs in SAP ERP. Pis are connected to an XI system integration process. These services and
I Docs are not covered in this training.
Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
SAP ERP 6.0 (EPHS or
higher)
SAP Pl
Mapping
Cancel
Shipment
Figure 129: Inbound Shipment Integration Message Flow
The figure shows the message flow between SAP ERP and SAP TM. When a shipment's tendering
status is New Offer from the Carrier, the process is triggered. An output generates I Doc
SHMPNT05. which is mapped to an SOA message TransportationOrderSCMRequest_ln. In SAP
TM. during the inbound proxy processing. a freight order is created
You can choose to trigger carrier selection from SAP TM. To do so. specify the means of
transport for the freight order and set up the appropriate transportation lane. Once these settings
are in place, you can trigger the tendering process if the freight order is set up as Relevant for
Subcontracting. The tendering result can be passed to an SAP ERP shipment using the message
TransportationOrderSCMTenderingResultNotification_Out. which can be mapped to
SHPMT.SHPMNT05.
If you have found and accepted a carrier. the enterprise service sends the following data:
•
Carrier
•
Price
•
Confirmed dates and times
•
Tendering status
If you have not found a carrier. the enterprise service sends the corresponding tendering status.
284
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP ERP
If the SAP ERP shipment document already contains a carrier. the carrier information is sent to
SAP TM. Ensure that the carrier partner is Cl Fed from SAP ERP to SAP TM. Once SAP TM
receives the shipment. a freight order is created and the tendering process can be carried out.
During tendering, the carrier can submit a quotation to SAP TM. The price in this quotation can be
passed back to SAP ERP and stored in the shipment document.
Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
SAP Pl
Mapping
Send
Shipment
Create Freight
Order
Figure 130: Freight Costing and Cost Distribution
To integrate SAP ERP shipments to SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution purposes,
create the necessary transportation charge management (TCM) master data, such as
agreements and rate tables: and configure the system for cost distribution and settlement
functions.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
285
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
286
•
Integrate a freight order with a shipment
•
Create a shipment from a freight order
•
Create a freight order from a shipment
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Lesson 5
Executing Transportation in SAP Extended
Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson. we look at integrating SAP EWM based on a shipment. a delivery, and for transit
warehousing.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
Integrate SAP EWM based on a shipment
•
Integrate SAP EWM based on a delivery
,
Integrate SAP EWM for transit warehousing
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
287
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Integration via SAP ERP
l
Release < 9.0
SAP TM
SAP ERP
SAP ERP
Release
•
• SAP EWM
9.0
SAP TM
•
•
SAP ERP
•
• SAP EWM
Figure 131: EWM Integration via ERP Shipments
The integration of SAP TM into the SAP EWM application enables you to integrate SAP TM
transportation planning with SAP ERP delivery and shipment processing and SAP EWM
warehouse planning and execution.
In a first integration. based on release SAP TM 9 0, SAP TM was integrated into SAP EWM via
SAP ERP. In this scenario, data is not sent directly between SAP TM and SAP EWM.
In this process, you plan the transportation in SAP TM based on sales orders created in SAP ERP.
SAP TM proposes and creates deliveries based on dates and quantities according to
transportation planning results. taking into account transportation constraints. such as resource
availability and transportation durations. The SAP TM system sends delivery proposals to SAP
ERP. which creates the deliveries and forwards them to SAP TM and to SAP EWM for further
processing. As a result of the transportation planning in SAP TM. a freight order is created in SAP
TM. The creation of a freight order results in the creation of a shipment in SAP ERP and of a
Transportation Unit (TU) in SAP EWM.
In the warehouse you pick the goods by waves directly into shipping Handling Units (HUs). for
example. pallets. You then stage the shipping HUs and load them into a truck before posting the
goods issue. As a result of the goods issue. the deliveries are updated in SAP ERP for later billing
and the freight order in SAP TM is updated for a later freight cost settlement.
288
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Main Outbound Integration Scenarios Supported with SAP TM-ERP-EWM Integration
1. Outbound process with order-based transportation planning in SAP TM
2. Outbound process with delivery-based transportation planning in SAP TM
3. Outbound process with transportation planning in SAP EWM
4. Deletion of transportation planning
SAPEWM
SAP ERP
SAP TM
Create sales orders
Create OTRs and
rre,ght units
+
Create outbound delivery
requests and outbound ---def,ve,y orders
Create transportaboo
units and perform
warehouse planning
and execuUoo
Create outbound
detivenes
Perform trensoonanon
planning
Create delivery
proposals
Create OTRs
+
Create shipments
Adapt transportat10n
planning (freight
documents)
Perform picking and
packing
Update freight
documents
Post goods issue
Update del,venes and
shipments
•
Perform charge
calculation and freight
settlement
Figure 132: Order Based Transportation Planning in SAP TM
An order-based SAP EWM integration scenario starts with the creation of a sales order. A sales
order in SAP ERP creates an Order-Based Transportation Request (OTR) and associated freight
units in SAP TM. When the Freight Units (FUs) are planned. freight orders are created. Based on
this freight order. outbound deliveries are created in SAP ERP by using the functionality of
delivery proposals.
Outbound deliveries are created in SAP ERP. The outbound delivery is sent to SAP EWM as an
outbound delivery request where an outbound delivery order is created. At the same time it is
also sent to SAP TM where a Delivery Based Transportation Request (DTR) is created, which
consumes the OTR created earlier. The status of the OTR will change to Fully Consumed. The FUs
are updated and transferred to SAP ERP where a shipment is created. The shipment is assigned
the outbound deliveries. The shipment creates a transportation unit in SAP EWM.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
289
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Note:
Now, the freight order and the assigned freight units in SAP TM. the SAP ERP
shipment and the assigned outbound deliveries. the transportation unit and the
assigned outbound delivery order in SAP EWM are synchronized.
The delivery is picked. packed. staged. and loaded in SAP EWM. A goods issue is triggered in SAP
EWM. The goods issue and checkout of the transportation unit result in an update in SAP ERP.
The delivery update means that information about the actual weights. quantities, and packing is
sent from SAP EWM to SAP ERP. The DTR is updated in SAP TM.
When the shipment status is updated. the freight order status is updated to In Execution. The
freight order is executed in SAP TM. Once the execution is complete. the status of the SAP ERP
shipment is updated.
The final step in the process is charge calculation and settlement in SAP TM.
Delivery Based Transportation Planning in SAP TM
SAPEWM
Create outbound delivery
requests and out.bound ----
detrvery orders
SAP ERP
SAP TM
Create out.bound
deliveries lo(
sales orders
Create delrvery-
based transportaUoo
requirements and
freight units
l
Create transportabon
un�s and perfonn
warehouse planning
and execution
Create shipments
c---.-
Perfonn transportatron
planning (create
rreight documents)
Perform prck,ng and
packing
Update freight
documenls
Post goods rssue
j
•
Update dellvenes and
shipments
•
Perform charge
caicutaton and freight
settlement
Figure 133: Delivery Based Transportation Planning in SAP TM
The delivery-based transportation planning process starts with a sales order. The sales order is
not sent through transportation management system. but deliveries are created in SAP ERP. The
deliveries are sent to both SAP TM and SAP EWM. The remainder of the process is the same as
order-based process.
290
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
SAPEWM
...
Create outbound delivery
requests and outbound
delivery orders
SAP ERP
-
SAP TM
I
l
Create outbound
delrvenes for
sates orders
�
!
Create transportation
units
l
PerfOlTTltransporta!Jon
planning and warehouse
planning and execution
Perlorm picking and
packing
•
Post goods issue
Create shipmenls
Create freight orders
4
•
..
Perform charge
calculation and freight
settlement
Figure 134: Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
In the SAP EWM-driven scenario, also known as SAP EWM-based transportation planning, the
transportation planning starts in SAP ERP system with the creation of the sales order and the
creation of outbound deliveries. The outbound deliveries are sent to SAP EWM. but not to SAP
TM. The SAP EWM system performs transportation planning by creating the transportation unit
by itself and assigning the units to it. A goods issue is triggered once the TU is picked. packed.
staged. and loaded.
After the transportation unit is checked out. the delivery is updated and a shipment created in
SAP ERP. The shipment is sent to SAP TM where a freight order is created enabling SAP TM to
perform charge calculation and settlement.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
291
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Deletion of Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
�
-
SAPEWM
SAP ERP
Delete TU
,,,-c::
..
..
..-......__
SAP TM
Delete Shipment
Cancel Freight Order
�
Figure 135: Deletion or Transportation Planning in SAP EWM
Sometimes. a Transportation Unit (TU) in SAP EWM cannot be executed as planned. In such
circumstances, the TU is deleted, thus deleting the shipment and, depending on how the freight
order is configured in SAP TM. either deleting or canceling the freight order.
The deletion or cancellation of a freight order enables SAP TM to perform the planning and start
the process again. This process is called deletion of transportation planning.
292
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Direct Integration
I
Release 9.1
-
SAP ERP
SAP TM
I
SAP EWM
Release 9.0
SAP TM
SAP ERP
--
I
·-·
SAP EWM
.
SAP EWM
Release < 9.0
SAP TM
• SAP ERP
'
SAP ERP
Figure 136: Direct EWM Integration
Since release 9.1. a direct integration between SAP TM and SAP EWM is available. and SAP ERP
shipments are no longer required for integration. Communication is now carried out between SAP
TM and SAP EWM directly. via services.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
293
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Process Flow in System Landscape Outbound Process
SAP Enterprise Resource Planning
Customer order
Delivery
SAP Transportation
Management
SAP Extended
Warehouse Management
Transportation Planning
)
Freight Order Mgmt.
Freight Settlement
•
•• •• •
{
Picking
Packing
Staging
Loading
Goods Issue
Supply Chain Execution Platform
111 ••
I ••
figure 137: Process flow in System landscape Outbound Process
This system setup enables end-to-end integrated transportation planning, warehouse execution.
and freight settlement by way of a direct interface between SAP TM and SAP EWM.
SAP TM and SAP EWM are part of the supply chain execution platform. Customer orders and
delivery orders are generated in SAP ERP. The transportation planning occurs in the SAP TM. The
result of the planning is a freight order. This freight order is transferred to SAP EWM directly.
SAP EWM is responsible for operations such as picking. packing. and staging from the
warehouse. The goods are loaded onto the truck. Once loading is complete. the transport is ready
for execution and sent back to SAP TM. In SAP TM. the execution is processed. After successful
execution, the freight order is settled in SAP TM.
Integrate Best-in-Class Applications
The SAP EWM-SAP TM integration allows a tight integration of master data and Customizing
between two systems. The communication occurs by way of the exchange infrastructure (XI).
With the update to 9.1. the views for Customizing have not changed, so administrators can still
use the same screens. Existing integration features of the release 9.0. are still available in SAP TM
9.1.
294
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Note:
Besides freight orders, direct integration with SAP EWM is also supported for freight
bookings and transportation units.
Order
Processing
(ERP)
)
• Sales order or
delivery creation
{SAP ERP)
Transportation
Planning
(TM)
)
• Interactive I
automatic
transportation
planning
• Carrier selection
Warehouse
Execution
(EWM)
)
• Wave creation
• Cartonization
planning
Transport
Execution
(TM)
)
• Shipment status
check
• Shipment
• Automatic
execution
• Picking
transportation
monitoring and
optimization,
request creation • Carrier tendering
packing, staging event tracking
(SAP TM)
and load
• Freight order
management
• Automatic freight
creation
unit creation
• Value-added
• Automatic delivery
{SAP TM)
services
creation in ERP
• Waybill print
Freight Order
Settlement
(TM I ERP)
• Transportation
charge
calculation
• Freight invoice
request creation
and transfer to
ERP
Integrated Outbound Process TM - EWM
Figure 138: Integrate Best-m-Ctass Applications
When you plan to send goods from several outbound delivery documents with the same
transport. transportation planning in SAP TM is based on SAP ERP sales orders or deliveries. SAP
TM sends the transportation planning results to SAP EWM. The information from SAP TM is
mapped into corresponding TU or vehicle activities. Building rules are not used in SAP EWM.
After the warehouse execution. the transport information is communicated from SAP EWM to
SAP TM to carry out transport execution and freight settlement in SAP TM. The communication
back to SAP TM is triggered on goods issue of the TU. and contains information about what is
loaded on the TUs that are posted goods issue.
Note:
Delivery-based outbound transportation planning in SAP TM is also supported for
outbound deliveries created in SAP EWM (DirODO). SAP EWM Customizing enables
the setting of a TM-relevant transportation planning types and therefore the
assignment of such deliveries to TUs created from SAP TM.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
295
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Main Process Steps of Order-Based Outbound Transportation Planning
SAP TM
Create
Freight Units
...
....
Perform
Transportation
Planning
....
-
Receive
OTR
I
SAP ERP
SAPEWM
Create
Order(SO)
Outbound
Delivery
Request
Create
Freight Order
•
,&,.
Create
Outbound
Deliveries
Trigger
er-lion
Outbound
Delivery Order
""
�
Receive DTR '•
-
Consume OTR
Ii
Update
Freinht Units
. FO Status: Ready �
Freight Order
for (un)loading
I
.I.
TUNehicie
Activity
Picking
FO Status: In Executiorij
Finalize Execution
Frei lht Order
FO Status: Completed"]
Transportation
Cha� Man�ernent
.L
I
Packing
I
Staging
,l.
' r
Check-In
Update
Delivery
Update Freight Order
'.:
.I.
l
Update DTR , •
-
•
I
4
�
I
.I.
�-
Loading
y
•
•
Goods Issue
••
Check-Out
figure 139: Outbound Process
The main process steps of order-cased outbound transportation planning are as follows:
l. SAP TM receives sales orders or deliveries from SAP ERP and creates corresponding
transportation requirements and freight units.
2. Based on transportation requirements. transportation is planned. freight orders are created in
SAP TM.
3. When transportation planning is based on sales orders. SAP TM creates deliveries in SAP
ERP.
4. SAP ERP distributes outbound deliveries to SAP EWM and SAP EWM generates
corresponding warehouse requests of the type outbound delivery order automatically.
5. Based on the freight order information, a message is sent from SAP TM to SAP EWM directly,
where a vehicle or a TU and a planned shipping and receiving activity is created automatically.
and the outbound delivery orders are assigned to the TU activity.
6. Perform the warehouse activities related to the outbound delivery orders such as picking,
packing, staging, and loading the goods. Note that all warehouse activities except loading can
be performed before arrival of the TU to the door.
296
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
7. Execute the action Arrival at Checkpoint for the vehicle or the TU. The system changes the
status of the shipping and receiving activity automatically from Planned to Active.
8. Assign a door to the vehicle or the TU.
9. If yard management is active. move the vehicle or the TU from the yard to the assigned door.
If yard management is not active. execute the action Arrival at Door for the TU.
10. Perform the warehouse activities such as loading the goods. posting the goods issue. and
printing the transportation documents.
11. With the goods issue posting in SAP EWM, the delivery information is transferred to SAP ERP,
where the deliveries are updated automatically with the execution data. The information is
forwarded from SAP ERP to SAP TM. where the corresponding delivery-based transportation
requirement (DTR) is updated automatically.
12. With the goods issue posting in SAP EWM, the transport-relevant information is sent from
SAP EWM to SAP TM automatically, where the freight order is updated with the execution and
status data (for example. the stop of the freight order is set to Departed; loaded items are set
to Loaded).
13. If yard management is active. move the vehicle or the TU from the door to the yard. If yard
management is not active. execute the action Departure from Door for the vehicle or the TU.
14. Execute the action Departure from Checkpoint for the vehicle or the TU. SAP EWM
automatically changes the status of the shipping and receiving activity from Active to
Completed.
15. Set the execution status of the SAP TM freight order to Completed if this was not set
automatically in the previous step.
16. Carry out the freight settlement In SAP TM. The freight settlement document in SAP TM is the
basis for the invoice verification and settlement in SAP ERP.
Inbound Process
In delivery-based planning. the deliveries are already created in SAP ERP based on the sales
orders.
The communication between SAP TM and SAP EWM is the same for delivery-based planning as
for order-based transportation planning.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
297
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
SAP TM
SAP ERP
SAPEWM
•
Receive DTR
.
Create
Freight UnHs
•
..
Create
Purchase Order
Inbound
Delivery
Notification
.L
J.
Create Inbound
Deliveries
Inbound
Delivery
.I.
Perform
Transportation
Planning
.
-
TUNehide
Activity
.I.
Create
Freig,t Order
Check-In
J.
Unloading
Send
Unloading
Instruction
.I.
: Goods Receipt
J.
Putaway
Update DTR
Update
Delivery
•
.
J.
Check-Out
Figure 140: Inbound Process
As in the delivery·based outbound transportation planning, a transport planner plans inbound
deliveries in SAP TM and sends a message for warehouse execution to SAP EWM. The creation of
TUs or Vehicles with their assignments to the inbound deliveries is also automatic.
The unloading of the transportation unit should be sent from SAP EWM to SAP TM to update the
freight order. This communication step is new compared to release 9.0.
298
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Transit Warehousing
SAP Enterprise Resource Planning
Customer orEier
,--Oeli"9A'
-.PJ
Forwarding Order Mgmt.
Transportation Planning
Freight Order Mgmt.
Freight Settlement
(
Picking
Packing
Staging
Loading
Goods Issue
J
Figure !41: Direct SAP TM - SAP EWM Integration for Logistic Service Providers (Transit Warehousing)
With release 9.3. the integration of SAP Transportation Management (SAP TM) and SAP
Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM) has been further enhanced, and the integration is
now possible without an SAP ERP system. While with 9.1 integration was achieved directly
between SAP TM and SAP EWM. the integration was still based on SAP ERP deliveries. This
scenario, therefore. supported only shippers that use SAP ERP logistics integration in SAP TM.
Transit Warehousing now supports direct SAP TM - SAP EWM integration. without predecessor
documents in SAP ERP. Instead, the process can be based on Forwarding Orders (FWOs) and.
therefore, supports Logistic Service Providers. You perform transportation planning in SAP TM.
and then send your freight documents and transportation units to SAP EWM. In SAP EWM. you
then execute the warehouse tasks. such as picking. packing, staging. and loading or unloading.
You execute the settlement in SAP TM.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
299
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Integrated Planning and Execution
�.,.
Shipper 1
Shlpper2
�'
.,�
Consignee 1
!ft �
•
••m:' .�·
lld'il..
SAP EWM
SAP TM
Package tracking over complex
transport net
Transparency on warehouse data
Send (un)loading instruction
to SAP EWM
Packages instead of products
• Receive, unload, putaway,
consolidate, pack, stage, load
Dock/undock to door
Check-in/check-out
Enter/change attributes
(driver, license plate, and so on)
Send (un)loading report to SAP TM
Figure 142: Integrated Planning and Execution
Transit Warehousing enables a seamless integration of the planned (system-based) flow of goods
in SAP TM and the physical (system-based) flow of goods in SAP EWM across the entire
transportation chain.
By integrating the two systems. you gain transparency on warehouse data in SAP TM, for
example. whether a truck has been loaded or unloaded in SAP EWM. and whether discrepancies
exist. for example. quantity discrepancies.
In this process. you can temporarily store the cargo in transit warehouses, regional hubs,
gateways (air freight) or container freight stations (ocean freight) until it is shipped to the next
location. You can also organize the cargo across the entire transportation chain and gain
transparency with regard to the specific warehouse data. The process of handling cargo at one
location can be repeated at several locations.
In SAP EWM. processing is based on business documents that are created via the loading and
unloading instructions from SAP TM. In addition. the warehouse layout is configured in
accordance with the requirements of transit warehousing. For example. special warehouse types
are available and a product master is no longer required. The handling of the cargo is carried out
on package level instead of product level.
300
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Process and Document Overview
�
.,, -.-------1
Forwarding
Order 2101
Carrier
Freight Forwarder
Freight Forwarder
..._..
Customer....--
or
zed
FrelgntOnler
1103
""
..
�
Freight
Boolang
6301
Transit
Warehouse
SHIP01
i
•I
Gattway/
CFS
I
�,_.,
P,ckup.
F�1
Order
6101
Orayage
Freight Order
6104
�:�
,
-
-,
Ordef6105
PICkup.
Fre,ght Order
6102
Customer
t
FNight Order
��11108
Gateway/
CFS
--
Transit
Warehouse
.....,.
COHS01
DelIvery
,191g11ton11r
__,-
1107
Sl«P03
•I
SHIP02
CONS02
Forw11rdlng
Order 2103
Dellvery
Freight Order
810I
Figure 143: Process and Document Overview
In this process example shown in the figure, Process and Document Overview, there are several
FWOs from different shippers to different consignees.
The ocean or air main leg is covered by a Freight Booking (FB). The pickup, drayage, and delivery
legs are covered by separate Freight Orders (FOs). In between, goods are shipped through a
transit warehouse, gateway. or Container Freight Station (CFS). where they are unloaded from
the vehicle resource and loaded to the next vehicle resource.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
301
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Integrated Process
SAP TM
Planned (1y1tem based) Cargo Flow
\,
Shipper
BU
�
�
Tokyo
· � .:;..... �;..
G,e11tw1yJCFSM-pol'l#
,...,.
l"'
L
i
Abpc::•U
C..w.y/CFS
��
�
·-
Transfer
�.........;.au
Consignff
�
Tucson
Transfer
.
.
SAP EWM
i
i
"!<
lW
GlW
Tokyo
IMrltl
GlW
Loa
Angeles
__...,.
lW
Sin
Diego
Physlcal Cargo Flow
figure 144: Integrated Process
The example process shown in the figure, Integrated Process. is supported by integrating SAP
TM with SAP EWM using the transit warehousing scenario.
The first relevant integration point is the unloading of goods at the transit warehouse TW Tokyo
after the pick-up stage. The pick-up location in Tokyo is managed by the shipper. At the same
transit warehouse TW Tokyo. the goods are loaded onto the next truck for the feeding pre·
carriage leg. Both the inbound (unloading) and the outbound (loading) process are supported.
In the following stages of the transportation chain. further transit warehouses and gateways are
passed through in the same manner.
The last integration point is the loading of goods at TW San Diego for the delivery leg. The delivery
location in Tucson is managed by the consignee.
302
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Process Flow
Transportallon Mlln"!loment
extended warehOuse INln"!loment
F'orwardr!g Order
T11nsportalion
Plonoilg
Fle<,illl Ooc,,,,.,111
){'"$""}-1uni.oo.-ig1n,rud..,.._l
t-� r,:'
(VP<f;IIOJ
I
Frec,n1 ooc,,n...,
f
IVpdatet
1'1�""
\Un)l-.0 Ne,,
n)L..� lloilfiQlion
Frl.'lgh1 tlooJmett
11 H.,,c,119un1• I I
/ Tru<Jt. M Nall
\OoolAs!:onml'rll
Oolll'OIY
I
l
,un�o><lno.
r Goodstsiue/
J
\
R9CO>l>C
I
I Excopuon Hendlng )
l
,u,,.,.,..
FOJ\\..,dillg O'°" /
fre9'11Doatnerc
I
IVIXlalel
F1e,ghl OocLfflOl'I
f
IU•Jt ..di19
N°'�""IO
(llll<k
D@pMIUrt }
Figure 145: Process Flow
In an inbound scenario. the processes Receive from shipper. Receive from other transit warehouse
and Receive from airport/seaport (drayage) are supported.
The customer service agent creates a forwarding order in SAP TM.
The transportation planner creates an actual route manually or has the system determine this
route. The actual route contains one or more locations that are relevant for transit warehousing.
A location is relevant for transit warehousing if you have entered a warehouse number and a
logical system (SAP EWM system) in the location master data.
From the forwarding order, the transportation planner creates a freight order for picking up the
goods at the shipper and transporting them to the transit warehouse. Afterwards. the
transportation planner sets the execution status of the freight order to Ready for Transportation
Execution. which means that the transportation activities can start. Finally. the transportation
planner sets the cargo execution status of the freight order for the transit warehouse to Cargo
Ready for Unloading. The system sends an unloading instruction to SAP EWM.
On receipt of the message, SAP EWM generates a transportation unit and the corresponding
handling units and an inbound delivery.
On arrival of the truck on the yard. the warehouse staff log the arrival of the truck and assign it to
a door. SAP EWM sends a notification to SAP TM. On receiving the message. the freight
document is updated with the information about the arrival of the truck.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
303
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
The warehouse staff unload the truck and posts goods receipt. When the freight is fully received.
SAP EWM sends an unloading report to SAP TM. On receiving the message, the freight order and
the freight units are updated with the information about the received cargo.
In case of exceptions. exception handling is processed.
The SAP EWM transmission status on SAP TM freight documents provides information about the
status of the message exchange.
In SAP EWM. new Uls for inbound handling were implemented. for Freight Order Inbound.
Unloading Preparation. and Stock List. These new Uls display SAP EWM information for the
underlying SAP TM freight documents. It is possible to navigate directly to the SAP TM
documents.
In addition. new RF-transactions were implemented for receiving and putaway.
In an outbound scenario. the processes Deliver to consignee. Send to other transit warehouse and
Send to airport/seaport (drayage) are supported.
In SAP TM. a forwarding order is created and planned as described in the inbound scenario.
Afterwards. an unloading list is created based on a freight document. The transportation planner
sets the execution status of the freight document to Ready for execution. that is, the
transportation activities can begin. The transportation planner sets the cargo execution status of
the freight document to the transit warehouse on cargo ready for loading. The system sends a
loading instruction to SAP EWM.
On receipt of the message, SAP EWM generates a transportation unit and an outbound delivery
order and assigns the corresponding handling units to the outbound delivery order.
On arrival of the truck on the yard. the warehouse staff log the arrival of the truck and assign it to
a door. SAP EWM sends a notification to SAP TM. On receiving the message. the freight
document is updated with the information about the arrival of the truck.
The warehouse staff take the handling units to the staging area.
The warehouse staff load the truck. SAP EWM sends a loading report to SAP TM. On receiving the
message, the freight order and the freight units are updated with the information about the
loaded cargo.
The warehouse staff log the departure of the truck and post goods issue. SAP EWM sends
another message to SAP TM. On receiving the message. the freight order is updated in SAP TM.
In case of exceptions. exception handling is processed.
The SAP EWM transmission status on SAP TM freight documents provides information about the
status of the message exchange.
In SAP EWM. new Uls for outbound handling were implemented. for Freight Order Outbound and
Loading Preparation. These new Uls display SAP EWM information for the underlying SAP TM
freight documents. It is possible to navigate directly to the SAP TM documents.
In addition, new RF-transactions for were implemented for packing and loading.
304
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Executing Transportation in SAP Extended Warehouse Management (SAP EWM)
Integration Highlights
"
Features
Multi-Document Handling
(for example, Truck & Trailer)
Vehic,_
Jr , rai�
Untt Types
Multiple (Delta) Updates
Enhanced Discrepancy Handling
Support of late FU Splits (in Execution)
Backward Propagation of
EWM Confirmation data in SAP TM
Support of EWM Handling Units
across Freight Units
• Truck
Truck & Trailer
Truck & Swap body
Truck & Container
• Freight Booking
Freight Booking & Container
Cross-System Document Flow
Search Documents by Handling Unit ID
Figure !46: Integration Highlights
The direct integration of SAP TM into SAP EWM was enhanced with many features. which
enhance the existing integration scenario for shippers. Some of the new features are as follows:
Multi-Document Handling
Transit warehousing supports planning and execution with trailers. The data that is returned
from SAP EWM is reported back to all the related business documents across multiple levels.
that is. not only to the freight order but also to one or more trailer units and freight units.
Truck & Trailer
Transit warehousing supports planning and execution with trailers. The data that is returned
from SAP EWM is reported back to all the related business documents across multiple levels.
that is, not only to the freight order but also to one or more trailer units and freight units.
Prerequisites for Truck & Trailer
In the resource master data you have defined an active vehicle resource for your truck and a
passive vehicle resource for your trailer.
You have maintained the necessary settings in the customizing for your transportation unit
type.
The trailer must have been coupled to the truck before the execution of warehouse tasks.
Multiple (Delta) Updates
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
305
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
As a new feature. it is now also possible to transfer multiple updates. It is possible to receive
a new (delta) Loading/Unloading Report in SAP TM from SAP EWM. The Loading/Unloading
Report contains only new or updated information of the already loaded or unloaded handling
units.
Enhanced Discrepancy Handling
It is possible to react to discrepancies reported from SAP EWM with different actions. which
are supported from a POWL.
Support of late FU Splits (in Execution)
It is possible to react to warehouse confirmations with FU splits. even when execution has
already started.
Backward Propagation
Confirmation data from SAP EWM can be propagated backwards to predecessor
documents.
Support of SAP EWM Handling Units across Freight Units
It is possible to process SAP EWM handling units that include items of several freight units
(Cross FU-Handling).
Cross-System Document Flow
The document flow of the freight order. freight booking. or trailer unit was enhanced with
SAP EWM entries. It is possible to navigate directly to the corresponding SAP EWM
transaction from the SAP TM document flow.
Search Documents by Handling Unit ID
It is possible to search for freight documents using the SAP EWM HU ID.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
306
•
Integrate SAP EWM based on a shipment
•
Integrate SAP EWM based on a delivery
•
Integrate SAP EWM for transit warehousing
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Lesson 6
Generating Outputs
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson. you learn about the control of output documents in SAP TM. which are essential to
maintaining a smooth and transparent transportation process.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
Generate outputs
Output Management
Whether managing orders. planning. subcontracting. executing shipments or settling freight
orders. each of the users and managers involved need task documentation. or need to be notified
of the progress of a task. In addition. users need to preview or review the results of business
process activities and generate automated outputs in response to various business events. SAP
TM output management is an important player in keeping your business processes flowing and in
sync. Automation is key but it is also possible to revert to manual control of printing. faxing, and
e-mailing output documents.
Note:
A bill of lading is a document that serves as a receipt or contract between shipper and
carrier. It carries information such as shipper details, consignee details. details in
relation to the goods being transported, PO number. and so on.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
307
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Stllpplng
Labels
lmtrutdOM
I
Output
Management
Adapter
8u•lnfft
lnt..lgfflC•
Tendering
Offer
Figure 147: Output Management
SAP TM is equipped with several standard output types. such as external communication and
alert notification. Several other tools and methods may also be utilized.
For external communication. your business can use standard printing. fax. and e-mail with a
document preview option. For internal communication, alert management options are available,
and workflow can be used to pass requirements from one business process step to another.
Communication with 828 systems is also available in situations such as tendering freight orders
when a bidding or purchasing activity is present.
Bl data uploads can be executed to provide management reporting on various documents like
freight units. freight orders. and freight bookings.
Various order events can trigger communication to event management systems to make crosssystem activities transparent. While SAP TM has its own internal status, when integrating with
systems such as SAP ERP or EWM, cross-system communication is necessary to gain visibility of
the big picture.
308
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Generating Outputs
Output in SAP TM Documents
"
Customer
(External System)
Create and
Send Order
Approval
Work flow
Carrier
(Third Pam,)
ecerve
r---....i Forwarding
1----�
Order
Calculate
Customer
Charges, send
Confirmation
Receive
Confirmation
Transportation
Planning
Create
Freight Orders
Settlement I
Invoice
Verification
Transportation
Execution
--------+!
Calculate
PrinUEmail/Fax
Freight Settlement
Document
Cupplier
Charges
Confirm
Order,
Provide
Tracking
Updates
F igure 148: Apphcations of Output Management
The figure Applications of Output Management depicts a possible example of output
management using SAP TM in an LSP scenario. Once a customer places a transportation request
with a freight forwarder. a forwarding order is created. The confirmed forwarding order
documents can be printed or sent to the customer by email. If necessary, this can trigger a
workflow process to seek management approval. This could be the case if you wanted to ship a
product to a country that may be subject to government sanctions· the legal department would
therefore need to review it before it ships.
Once planning is complete, the freight forwarder can tender the shipment to a carrier via 828 or
other means. This could include a request for quote. particularly if this type of job has not been
contracted before. or if costs have undergone significant change due to economic conditions. The
carrier can reply using conventional or electronic means. depending on the technology available
to them. Once the order has been shipped in SAP TM. the settlement documents can trigger the
generation of freight invoices. and (if the costs that were agreed are relevant) the invoice
verification process can be activated.
Output Management Features
SAP TM can generate various different outputs. Outputs can be scheduled at various times and
later executed depending on the business scenarios and the lifecycle status. and start conditions.
This can also be done manually from the UI. Outputs can be partner-dependent or independent.
Partner-dependent output is triggered based on partner data from the business documents.
Actions and output parameters can be set as per business partner (in transaction BP) for
partner-dependent outputs.
Users can preview or print documents such as bills of lading. master airway bills. house bills of
lading. shipping instructions. and packing labels.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
309
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Freight Order
Settings
Schedule Conditions
Output Managemen1
Document
Previews
Notes
Personalized
Mail Content
Attachments
Figure 149: Output Management Features
Output Management Activities
Within SAP TM documents such as freight units, freight orders. forwarding orders, and freight
bookings. you can view and manage output using the Output Management tab.
The following activities are possible:
•
Choose output medium - print, fax. e-mail
•
Modify output parameters like printer, number of print copies. language. recipients
•
Enter an e-mail subject and (personalized) mail content
•
Add attachments
•
Activate and deactivate outputs
•
Edit documents before execution (in case of interactive forms)
The outputs that can be generated for a business document are defined in an output profile.
which is assigned in the business document type Customizing.
Processing Multiple Orders
In the case of a forwarding order, you can select multiple orders from the worklist. You can then
choose the actions for which to execute mass outputs. and perform mass execution of the
unprocessed actions. You can choose which output device to use from the profile data or the Post
Processing Framework (PPF) configuration.
Print Documents
In the standard system. you can use an automated output for printing documents that are based
on freight bookings. You can also manually print documents based on freight bookings.
For example, you can use the print documents in the following list with the Air Freight Booking
business document.
310
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Generating Outputs
Print Documents for an Air Freight Booking
•
Cargo manifest
•
Cargo manifest with addresses
•
House air waybill
•
Loading/unloading instructions
•
Master air waybill
•
Master air waybill label
•
Security manifest
•
ULD manifest
•
ULD tag
You can use the print documents in the following list with the Road Freight Orders.
Print Documents for a Road Freight Order
•
Road waybill (Europe)
•
Shipping instruction
•
Label for packaging
•
Shipping manifest
•
Road waybill (US)
In addition, there are print documents for forwarding orders. freight units. and sea freight
bookings.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Generate outputs
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
311
E"
Unit 6
Lesson 7
Monitoring Transportation Events
LESSON OVERVIEW
The shipping process involves activities and procedures spread across several distributed
systems. From a monitoring perspective, this increases the challenge of successfully monitoring
the progress of individual parts of the overall process In this lesson, you will learn how your
company can overcome these difficulties by using the SAP Event Manager (EM) tool.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
View a freight order event
•
Describe visibility scenarios
•
Monitor the freight order process
Event Management
Nowadays. supply chains are global and complex. End-to-end supply chain visibility is one of the
key factors in efficient supply chain operation and control. SAP Event Management is the only
application needed to provide this visibility. since it is available to all partners. including
customers. SAP Event Management can also work with multiple SAP and non-SAP applications.
Interconnected operations of
business 11artners
• lncr�a-slng eros.s·eotnpany
dependencies requires advanced IT
• Not just shipment status. but
operational,
demand data
inventory, POS, and
Need to coordinate across
multiple IT environments
• Multipl& ERP and see systems
Multiple governmen1 and 3rd party
systems
• Multiple technologies and architectures
Figure 150: Visibility Across Business Partners And IT Environments
312
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
As companies expand their suite of IT products to handle more complex scenarios. they often
have to add systems to their ERP environment. This makes it difficult for business users and
management to gain a complete view of end-to-end processes and monitor potential service
issues. Therefore. it is imperative to have a tool that can incorporate information from several
systems and provide insight into how order fulfillment is progressing.
SAP Event Management makes processes. assets, and performance visible across the entire
supply chain. Extensive tracking and tracing functions allow process monitoring, automated
exception resolution. proactive alerting. as well as extensive reporting in a single solution
The event management system is designed to work with several SAP ERP instances. if necessary.
It can communicate with SAP CRM, where sales orders may be received. and this communication
is processed back to the customer to support order fulfillment. SAP Advanced Planning and
Optimization (APO) may be responsible for creating the replenishment plan. SAP ERP or SAP
Manufacturing Execution (ME) may be responsible for communication and tracking progress on
the shop floor. SAP EWM (Extended Warehouse Management) may be responsible for the picking
and packing as part of the logistics execution.
Event Management in SAP TM
SAP Event Management offers visibility processes to monitor transportation execution in
connection with SAP TM. The transportation execution visibility processes enable users in roles
such as transportation dispatcher. shipper. or ordering party. to track and monitor planned
events or to report an actual event. Tracking and tracing is provided for the following business
document types in SAP TM:
•
Freight unit
•
Freight order
•
Freight booking
•
Transportation unit
•
Resource
•
Instruction execution for standard operating procedures
In each case, the goal is to manage by exception, reduce time to action. and spend less time firefighting.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
313
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Event Management Process
'
1. Monitor
. --,
r·---
...,
... .
2. Notify
----
r........_..- [._,
.....
- ....... .... . ..,.. ._-... --.I
J
.
4
Alerts
,
ADAPTIVE
Learn
Simulate
Control
-
Plan/Schedule
-
E
Partner
•
Performance •
rra=:-==�
- ·1 I
•
4. Analyze
-.
Collaborate
3. Adjust
Figure 151: Related Events - SAP Event Management
Monitor. notify. analyze and adjust - these are the four cornerstones of SAP Event Management.
and they contribute to providing an adaptive solution. The monitoring process collects data from
the various source systems. Notifications can be set up to be triggered. with alerts sent to the
parties responsible if a process deviates from its anticipated course. Based on the alerts. the
appropriate parties can then simulate adjustments and make any necessary changes. Finally, in
relation to analytics. SAP Event Management can be tied into the SAP NetWeaver BW
environment to support transportation management reviews.
314
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
Event Types
"
·,
"" .
Unloading Truck
�=:::::::_._---�-
Late Departure
-----
•
Regular
Event
No POD sent
Reported Events
Early/
Late
Event
Unexpected Unreported
Event
Event
Expected Events (Process Milestones)
.,, Process Lifecycle in Operational System -,
"'.:.k==
Figure 152: Monitoring Types Of Events
SAP Event Management is capable of processing several different types of events. Within a given
process. you have events that you expect to happen. and events that actually happen. Typically,
you want to compare the actual event against what you expected. as follows:
•
Regular Event
The first type of event is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame.
and it happens as expected. This is a regular event.
•
Overdue Event
This is an event that you expect to happen within a particular time frame. and it happens
outside the expected time frame. An overdue event can cause a subsequent event to be
rescheduled. or it could just be recorded as an overdue event.
•
Unexpected Event
The third type of event is one that is unexpected. This could be a truck that breaking down or a
malfunction in a piece of equipment; something that could potentially have an effect on
subsequent events. causing something to be rescheduled or another action to be taken. An
unexpected event could trigger an alert or another type of notification.
•
Unreported Event
In this case. you expect an event to occur within a particular time frame. but for whatever
reason. it is not reported. It is possible that something still needs to happen following this
event. so you could set a time limit that sends a message or triggers something to happen
when the event is unreported for a certain time period.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
315
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
SAP TM Monitoring Scenarios
Transportation operations is an area in which transparency is crucial. especially in those cases
where lengthy transportation times have to be considered. such as when shipping overseas. To
ensure customer satisfaction. it is more important than ever to keep full control of what is going
on, even if parts of the business process may run outside your company's sphere of influence.
Visibility processes for transportation management offer preconfigured, out-of-the box content
for transportation operations. supporting you in tracking relevant activities within and beyond the
confines of your company. You can monitor different processes and business documents, such
as freight units. freight orders and freight bookings. Depending on your role. you can choose
different layouts for the user interface. such as shipper and consignee. which result in a
comprehensive and easy to understand view of transportation operations.
Shipper I Consignee (Ordering Party I Transportation Dispatcher)
Shipper I
Ordering Party
ERP Order
Consignee
Transportation Execution Vlslblllty
Forwarding
Order
�
(;E:J
--.1-r
LocA LocZ
Clear Customs Delay
I I I � I
I
I
I
Loading/ Arnval/
Arnval/Unloading·t Arnval/Unloading/
POD
Pickup/
Unloading•/ Loading'/
Event Handler for
Departure Loading•/ Departure
Departure
Freight Order/Booking
I
Delay/Damage
Scheduled
• optional
�
I
Loading/ Arrival/Unload,ng'/· Arrival/Unloading
Departure Loading•/Departure
Event Handler for Freight/Transportation Unit
figure 153: Visibility for Transportation Execution
The figure Visibility for Transportation Execution depicts a realistic scenario in which SAP TM and
SAP Event Management can be integrated to monitor an end-to-end international order. In the
first step of the process. the order is created in SAP ERP and sent to SAP TM. At this point. a
freight unit is created and scheduling can begin.
Initial SAP EM Events
The initial events in SAP Event Management are created as shown in the figure Initial SAP EM
Events.
316
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
•
Loading
•
Shipment departure from shipping facility
•
Arrival at customs
•
Off-loading of trucking carriage
•
Loading onto the container ship
•
Departure of the container ship
•
Arrival at destination port
•
Unloading of container from ship
•
Loading onto carriage
•
Departure from port
•
Arrival at customer location
Figure 154: Initial SAP EM Events
Process Flow
SAP TM
creates event handler
Received events update
business document data
SAP EM
Freight Order
Freight Order
--• Event Handler
Cre�ted
Created
Update
Event
Freight
01'9er
•
Business documents
send events
User queries retrieve
tracking data
Confirm
Departure
Retrieve
Query
Freight Order
and Display ....---.
.
- Tracking
FOR Status
Data
•
.
Events trigger notifications
.• Carrier reports
loading
Carrier reports
departure
Carrier reports
import arrival
..
Overdue events raise alerts
Alert
Delay
--· Dela
A
.
Consignee
Notification
Figure 155: Visiburty Processes for Transportation and Event Management - Process Flow
The figure Visibility Processes for Transportation and Event Management· Process Flow shows a
typical scenario in which the SAP EM and SAP TM systems are updated to accurately reflect the
real world progress of a freight order.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
317
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Alerts
During the loading process. SAP ERP or SAP EWM may send a signal (notification) that there is a
delay in the loading process. This can trigger an alert. The transportation planner may have to
make adjustments to the schedule to ensure that the container makes it to the ship on time. Once
the ship has left the departure port. GPS updates may indicate that the ship has not reached its
midway point. This could be due to weather or mechanical issues. The customer service agent
can be notified and can contact the customer to inform them of anticipated delays.
Due to the alert system, the planning team does not have to watch over every order. They can
spend most of their time managing exceptions.
Event Message
Voice
,.
___ Capability
If event code = 'Delay' the';;
inform partner
E-Mail
0- � .,......, .,...., "•- 1- 6<- I.Y'D
e, Qi, • 00! O.,.. X I ,1. �� 1
NMI
•IV•A,NIU-·llli:5:
g..
"··· I
., '
••O••
1..W,1N.-•1� ,._
IOCO<I �·nnor ... • .p.....Q!•• f10., •""t ,,__,......_.. ,o;,.._d
°" twn.
"'"'•' ••o••d•, vo.. e;.,...,..,
Figure 156: Alerting Business Partners
Note:
The alert framework is provided as part of SAP NetWeaver Application Server. The
application must define its own alert categories and implement the triggering of the
alert instances to realize Alert Management. Alerts can also be triggered by external
alert providers. They are sent to the alert in boxes of the alert recipients, but can also
be sent through other channels. such as e-mail and SMS, or sent to external alert
systems. You must configure and schedule the processing of the alerts to meet your
requirements.
SAP Event Management UI
SAP Event Management is delivered with out·of·the·box content for transportation operations
and global trade. Users can save their favorite searches on the Web UI. In addition, an archiving
concept and logic tailored to high volume processes are available. Archived data can now also be
accessed from the Web UI.
318
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
The SAP Event Management Web front end can be configured easily, and includes the following
elements:
,
Selection screen
•
Results list
•
Details display
•
Event details display
•
Event messages that can be sent
Mobile Tracking and Tracing
--·-··- -.·.. . ··-)
�
t/
(9
0
•
.
-�....
..,_..
•1.1100•
) ,,.......
��
-· ••
---·- ·- .·-·
.
.
-·
... ,o.,
,....,.
'
Ill •
"er_=
-· r--_
·�.;,,..:;;,_1D::I:l :::i:::JI
• ' N-
-----
t, :,,
"'"
w-•
.;;.
""'
i • I '
·-&ca
Business Process
SAP Transport Tracker
SAP TM
SAP TM
Receive
Freight
Order
/Tour
Execute
Tour
Send
Status
via
Events
Figure 157: Mobile Tracking And Tracing
With the SAP TM Notifier App, you can display freight order details and report the status of your
delivery using predefined events on your mobile device. Mobile devices provide planning
information for the driver. and execution information back to the planner from the driver.
Mobile tracking enables users by being able to do the following:
,
Display open freight orders that are valid within a certain time frame
,
Display details of a freight order
,
Display details of a stop
,
Display freight units for a stop
•
Display events for a stop
,
Display information about a freight order on a map
,
Confirm an event for a stop after completing the corresponding activity
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
319
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
•
Report a delay for an event
Event Handling in the Collaboration Portal
.Freight Forwarder
•
•
......
..
.
.. •
••• •••
Shipper
I rrfr11
�
fTr..
. ....
• ••
• ••
••
.. •••
•••
Consignee
l Strategic Freight Mgmt. & Contract Life-cycle Mgmt.
Capacity &
Demand
Planning
} Order Mgmt. & ) Warehouse } ���:h�
Monitoring
Freight Planning
ExecuUon
-�
---------Tracking & Reporting-----+----
•
•
.
•
ll!Yoke
tubMlfllon
•
-·.... .....
. S.tl bitMng
••
•
. o.s,um
•
,
•••
•••
-- -•
•
••
• •
'
•
••
.•
...
3..•
••
••
•
••
Carriers
figure 158: SAP TM Collaboration Portal
The SAP Transportation Management collaboration portal for carriers (SAP TM Collaboration
Portal) supports collaborative business processes.
As a carrier working with several shippers that use the SAP TM collaboration portal. you have
separate access to each of your shippers. In each case. you can work only with this one shipper.
The main benefits of the SAP TM Collaboration Portal are as follows:
320
•
Small and mid size carriers do not need to have SAP TM installed.
•
The SAP TM Collaboration Portal is a full browser-based solution. which means that the carrier
does not need access to shipper's network (for example. a VPN connection).
•
All common browsers are supported (Internet Explorer 9. Mozilla Firefox. Safari. Google
Chrome).
•
The carrier does not have to install anything. but just log in into the collaboration portal with
the access (logon and password) provided by the shipper as SAP TM Collaboration Portal
owner or host.
•
The carrier can see only request for quotations (RFQ) assigned to it. and the transmitted
quotations.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
•
To increase the usability of the portal by the carrier, user settings in the portal are stored and
are available after logging on again.
Event Notification and Handling
Shipper I ·-------------------·
c�rri
rs
Freight Forw rder
TM Collaboration Portal
-------------------·
•
Mobile Device View
Freight Agreement Mgmt
-------------------------------
Desktop View
• Request for Agreement processing
Freight Order Mgn;t,
•
Freight Settlement
• - - - - • • • - - • • • • - - - • • • • Self billing charge verification
• Freight Request for Quotation processing
Freight Quotation overview
Carrier Invoice submission
Dispute resolution
Figure 159: Event Notification and Handling
Since the introduction of the Collaboration Portal, new functionality has been added to the portal.
One of the newer functionalities in the area of freight order management is event notification and
handling. It enables carriers to report expected (planned) and unexpected events related to a
freight order or the stops of a freight order. to the shipper.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
321
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Freight Orders for Execution
Freight Order Management
·-..,._.
-·-
1
HOME
FREIGHT ORDER MANAGEMENT
61000000(),4 2001
FREIGHT SEffiEMENT
255
8
FREIGHT AGREEMENT MANAGEMENT
--
Al lnCli�� � Inc:
On So<lt<lU< 10 201' Ol I 24 PM CSl
,/
,1 Q090000,f 200)
..__,
"' CPM0*1'«»
On - '"
20, ..rt 2,"" C$T
Figure 160: Freight Orders for Execution
Carriers enter the SAP Transportation Management Collaboration Portal on the Home screen.
This screen displays a worklist with the key performance indicators (KPls) for the available areas
in the form of tiles. From the tiles. shippers can navigate to the individual areas to continue their
work.
The area of freight order management has been enhanced with a tile for Event Handling. The tile
displays the open freight orders for execution. for which events still have to be reported. if
necessary.
The Freight Orders for Execution subscreen gives an overview of all of the freight orders assigned
to the carrier. The list can be filtered by the freight order status, and the individual freight order
for which an event should be reported can be selected. The locations where the events occur can
be displayed on a map. or the sequence of locations can be displayed in a numbered list.
The list supports sorting, searching for freight orders. and filtering. You can apply a quick filter in
the tool bar to filter the freight orders by the status of the event confirmation to show only open
freight orders (Open). freight orders for which all the planned events have already been reported
(Closed). or freight orders that have been canceled by the shipper (Canceled).
The next planned (Open) event is displayed for each freight order. together with the affected
locations and the date and time. By selecting a single row in the list. the next open event can be
directly reported.
322
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Exercise 18
View the Events of a Freight Order
Business Example
Carol, a transportation consultant. has been retained by the ABC company to help them
implement the SAP TM system. Carol must explain how the company can use SAP Event
Management with SAP TM to monitor transportation-related events.
1. At this point. you have taken several orders and begun planning the freight units and their
respective freight orders. Examine the expected events and how they can trigger an
information flow to SAP EM to monitor the ongoing process of shipment planning. Open the
freight order you created in the previous exercises and choose the Execution tab.
2. How many events are expected? List them.
3. Which events can be captured at your facility?
4. Review the planned dates.
What is the origin of these dates?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
323
E"
Unit 6
Solution 18
View the Events of a Freight Order
Business Example
Carol. a transportation consultant. has been retained by the ABC company to help them
implement the SAP TM system. Carol must explain how the company can use SAP Event
Management with SAP TM to monitor transportation-related events.
L At this point. you have taken several orders and begun planning the freight units and their
respective freight orders. Examine the expected events and how they can trigger an
information flow to SAP EM to monitor the ongoing process of shipment planning. Open the
freight order you created in the previous exercises and choose the Execution tab.
a) In NWBC. choose Freight Order Management-> Road-> Display Freight Order. Open the
freight order you created in the previous exercises and choose the Execution tab.
2. How many events are expected? List them.
There are typically 8 expected events. as follows: Loading Begin; Loading End; Departure:
Proof of Pickup: Arrival at Destination: Unloading Begin; Unloading End: Proof of Delivery.
Note that events may be repeated at different customer locations.
3. Which events can be captured at your facility?
Four events can be captured as a result of SAP ERP integration. since they occur at location
3100. The other events are expected for external locations and might be reported by external
partners such as the carrier or customer.
4. Review the planned dates.
What is the origin of these dates?
These dates are the result of transportation planning.
324
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Monitoring Transportation Events
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
,
View a freight order event
•
Describe visibility scenarios
•
Monitor the freight order process
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
325
E"
Unit 6
Lesson 8
Exporting a Freight Order
LESSON OVERVIEW
As global markets become more prevalent. the requirements for international shipping will
increase. The number of government regulations increase when you cross international borders.
The SAP Global Trade Services (GTS) system is designed to improve the process of international
shipping with regards to your ERP system. In this lesson. we will discuss the integration between
SAP TM and GTS.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Process an international shipment
International Shipment
Border
Importer
Exporter
Purchasing
Sales
Slpi:,
��
Purchase Orde
Regulatory
A encies
Customs
Offices
Delivery
l
�de�
Customs
Offices
Regulatory
Agencies
Figure 161: Goods Movements Across Borders
In contrast to domestic trade. foreign trade is monitored by governmental agencies. Regulatory
agencies check whether imports and exports are permitted under foreign trade law and issue any
licenses that are necessary. All international goods movements also have to be reported to the
appropriate customs offices. either using manual or electronic means. When goods are imported.
import duties are imposed in the form of duties or specific taxes.
When you are performing international business transactions. you usually have to submit specific
documents - in addition to the standard accompanying documents used in domestic business
transactions - such as commercial invoices, shipping documents. and packing lists. For example,
326
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Exporting a Freight Order
the authorities in many destination countries require certificates of origin from authorized public
institutions. such as chambers of industry and commerce. If you wish to claim preferential
treatment when paying import duties (tariff preference), you have to present appropriate proof of
origin (for example. a movement certificate) to the competent customs office.
Global Trade Services (GTS)
For many companies. the import and export of goods is essential in numerous everyday business
processes. The purchasing department orders goods for the company's warehouse. or for end
customers. from vendors that are based abroad. and the sales department processes orders
from foreign customers. These orders are subsequently delivered using transit procedures.
However, it is necessary to consider international restrictions and requirements prior to the
execution of transportation. This is where SAP GTS and SAP TM integration can be used.
Measures against international terrorism. and the decline in paper-based communication brought
about by electronic procedures have had far-reaching effects on our requirements for systems
that model foreign trade processes. Not only is SAP GTS able to fulfill the considerably stricter
requirements of foreign trade law. it can also connect the processes in your system to electronic
customs procedures.
.........................................................................
...
...
Company
r
r
.
..
...
,
'
Outside world
1
�
1
b.........-....-.....1
f'
L.
1
-
.
1
,,
..
.....................................
,-,
I
Authorities
GTS
..................'!'
I
.
Business partner
Figure 162: Integration of International Shipments
SAP GTS serves as a central gateway to the world of foreign trade. While complex system
landscapes often made data redundancy and manual processing unavoidable. SAP GTS unifies
and centralizes import and export processes. All the data required for carrying out foreign trade
transactions is contained in SAP GTS in bundled form. SAP GTS also takes care of
communication with the authorities and. if necessary, with foreign trade partners.
Compliance
This unified procedure makes it significantly easier to achieve 1000/o compliance with legal
requirements. It thus reduces the risk of a company incurring sanctions by inadvertently breaking
the regulations: a major advantage. considering the often draconian nature of such sanctions.
The connection to electronic customs procedures greatly speeds up import and export
processes. All the relevant documents can be systematically archived and retrieved for the
purpose of external audits.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
327
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
The Compliance Management. Customs Management. Risk Management. and Electronic
Compliance Reporting solutions manage all cross-border goods receipt and goods issue
processes. regardless of the type of feeder system.
You can use Compliance Management as early as the purchase order creation stage of the
purchasing process in the feeder system to check whether the planned import is permitted and, if
necessary, stop the order from being processed further. If the import is permitted, but requires a
license from an authority. the license can be applied for in good time and stored in the system.
Sales staff can use Compliance Management when putting together a request for quotation or an
order to determine whether they are permitted to make a delivery to a particular customer. If a
license is required for an export. you can apply for the license from the authorities and manage it
in the system, just as you do in the import process.
Compliance During Export and Import
When goods are being exported. staff in the export department can create the documents or
messages required for carrying out the customs procedure (export procedure. transit procedure)
directly from Customs Management and then send them to the authorities.
Depending on the country of destination. you should also execute a preference determination for
the product to be exported in Risk Management: If you can export goods as originating products,
the customer pays considerably less import duties due to tariff preferences. This strengthens
your competitive position. You may want to use a letter of credit to guarantee payment by the
customer. Risk Management supports the processing of payment transaction documents.
In the import process. Customs Management supports the technical department to
communicate with the authorities while the goods are placed under a customs procedure. If you
are a consignee in the electronic transit procedure, you can create the messages required to
discharge the procedure in Customs Management. Customs values can also be calculated for
every import consignment.
If you are located in the EU and have obtained goods from another EU member state. or have
delivered goods to a customer in another EU member state. Electronic Compliance Reporting
enables you to transfer the statistical data about these intra-community goods movements.
328
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Exporting a Freight Order
GTS Data Exchange
"
Order and Delivery Integration (Service)
Figure 163: SAP GTS With SAP TM System Landscape
The SAP GTS system was first designed to work with the SAP ERP logistics execution
environment. Now that SAP TM is replacing SAP ERP functions with advanced techniques. we
need to discuss integration between SAP TM and SAP GTS
The SAP ERP system will still represent the backbone of your enterprise and act as the
communication hub. SAP ERP will act as the repository for master data and send product
masters to both systems. SAP TM and SAP GTS integrate on an event-driven basis.
As transportation requests are received by SAP TM. they are planned taking international
shipping requirements into account. As freight orders are released. they trigger processes in SAP
GTS that generate the necessary export paperwork to comply with any government regulations.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
329
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
International Shipping with GTS
�C=Iu=•=ta=.m=ie=r===\ I
i-
Shipper
�I
L_s_P_T_M
.-
Transportlon Request
with Export
DecJannion by LSP
�I
I
. . LSP GTS
reate Forwarding
Order and trigger
export dcclar.stion
Crute £•por1
• Ofdlr.ttion
E :...:-::°":;:.
P
:.i--+Receive Export
�-::E::;X
Declaration
Document
Update Export
o,cur•UOft
.. ...••
...0__.__
e_EXP_STA
with IIRN
Update Eitpo,t
Oeeitrttton
"
.,,o_°'--" -'---fl
"
et CustomsStatus
to release for
execution
14---'
E_EXP_R
EL
&EAOH
PDF
Figure 164: International Shopping with GTS
Integration with Global Trade Services is an event-driven process. The first step in the
international shipping process is the transportation request with export declaration by a logistics
service provider (LSP). A forwarding order with export declaration is then created in the SAP TM
system. The forwarding order is processed in freight units (FU) that signify the shipping
requirements. and is planned and possibly grouped into a freight order (FO). This triggers an
event in SAP GTS to process the necessary customs documents. Finally. the freight order is
updated with the relevant customs information and the order status changes to released for
execution.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
330
Process an international shipment
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Lesson 9
Analyzing SAP Transportation Management
Performance
LESSON OVERVIEW
In order to manage any business. supervisors and managers rely heavily on reports, Key
Performance Indicators (KPls) and metrics. These show how well or poorly business processes
are performing. and give an indication where adjustments need to be made. In this lesson you will
review what options are available in SAP TM to provide the necessary tools to review business
performance.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
Execute a query
•
Execute a Business Context Viewer (BCV) query
Transportation Management Analytics
Analytics is the use of computer technology, operational research, and statistics to solve
problems in business and industry. It is performed within an information system. and aids the
process of making optimal or realistic decisions based on existing data.
Online transactional processing (OL TP) refers to the type of processing typically performed in an
SAP ERP or SAP TM system. The reporting necessary in this type of system often refers to
information requirements for day-to-day work. List displays enable you to request a listing of
documents or master data. as well as combinations of these objects (characteristics). List
displays are reports that access data that is generated directly from on line transactions. From
these lists. you can then access the source documents directly.
It is also possible to use information structures to aggregate data for simple operational analytics.
This varies greatly from the reporting used in an online analytical processing (OLAP)
environment. Analytical systems must provide information that the management of an enterprise
needs to make business decisions.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
331
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Analytics in SAP TM
Dashboards (Web App. Designer)
r.
- --
BW
Query
Business Context Viewer
�---:
=
--:--
J
:::;
'
t
------- -
TM
-�-
--------
Figure 165: Analytics in SAP TM
A complete business intelligence solution is subdivided into various areas. SAP brings together a
powerful business intelligence infrastructure. a comprehensive set of tools, planning and
simulation capabilities. and data warehousing capabilities. delivered through enterprise portal
technology. This enables strategic analysis and supports decision making within a company.
Authorized employees can access and evaluate historic and current data in different levels of
detail.
SAP TM will take advantage of several analytical tools such as 81 Queries. Dashboards. and the
Business Context Viewer All of these tools will use the data collected from SAP TM documents
such as freight units, freight orders, and booking orders. Each of the different order types need to
be activated for 81 integration to upload data to the relevant lnfoProviders.
332
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Analyzing SAP Transportation Management Performance
Delivered Bl Content
3 MultiProviders
5 lnfoCubes
"
��-�-
30+ Master Data
lnfoProviders
15+ Data Store
Objects
F ,gure 166: Delivered Bl Content
BW is delivered with standard business content for shippers and LSPs. The lnfoArea OSCM_TM
contains all the lnfoProviders related to SAP TM. as follows:
•
5 lnfoCubes - lnfoCubes collect data from single objects. such as freight units or freight
orders. and allow various metrics to be calculated on these objects.
•
3 MultiProviders - MultiProviders are designed to bring data in from more than one object in
real time. They are often considered a virtual provider since data may not actually be stored
here. but rather housed during the query process.
•
30-plus Master Data lnfoProviders - Master Data Info Providers allow business users to run
queries against configuration such as document or order types.
•
18 Data Store Objects - DataStore objects allows queries to be run at the order or document
level. This kind of query is used to show the current status of a document that is in the middle
of processing.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
333
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
SAP Queries
Transportation Request
Transportation Allocation
TM Revenue Analysis
Customer Analysis
Transportation Allocations by
Carrier
Planned Revenue per Customer
Party/Location Analysis
Transportation Order
Carrier Analysis
Transport Analysis
Stage Analysis
Carrier by Transportation
Allocations
Business Share
Carrier by Business Shares
Business Share by Carrier
Planned Revenue for Top 5
Customers
TM Cost Analysis
Planned/Actual Costs per
Transport
Planned/Actual Costs per
Transport - Details
Transportation Order
Execution
Trade Lane Analysis
Delivery Reliability
Transported Weight per Trade
Lane
Costs by No. of Units shipped
per period and mode of
Transport
Unexpected Events Analysis
Trade Lane Analysis per
Transport
Costs per Carrier
Duration Analysis
Carrier Analysis by Trade Lane
Expected Events Analysis
Emissions per Trade Lane
Figure 167: Sample Reporting Content for SAP TM
A sample of SAP-delivered queries (OTMS·MP_Q ... ) are mentioned here:
•
Business Share by Carrier
•
Costs by No. of Units Shipped per Period and Mode of Transport Costs per Carrier
•
Planned Revenue for Top 5 Customers
•
Trade Lane Analysis per Transport
•
Emissions per Trade Lane
•
Customer Analysis
•
Stage Analysis
•
Unexpected Event Analysis
Note:
In SAP BW, you can build out queries based on lnfoProviders. The data contained in
an lnfoProvider can be prepared with formulas. for example. calculate the comparison
of two fields as a percentage. Within the query, you can define key figure attributes
that will allow users to refine the query.
Business Context Analytics
The Business Context Viewer (BCV) is a predefined set of queries that can be embedded inside
NWBC to provide insight and enable better decisions to be made. (It is possible to expand or add
to the list of predefined queries.)
334
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Analyzing SAP Transportation Management Performance
Note:
The BCV is an application for embedding business content information into the
context of business applications by role-dependent configuration and personalization.
Context-related data, for example, the material master context. can be displayed in a
side panel and in dashboards and can be used for deeper analysis.
SCV User lall1*,lnon-df1)k'l(l&nl:) Side Panel
Pertcrllltltien
BCV Dashboard
Anatytic View
Pma1e�
..���-:��·f�:�;,�:;:��
ecv 0uery
�'-"'e"'
o........
(Qr)' 'At• tflQ'(hy
c........
'\> :
sc•
,,.
·[r
.
Pl.II
•••
-ecv Admin
�
ERPJotflet $AP
ERf' P1.M Other$
BWJBI Querle$
ERP
...
Figure 168: Business Context Viewer Overview
As a user. you have different possibilities for getting and bringing data to the UI.
The data can result from the following sources:
, ABAP Coding (Selects from DB. Retrieves from BOPF. and so on)
•
Business Warehouse Queries
,
lnfosets
•
Web Services
•
Workflow
•
Enterprise Search
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
335
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
Displaying BCV Queries
[ Carrier Acceptance RateJ
Rejection Reason
Codes
100 ---------80 ---...--------
No Profit
60
•No
40
Capacity
20
•Other
O
s--��-�----
Carrier_ 1 Carrier_2 Carrier_3
Carrier Rankin
T
Carrier_03
Side Panel
Carrier_02
Carrier_01
..,
0
1
2
4
3
5
figure 169: BCV Queries
The three pre-delivered overview metrics shown in figure BCV Queries are as follows:
•
Carrier Ranking
•
Carrier Acceptance
•
Rate Rejection Codes
Query views can be displayed in the following places:
•
The Query Views section of the side panel
•
Under Overview, as quick items that you can enlarge to see more details
•
Within dashboards
Using the BCV Configuration Center. you can configure BCV. The BCV Configuration Center is
used to set up the search connector. the query and the query views. The query views can be
combined in overviews (content of the side panel at the right side of your application) and in
dashboards. It is also used to configure the Access Control Lists and it provides full support for
the transportation management system.
336
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Analyzing SAP Transportation Management Performance
Note:
If you enlarge a query view in the main window. it then appears in "Last Used Query
Views" within the Query Views area of the BCV side panel. If you now navigate to
another freight order (B) in the main window, but want to keep the information about
freight order A in the side panel. you can lock the side panel using the icon. Otherwise.
the side panel shows information about freight order Bas soon as the user navigates
to Bin the main window.
Dashboard Analytics
SAP Business Objects Dashboards (formerly known as Xcelsius Dashboards) deliver an
enhanced presentation of the data returned by Bl. The clean design and formatting is intuitive.
easy-to-read. and straightforward.
To use the dashboards. you must assign the role SAP_BW_SCM_TM_XT to a transportation
manager. the person responsible for executing, directing, and coordinating all the transportation
requirements in a company.
...�.
Cost Analy$is for Transporlation Management
Yw
''"
Tit�W«lt
l�I""'�
••
»
...M
....
•
•
"
"
·�....·
�•P.\
��N._,.,�!
""'
IQ'H
q•
?Sl!.1
NI
�00
P...... Qaielll(J
,m,,o
Ul8t'li:»0
...
!i007.
""'
'"'
·;;.;
0
�-:
•
•
><«""
P".M CC.II
11.1�
�
U �/Solm cc,p.'lltf"I
·-·Ul1f21
�.o
P.6
"'
,,.
""''
.......
,., ..,.,
,�:.:
nu
..
'-'49.Z
'""
!(11!:-0:
U!M
......
,,.,
�·t,,(
Je4 "1
Figure 170: SAP Business Objects Dashboard Analytics
Business applications normally store operative data in the form of business documents and
master data. In SAP NetWeaver BW. DataSources and their extractors make it possible to access
this data DataSources provide a flat analytical view of the data in business documents. such as
sales orders or purchase orders. They contain the business logic that derives an analytical view of
the data from the transactional view.
There are various types of DataSource: DataSources for transaction data, master data attributes.
master data texts and master data hierarchies. Until now. DataSources have been used to
replicate mass data from the operative system to SAP NetWeaver's Data Warehouse. SAP
NetWeaver BW. Here. the data is integrated from various sources. consolidated and made
available for Online Analytical Processing (OLAP). However. OLAP analyses in BW are not based
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
337
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
directly on DataSources. They are based on lnfoProviders that provide a view of a dataset from
various. semantically related Data Sources (purchase order data, customer data or product data.
for example).
Data Provisioning
Operational
Business
Documents
(FO/FU/FWO)
Data Providers
TM Data Sources
'-----'jil
l 't
�-
-
�
Master Data
(Business
Partner)
e�
O
�
Business
Logic
w
BW DataSources
Transactional Data
--.i
,.
ODP
Modeling
IC__:_
L__
t::---
_�-=-
t:=
Master Data Attributes
pi
=tr"
Master Data Text
Master Data Hierarchy
figure 171: Data Provisioning for Search and Analytics
When it comes to operational analytics, Data Sources are not suitable, because they are too basic.
A transaction-data Data Source does not recognize the associated master data attributes, and
the DataSource for master data attributes does not recognize the associated texts. Operational
data provisioning uses ODPs to allow semantically related DataSources to act as lnfoProviders,
so that the data is available to the analytic engine in an operational analytics scenario without the
need for replication to SAP NetWeaver BW.
ODP is used in the following scenarios:
•
Replication to BW
•
Direct access from BW
•
Direct access in the backend system
•
Replication to BWA (TREX)
•
Replication to any (registered) ETL consumer (e.g. POAs. Mobile (offline) ... )
To generate SAP-TM related ODP reports. the SAP TM DataSources are used for direct access to
the data in the SAP TM application system. With the ODP technology, a TransientProvider is
created on the basis of Data Sources. This gives you the possibility to build BEx Queries on top of
these TransientProviders. It also enables real-time reporting without the need to extract data to a
separate BW system.
338
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Exercise 19
Execute a BCV Query
Business Example
You need to be able to deliver reports quickly and easily based on familiar. defined and oftenused criteria such as carrier acceptance rates. In order to do this most effectively. you need to be
able to use BCV queries.
1. Open the freight order you created earlier.
2. Open the Business Context Viewer (BCV).
3. View the details for the Carrier Acceptance Rate query.
4. Display the query information as both a table and a chart.
5. What is the acceptance rate for carrier CARR-00-01?
6. Close the tab with the Carrier Acceptance Rate query.
7. Close the side panel.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
339
E"
Unit 6
Solution 19
Execute a BCV Query
Business Example
You need to be able to deliver reports quickly and easily based on familiar. defined and oftenused criteria such as carrier acceptance rates. In order to do this most effectively, you need to be
able to use BCV queries.
1. Open the freight order you created earlier.
a) In NWBC. choose Freight Order Management-> Road-> Display Road Freight Order.
b) Enter your freight order number and choose Continue.
2. Open the Business Context Viewer (BCV).
a) In the title bar. click the Business Context Viewer link.
3. View the details for the Carrier Acceptance Rate query.
a) In the Side Panel. choose Query Views
Views -+ Carrier Acceptance Rate.
-+
Query View List-, Unassigned Query
4. Display the query information as both a table and a chart.
a) In the Show As field. enter Table
&
Chart.
5. What is the acceptance rate for carrier CARR-00-01?
Varies. Acceptance rate is shown as a percentage in the chart and table.
6. Close the tab with the Carrier Acceptance Rate query.
7. Close the side panel.
340
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Analyzing SAP Transportation Management Performance
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Execute a query
•
Execute a Business Context Viewer (BCV) query
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
341
E"
Unit 6: Transportation Execution
342
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Learning Assessment
1. Which of the following can be considered during carrier selection?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Internal costs
B Real costs from TCM
c
Business shares
D Incompatibilities
2. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an
RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
3. There are different methods of communicating during tendering process. one of them being
mobile tendering.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
4. What does a delivery document provide?
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
343
E"
Unit 6: Learning Assessment
5. Which of the following methods are used for delivery creation?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Interactive Delivery Creation
B Delivery Proposals
C Background Report
D Selection Profile
6. Which of the following shipment scenarios is used when transportation planning is done in
SAP TM?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
A Shipment Integration Outbound
B Shipment Integration Inbound
7. Place the following process steps for creating a shipment from a freight order in the correct
sequence.
Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.
D You plan the transportation process in SAP TM based on the DTRs. During planning, you
create freight orders.
D You send ERP deliveries to SAP TM, and the SAP TM system creates DTRs for the
deliveries.
D You send the freight orders to SAP ERP to carry out transportation execution.
D You carry out tendering for the freight orders in SAP TM (optional).
D SAP ERP creates a shipment for each freight order.
8. To integrate SAP ERP shipments to SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution purposes.
what needs to be created and configured?
9. What does the integration of SAP TM into the SAP EWM application enable?
344
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6: Learning Assessment
10. SAP TM and SAP EWM are part of the supply chain execution platform.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
11. Describe the integration of transit warehousing tasks between SAP TM and SAP EWM.
12. Print documents are available for which of the following?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
D
A Forwarding Orders
B Sea Freight Bookings
c
Road Freight Orders
D Air Freight Bookings
E Freight Units
13. Which types of events are used when integrating with SAP Event Management?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Regular events
B Overdue events
c
Unexpected events
D Unreported events
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
345
E"
Unit 6: Learning Assessment
14. Which of the following would not be reported by a carrier?
Choose the correct answer.
D
D
D
D
A Freight order creation
B Loading
c
Arrival
D Departure
15. Tracking and tracing is supported for which business documents?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
A Freight orders
B Freight units
C Freight settlement documents
16. SAP GTS can be integrated with SAP TM for export declaration.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
17. All the queries that can be run on your TM data are pre-built. it is not possible for users to
create their own.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
18. It is not possible to view analytics data directly in NWBC.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
346
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. Which of the following can be considered during carrier selection?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
0
A Internal costs
B Real costs from TCM
c
Business shares
D Incompatibilities
2. Broadcast tendering refers to a process whereby all quotations received (in response to an
RFQ) are broadcast to all carriers in an effort to improve transparency.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
Correct. Broadcast tendering refers to a scenario in which an RFQ is sent to multiple carriers
at the same time and the responses are then evaluated. This is in contrast to peer-to-peer
tendering, which is sequential.
3. There are different methods of communicating during tendering process. one of them being
mobile tendering.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
347
E"
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. What does a delivery document provide?
A delivery document controls. supports. and monitors numerous subprocesses for shipment
processing, such as picking, packing, loading. and posting the goods issue. In addition, the
delivery document can be used as a reference document for the creation of other shipment
documents. such as a bill of lading.
5. Which of the following methods are used for delivery creation?
Choose the correct answers.
0
A Interactive Delivery Creation
D
B Delivery Proposals
0
c
D
D Selection Profile
Background Report
6. Which of the following shipment scenarios is used when transportation planning is done in
SAP TM?
Choose the correct answer.
0
D
A Shipment Integration Outbound
B Shipment Integration Inbound
7. Place the following process steps for creating a shipment from a freight order in the correct
sequence.
Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.
0 You plan the transportation process in SAP TM based on the DTRs. During planning. you
create freight orders.
[TI You send ERP deliveries to SAP TM. and the SAP TM system creates DTRs for the
deliveries.
� You send the freight orders to SAP ERP to carry out transportation execution.
@:] You carry out tendering for the freight orders in SAP TM (optional).
� SAP ERP creates a shipment for each freight order.
348
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
8. To integrate SAP ERP shipments to SAP TM for freight costing and cost distribution purposes.
what needs to be created and configured?
Create the necessary Transportation Charge Management (TCM) master data. such as
agreements and rate tables: and configure the system for cost distribution and settlement
functions.
9. What does the integration of SAP TM into the SAP EWM application enable?
The integration of SAP TM into the SAP EWM application enables you to integrate SAP TM
transportation planning with SAP ERP delivery and shipment processing and SAP EWM
warehouse planning and execution.
10. SAP TM and SAP EWM are part of the supply chain execution platform.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
True
O
False
11. Describe the integration of transit warehousing tasks between SAP TM and SAP EWM.
You perform transportation planning in SAP TM. and then send your freight documents and
transportation units to SAP EWM. In SAP EWM. you then execute the warehouse tasks. such
as picking, packing, staging, and loading or unloading. You execute the settlement in SAP TM.
12. Print documents are available for which of the following?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
0
0
A Forwarding Orders
B Sea Freight Bookings
c
Road Freight Orders
D Air Freight Bookings
E Freight Units
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
349
E"
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
13. Which types of events are used when integrating with SAP Event Management?
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
0
A Regular events
B Overdue events
c
Unexpected events
D Unreported events
14. Which of the following would not be reported by a carrier?
Choose the correct answer.
0
D
D
D
A Freight order creation
B Loading
c
Arrival
D Departure
15. Tracking and tracing is supported for which business documents?
Choose the correct answers.
0
A Freight orders
0
B Freight units
D
C Freight settlement documents
16. SAP GTS can be integrated with SAP TM for export declaration.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
O
350
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
17. All the queries that can be run on your TM data are pre-built. it is not possible for users to
create their own.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
18. It is not possible to view analytics data directly in NWBC.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
Correct. The business context viewer makes it possible to view analytics data in the side panel
and in dashboards. Specific roles and permissions must first be defined.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
351
E"
Unit 6: Learning Assessment - Answers
352
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Charge Calculation and Freight
Settlement
Lesson 1
Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
355
Lesson 2
370
379
Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
Exercise 20: Calculate Charges for a Freight Order
Lesson 3
384
389
Settling Supplier Freight Charges
Exercise 21: Generate a Freight Settlement Document
Lesson 4
404
Calculating and Settling Customer Charges in an FWO
Lesson 5
Distributing Costs
411
Lesson 6
Settling Freight Charges in a Group Logistics Company
416
Lesson 7
Managing a Freight Contract
421
UNIT OBJECTIVES
•
Describe a freight and forwarding agreement in transportation charge management
•
Display the elements of a charge calculation sheet
•
Describe rate tables in charge management
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
353
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
354
•
Display a scale
•
Manage master data
•
Calculate charges in a freight order
•
Generate a freight settlement document
•
Transfer freight charges to SAP ERP
•
Settle a charge in the collaboration portal
•
Identify how charges are calculated for a FWO
•
Generate a customer freight invoice
•
Settle an internal charge
•
Distribute costs
•
Describe a group logistics company settlement
•
Describe the process of strategic freight management
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Lesson 1
Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson we will look at the master data (agreements. calculation sheets. rate tables, and
scales) that governs how transportation charges are calculated for customers or suppliers. This
is an integral step and must occur before the process of charge calculation and settlement is
triggered.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Describe a freight and forwarding agreement in transportation charge management
•
Display the elements of a charge calculation sheet
•
Describe rate tables in charge management
•
Display a scale
•
Manage master data
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
355
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Transportation Charge Management
Charges &
Settlement
Freight
Settlement
Document
Forwarding
Settlement
Document
. . . .........,... ... ... "·
'I�·-"-"····
. ..
Accounting Document
Figure 172: Document Flow - Charge Calculation and Settlement
The figure Document Flow - Charge Calculation and Settlement shows the content of this lesson
in terms of the overall document flow.
Integration of Charge Management
When shipping products to customers via a third party, an organization needs to account for and
recognize the costs involved in moving goods. SAP TM provides a broad and flexible calculation
process. This includes identical calculation features for both customer and supplier charging
scenarios. With the integration of SAP ERP, integration to the Financial Accounting (Fl) and
Controlling (CO) applications allows an organization to perform payment and execute billing
transactions. as well as trigger the settlement process to accrue the proper transportation
charges to financial accounts.
356
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
SAP TM
Forwarding
Order
Transportation
Charge
Pre-Processln
nt
Forwarding l+--+I Transportation
Charge
Settlement
Processln
Document
•
Freight
.-.1 Settlement
Documen
Customer
Invoice
TCM Master Data and Conflgur ion
FreIg ht
Agreement
I
Forwa rdl ng
Agreement
Calculat
Ion
Rate
Table
[
]
Scale
Rules and Conditions
Figure 173: Integration Of Charge Management
Freight Agreement
Charges &
Settlement
Figure 174: Document Flow- Charge Calculation Master Data
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
357
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
The figure Document Flow - Charge Calculation Master Data isolates the steps involving freight
and forwarding agreements in the context of the overall document flow.
Structure and Contractual Data
Freight/
Forwarding
Agreement
L
Calculation
Sheet (CS)
•
1
1 .. n
Charge Type
• Points to
Created
Rate Template
·-···
___
.
;)
Rate
Table
a
using (Configuration)
r1�n
Scale
Created_. Scale Template
using
(Configuration)
Figure 175: Freight/Forwarding Agreement Structure
Freight agreements (FAs) and forwarding agreements (FWAs) are the basis for calculating
transportation charges. You use FWAs to calculate transportation charges billable to your
customer and FAs to calculate transportation charges billable to you by your carrier. Both
agreement types are integrated fully with calculation sheets.
An agreement includes contractual data, such as the following:
•
Organizational unit (for example. sales or purchasing organization)
•
Involved parties (for example, ordering party or carrier)
•
Terms of payment
•
Validity dates
Freight/Forwarding Agreement Structure
The system determines the agreement based on organization. business partner. validity period.
and preconditions. An agreement is most commonly determined by the purchasing organization
and business partner (Carrier for Freight Agreements. Customer for Forwarding Agreements). In
the Freight Agreement Type Customizing activity. you can configure whether one or multiple
partners can be entered in the agreement. That is. if you have one freight agreement with a
carrier valid for multiple purchasing organizations.
358
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Validity Dates
Currency
Notes and Attachments
Version
Status
General Terms (scope, preconditions)
Output Management
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Validity
Calculation Sheet
Preconditions
Allocations and Business Shares
General Terms (payment terms, scope)
Dimensions (relevant for CEP)
Capacities
Commodities
Transit nme (relevant for DSO)
Figure 176: Agreement Overview
Freight Agreements
Freight agreements represent a long-term contract between a shipper or LSP and a carrier or
supplier. Freight agreements can be determined based on purchasing organization and carrier.
(Additional preconditions can also be defined. if required). Each agreement can point to one or
more calculation sheets (CS).The freight agreement is connected to a CS and the costs (freight
charges and advice fees) used in the assigned CS are visible in the FA.
Forwarding Agreement
Forwarding agreements represent a long-term contract between a shipper and a customer who
agrees to pay the contractual freight charges as reflected by the forwarding agreements.
Agreements contain validity information. as well as organizational data and the relevant partners.
The system determines the agreement based on preconditions. Agreement determination is
based mainly on the partner relationship and the sales organization. You define which partner
roles are relevant to the agreement in Customizing for Transportation Management. These roles
are assigned to an agreement. and contain charge elements that will be applied. This helps to bill
customers for transportation services and pay suppliers or carriers for subcontracted
transportation services.
Forwarding House Agreement
The forwarding business requires forwarding organizations (for example. a branch or
department) to act as a sales organization towards customers and as a purchasing organization
towards the carriers from which they purchase transportation services. This requirement is met
by an organizational unit function which provides both the sales and purchasing capabilities in a
single organizational unit
Internal Agreements
The forwarding house combines the functionalities of both a purchasing organization and a sales
organization. This internal organization is created when organization and staffing is being set up
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
359
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
and requires the creation of internal agreements (NWBC Master Dete -« Internal Agreements).
These internal agreements are set up for internal settlement. as follows:
•
lntracompany Settlement
Settlement between internal organizations in the same company code.
•
lntercompany Settlement
Settlement between internal organizations in different company codes.
Charge Calculation Sheet
Depending on how a shipment will be transported. various charges may be incurred for different
means of transport. In SAP TM. companies can create calculation sheets that reflect all possible
charge elements for a given carrier or customer. These charges essentially mimic the terms of
the freight contract.
The calculation sheet (CS) is a hierarchical table used to calculate transportation charges. The
calculation sheet combines the charge types permitted for a document and the sequence in
which the system takes these charge types into account during the calculation. The system uses
the calculation sheet to specify which transportation charges to calculate and how to calculate
them. This helps to bill customers for transportation services and to pay suppliers or carriers for
subcontracted transportation services. The calculation sheet points to charge items and each
charge item can result in a calculated amount.
The calculation sheet includes transportation charge elements. subtotals. and totals.
Line Number Charge Code Charge Code Description
Base
10
FAK
FAK Base freight
Root
RATE_TABLE_BASE
20
BAF
Bunker Adjustment Factor
Root
RATE-TABLE-BUNKER
30
CAF
Currency Adjustment Factor
FAK
4°/o (Line 10)
40
DTHC
Destination Terminal Handling
Container
30.00 USO
50
D ISPS
Destination Security Surcharge
60
SUM
Rate
1% (Line 40)
Line 1 O • 50
Figure 177: Calculation Sheet
Calculation Sheet Maintenance
Calculation sheet maintenance is a step in the process of setting up master data in the Charge
Management and Service Product Catalogs component and is integrated with agreements, rate
tables. and scales. You can use the master data cockpit to access an overview of the charge
management master data per organizational unit. business partner. and charge type. The system
also shows the relationship between the different types of charge management master data.
You can use a template to create a calculation sheet and calculation sheet line items.
360
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
Calculation
Sheet
Figure 178: Overview or Calculation Sheets
The calculation sheet is hierarchical table to calculate transportation charges. It combines the
charge types permitted for a document and the sequence in which the system takes these charge
types into account during the calculation.
The system uses the calculation sheet to specify which transportation charges to calculate and
how to calculate them. This helps to bill customers for transportation services and to pay
suppliers or carriers for subcontracted transportation services.
It provides for a calculation schema showing the steps and the specifications for the charges.
Based on the calculation sheet, the resulting charges, sub-totals. and totals can then be displayed
in the documents.
Resolution Base
The calculation sheet can consist of the following items:
•
Charge Type
•
Rates
•
Dimensional Weight Profile
•
Calculation Resolution Base (for example. root. container, product. and stage)
•
Resolution Base Grouping Rule (for example. destination location. weight. volume)
In more detail, the items above refer to the following:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
361
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
•
Rates contain details of the rate table for each standard charge item. It is also possible to enter
fixed rates or percentages of other lines in the calculation sheet.
•
Dimensional Weight Profile
The dimensional weight profile the system uses to calculate the transportation charges for the
line item. The system uses the dimensional weight factor in the dimensional weight profile to
convert a product's gross volume into dimensional weight. The system then uses the
dimensional weight to apply the correct rate. Note that a dimensional weight profile at the line
item level of a calculation sheet has priority over a dimensional weight profile in an agreement.
•
Calculation Resolution Base
During charge calculation. the system determines the calculation resolution base by the origin
of the data upon which the charge aspect is based. You can define the charge aspect in the
resolution base objects. for example, container. product, and stage.
•
Resolution Base Grouping Rule
The rule the system uses to group selected input data. for example. destination location.
weight, and volume. You use the grouping rule together with the resolution base to group
charge lines by the calculation base specified in the Group By field of the grouping rule.
Stage 1
Shipper
..-......;;;
1111
Port of Loading
Stage 2
Stage 3
Port of Discharge
Consignee
·
••• • • •
CALCULATION RESOLUTION BASE
?•
Figure 179: Resolution Base
During charge calculation. the system determines the calculation resolution base by the origin of
the data upon which the charge aspect is based.
Charge Aspect Definition
You can define the charge aspect in the following resolution base objects:
362
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
•
Root: This is the header of the document such as freight order. booking order, or forwarding
order.
•
Stage: To utilize stage attributes such as distance between the shipper location and the port of
loading.
•
Container: When gross weight of the container will be used for the calculation.
•
Product: When product attributes like product quantity, weight or volume need to be used.
For example, you want to determine the freight rate based upon the gross weight of the order. To
do this, you will need to use the calculation resolution base of root. If however you want to
calculate the freight on a per package basis. the calculation resolution base should be package.
Rate Table
A rate is a price for a certain transportation service that applies only during its validity period. In
SAP TM. rates are listed in a rate table.
Validity Period: 01-01-2013 to 09-01-2013
Status: Released
Origin= Plant Chicago
Dest Zone
<=1001b
<=5991b
<=10001b
<=29000 lb
<=50000 lb
$ 60.00
$ 51.00
$
45.90
$
43.61
$
30.52
$ 30.68
$ 26.08
$
23.47
$
22.30
$
15.61
KY
$ 35.68
$ 30.33
$
27.30
$
25.93
$
18.15
CA
$ 85.00
$ 72.25
$
65.03
$
61.77
$
43.24
$ 55.90
$ 47.52
$
42.76
$
40.63
$
28.44
$ 57.00
$ 48.45
$
43.61
$
41.42
$
29.00
$ 45.00
$ 38.25
$
34.43
$
32.70
$
22.89
$ 55.90
$ 47.52
$
42.76
$
40.63
$
28.44
$ 55.90
$ 47.52
$
42.76
$
40.63
$
28.44
You can define the following elements in the rate table:
•
Charge Usage
•
Charge Type
•
Dimensions
•
Calculation Base (Scale)
•
Relevance for Calculation Method
Additional information on elements you can define in the rate table is as follows:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
363
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
•
Charge Usage: You can set the rate table to calculate transportation charges billable to your
customer or to be billed to you by your carrier.
•
Charge Type: The system only assigns rate tables to a charge item in a calculation sheet if the
charge types match. You can use this field to search for a rate table.
•
Dimensions: You add each dimension on which you want your rate to be defined and looked
up. For example. if you want the rate to be defined based on destination location and weight.
add a dimension for destination location and for weight.
•
Calculation Base: You can define the calculation base for the scale. The calculation base is the
actual base or the factor on which the charge calculation is based.
•
Rel. Cale. Method (Relevant for Calculation Method): If you select this checkbox. you define
whether you want the system to apply a special calculation method. such as break weight or
clipping, to the rate table on the level of a charge item. This charge item then only considers
those rate tables that you designated for such a special calculation method.
Rate tables also contain the freight rates for transportation services and allow you to maintain
rates for certain validity periods. A rate table can contain up to nine dimensions for rate
maintenance. The rates are reusable and can be referred to in multiple calculation sheets. The
rates can be imported or exported using Microsoft Excel.
Calculation Method
You can use the standard. break weight. or clipping calculation method for a rate.
The break weight calculation method compares and selects the lower rate from either the actual
rate range or the lower end of the next rate range. It assumes that one of the scales in the rate is
the weight. With clipping, the system works through the pricing scale level by level. The
calculation results from each scale level are then added up to produce the overall result.
Example of Rates and Calculation Methods
364
•
Weight I volume rates
•
Break weight calculation
•
Volumetric rate calculation (bulkiness factors)
•
Distance rates
•
Freight of all kind and commodity rates
•
Various origin and destination point classifications such as point-to-point. point-to-zip, pointto-state. zip-to-zip. and state-to-state
•
Rates based on equipment (container type or size) or packaging class
•
Minimum and maximum rates
•
Handling charges: Terminal handling, cross docking costs. loading and unloading. empty
handling, document handling, AMS filing. canal due. security surcharge. and so on
•
Surcharges: Toll calculation: Taxes: Discounts
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
Rate Table
's u.,1 's "'" s
' '"' • ,,,. s ••n, •s
'
'
s
s ,s.oo s
'
s ..... s'
s suo
s .,,. • .... s
,.
s
' """ '
$ 30.68
$ 26.oe:
S ».61:1 $ 30.33
21.JO
S M.00
6$.0l
$ S5.')() S 4',52
$ $1.00 $ '1US
38.U
5 47,$2
$ SS,90 S 4tS2
0.61
..
...
Creation
lS.61
18.l!>
4114
211,M
41.42
29.00
J;J.70 $
ll.89
28,U
Rate Tables
Download
28.44
Download
.....
»». , ••••
Excel
Template
-·...
...
•••
�"
•••
Upload
Ulf I
t:a I
lt•I I
-
m•
a.•
I .;:.a
.W1 ....
ti.I)
ow t
....
Upload
Excel
Templates
Add Details
Figure 181: Rate Table Integration with MS Excel
You can maintain a large rate table, with or without scale items. using Microsoft Excel. You can
enter the rates and scales into a Microsoft Excel file and upload the file to your SAP TM system.
Alternatively, you can define an empty reference rate table with validity periods in SAP TM and
download it to Microsoft Excel. You can then maintain the rate table in the Microsoft Excel file and
upload it to your SAP TM system.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
365
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Scales
Scale Examples
Scale: Weight_LBS
Scale: Oest Zone
Scale: Location
Dest Zone
$ 60.00
$ 51.00
$
45.90
43.61
$
30.52
s
s
30.68
$ 26.08
$
23.47
$
22.30
$
15.61
$ 35.68
$ 30.33
s
27.30
$
25.93
$
18.15
CA
$ 85.00
$ 72.25
$
65.03
$
61.77
$
43.24
FL
$ 55.90
s
47.52
$
42.76
$
40.63
$
28.44
$ 57.00
$ 48.45
$
43.61
$
41.42
$
29.00
$ 45.00
$ 38.25
$
34.43
s
32.70
$
22.89
$ 55.90
$ 47.52
$
42.76
s
40.63
$
28.44
$ 55.90
$ 47.52
s
42.76
$
40.63
$
28.44
Figure 182: Rate Table with Three Scales
If a rate is a price for a certain transportation service that applies only during its validity period, a
scale represents a dimension of the rate. In effect. a scale is used to define a parameter that then
defines a rate. For example, if a rate depends upon distance and weight. you must define a
separate scale for distance and for weight. The distance and weight scales are then used to define
the rate.
Scale maintenance is a prerequisite for the maintenance of rates, as scales are the dimensions of
rate tables. You maintain scales independently of the agreement and the rates. and can reuse
them in multiple rate tables. A scale has a scale base. which is essentially a database field tied to
an attribute of the freight order. The scale base defines how the system interprets the scale. For
example, a rate based on distance has to have the distance calculated. To do this, you would need
to know the start location and the destination location. In this case. one scale is needed to
determine the start location and another scale is needed to determine the destination location.
Some Possible Scale Bases
366
•
Product quantity
•
Packagetype
•
Weight
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
•
Volume
•
Means of transport
•
Location
•
Distance
•
Business partner
Scale Type. Calculation Type, and Unit of Measure
Each scale can be based on a scale type. The scale type controls how the scale levels are defined.
It indicates whether the scale values that were specified represent the upper or lower boundaries
for the scale levels.
Depending upon the scale base. a scale unit of measure can be defined. This is a mandatory field
if the unit of measure is relevant for the scale base. Weight. for example, requires a unit of
measure.
In relation to calculation type, you can choose between absolute and relative. For non-numeric
scales. you can only choose absolute. The system uses the calculation type on scale level as the
proposed value for rate table maintenance.
You can also assign rounding profiles. Before the system accesses the scale to look up a rate in a
rate table, it rounds the input value based on the rounding profile to determine the right scale
level.
Note:
A scale can be reused in multiple rate tables. However, only 9 dimensions or scales
can be used in one table.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
367
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Calculation Base
Calculation Base
• The calculation base defines how the system will determine the actual
value of the scale during charge calculation
Cale. Base Cd. "DESTLOC"
Helper Assignment
If the calculation will be based
upon the destination location of
the stage of the freight order
BAF/ Container d
Newark
up to 10 tons
up to 20 tons
42,000 USO
36,000 USO
30,000 USO
Portland
Miami
48,000 USO 54,000 USO
39,600 USO 48,000 USO
33,600 USO 42,000 USO
Cale. Base Cd. "GROSSWT"
If the calculation will be based
upon the total weight of the
freight or Iorwardinq order
Figure 183: Calculation Base
A calculation base identifies the actual base or factor with which the system calculates the
charges for the scale.
There can be various scenarios in which the system must calculate a charge for different forms of
weights. for example, gross weight and net weight.
In this case. both gross weight and net weight correspond to the scale base Weight (W), whose
dimension is mass. However. by definition. gross weight and net weight are two entirely different
charge aspects. Therefore they have two different calculation bases. such as "Wl" for gross
weight and "W2" for net weight.
To follow the scenario given here. you define a calculation base for every scale base. This
calculation base is the final element in the charge determination. This means that the calculation
base is used to determine the charges.
In figure Calculation Base. the charges are dependent on weight and the destination location. The
scale has the scale base Location. This scale base defines that the scale uses locations only The
scale base can be used for both the source and destination location. The calculation base
DESTLOC determines that the destination location of the freight order is used. Technically, in the
customizing of the calculation base. you define which field is to be used and which program or
class the system will call to determine the field value.
If the resolution base in the calculation sheet points to the freight order stage, the system will
derive the values from the specific stage and use it in the calculation.
368
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing Charge Calculation Master Data
Master Data Cockpit
. - , __ -----.
-·-.. - --·
----·
·- ·- -·-·
-·
---·...·· -- - ---·
-·
_.
_
...---·..... . --- --- --...--·
_.
_
--·
-·
--�
.... ---·
--·
·
--·�
----·
---- ---·
...... ·-·-- -- -----·
_..
-·
---·
·
...... -- - --------�-·
-i
]).
�
••
�
·-
••
�
�
�
�
�
•••
•••
•••
-
Freight
Agreement
-- 1
......
Freight
Agfeemet11 Item I
Caleulei!lon
,,..._
_.,
....
Calculation
�et Item/
rge Item
l
•
�---.
.
.
.
-·..
-"
-·
-_.. .,,_
--..
···--···----....... ·- ...... --·
··----···-·-·- .. -----····...
------·--·..... ··.... --·
·-··--_-·--_- ...··-�-.
..
-··..•. ----···--·---- --....... ·.-.-.. ·...··..
-·--.··..... .··----·
-- .
--- ··- . ·-·- --_
,,_
........
.....
•
•
•
•
.... ..,.
•
..
r-
I
••
•
••
,_
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
_,., ' ... '
•
•
•
•
'
IY.•les/
Scale Items
J
Rate
Figure 184: Master Data Cockpit
The master data cockpit provides an overview of the agreements and related charge
management master data.
Master Data Cockpit Features
• Flexible selection criteria for agreements and items.
•
Lists all related Transport Charge Management (TCM) master data. such as charge items. rate
tables. scales and scale items. and rates for every agreement item. For example:
The rates for a transport between your purchasing organization and a specific carrier.
All charges maintained for one item in an agreement that has many rate tables.
The agreements valid for a specific period.
Most data that is maintained in agreements and related TCM objects can be displayed in the
Personal Object Worklist (POWL). Using the standard screen layout configuration options. you
can customize the views relevant for your organization.
Based on the selection. you can trigger a mass update of rate tables or rates maintained in
calculation sheets. (Choose Update Rates I Calculation Sheet Amounts.)
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Describe a freight and forwarding agreement in transportation charge management
•
Display the elements of a charge calculation sheet
•
Describe rate tables in charge management
,
Di splay a scale
•
Manage master data
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
369
E"
Unit 7
Lesson 2
Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you learn how to calculate supplier charges for freight orders.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Calculate charges in a freight order
Agreement Determination
Freight Agreements (FAs) and Forwarding Agreements (FWAs) are the basis for calculating
transportation charges. In this section. we look at how agreements are determined based on
priority.
Agreement Determination Based on Priority
•
The system determines the agreement based on organization. business partner, validity
period. and preconditions.
•
If there are several matching agreements. which can be determined on the data from freight
order /booking or from the forwarding order. it is possible to have a leading charge type
(defined in charge type Customizing). and the first agreement where the defined leading
charge type can be calculated is picked. Besides using leading charge types, it is possible to
maintain priorities.
•
If the system finds multiple matching agreements during agreement determination. the
agreement priority defines the sequence in which the subsequent determination is executed.
•
The agreement priority can be maintained on the General Data tab in the details section.
Built-in Preconditions in Agreement Items
In an agreement, there are two ways of using preconditions for the agreement items (calculation
sheets):
•
Built-in preconditions
•
BRFplus preconditions
It is possible to define a BRFplus condition or a BAdl to check if a certain calculation sheet is to be
processed in a certain business context. The result of this rule is a true or false decision. If the
response from BRFplus or the BAdl is true, the calculation sheet is considered for charge
calculation. Some built-in preconditions are available on agreement item level.
370
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
�--.-. Agreement Item 1
BRF+ Precondition
�--.-. Agreement Item 2
Figure 185: Preconditions in Agreement Items
Built-in Preconditions in Calculation Sheets
r--i
Calculation Sheet
1------------------------,
----- Charge Item 1
BRF+ Precondition
�---.-. Charge Item 2
Figure 186: Calculation Sheet Preconditions
There are two ways of using conditions in the calculation sheet. There are predefined parameters
in the built-in preconditions that can be used or a BRF+ precondition/BAdl can be maintained as
well.
Types of Built-in Preconditions in Calculation Sheets
•
Trade Lanes: Based on criteria such as source location. source zone, destination location.
destination zone. mode of transport. or means of transport. the charge line can be activated or
deactivated.
•
Service: Based on the service level a charge item can be activated or deactivated.
•
Business Partner: Based on the business partner a charge item can be activated or
deactivated.
BRFplus Preconditions in Calculation Sheets
A BRFplus condition or a BAdl can be defined to check if a certain calculation sheet item is to be
processed in a certain business context. The result of this rule is a true/false decision. If the
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
371
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
response from BRFplus or the BAdl is true. the calculation sheet item is considered for charge
calculation.
The precondition for the charge item can be maintained on charge item level in the Precondition
tab.
Manual Agreement Selection
Often Logistics Service Providers (LSPs) have multiple FAs with the same carriers and
purchasing organizations. This is due to the fact that an LSP may strike deals with carriers at
various levels. for example. on a country, regional. and global basis.
Normally, the larger the contract. the better the rates. However, if a country Business Partner
(BP) is pushing a lane to increase market share. then the LSP could potentially get better rates.
Therefore. it makes sense to have a different contract with the country BP, or even multiple
contracts.
Similar scenarios can exist on the customer side. Therefore. the ability to choose a particular
context in a given scenario is a critical business requirement on both the buying and selling side.
Manual Agreement Selection: Functions
•
An enhancement to the standard agreement selection, which is an automated process.
•
Provides the capability to select an agreement or agreement item for charge calculation.
•
Offers additional capability for automatic selection of minimum or maximum agreement items
through calculation profile control setting.
Multiple Agreements Popup
The figure shows the Multiple Agreements dialog box. which can be used to select an agreement
manually.
Note:
The Multiple Agreement pop-up is not supported for through rates.
372
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
.
"'"""""'
l,dn\lflSlfef.1\'9 01118
lm,o,wg 8"'h1,
�oe e,a,; S..1v,
ewrvm�
....
Ox�flOw
«ec
EUR
0.00
EUR
� /<fflN!I 00\etl'f'I(�., CrocU""e!C C...
eee
OUR
• OICL'S
EUR
06002014
-
....
[jJ
0Me
E�1...-yi: R.lM, 0.-c
tn
0-032014
,SI
Ch.:l,r. ..-i� Log
Muttlplie Agreeinents
c,..,.11" .. _,,,
......
()Ap,.Jl·�n�I
�.(:hi,,gt(I ¢«
H::11 C,*IAllltd
0.00
I
-
Pfuf!W),I�
c........ o.
,u,-,.inooc-eune'l(v
fliouldfl.i 'foi,I.A,o,...1 .,0i,x,_... o.,..,n,.
....
lnl&irel Chw(ltlS
Noll-I'd
TUWl�ll11'1Llo...,IICul1e.'!(y
l.£lr#1¥11·M
•• ••
Charges
't
.
-·
C..._,_SI_,
OI CUSlOME"1,11P) NEWYOEIK Im fCNtQc: k1emJ
c )(
�-·
,..
o......,
Ol,.BUU90t,.CONY01
ov.10...AGft01
tn.eca,s
01JklU50f_OON'Y02
Ol..MIJ...A,GA.11
U:U481t,
01_11,vu&Ot_OOHV02
°'-""'�
fir e:,1.50
""'
....,
01_9UUSC9_GONY01
Dl),fU_�
91.831,SO
USO
Dl_lluusot_COHV0-1
01_1,il.l_AGA03.
'8 »5 75
01 BUUS09�CCIN'101
"""
.....
Ol_dilJU$0t_Wll�
�
USO
, ..... "'°
USO
t�'(l?:I
USO
v
.
I <>•<I
..
Figure 187: Multiple Agreement Pop·Up
Freight Order Charge Calculation
Bool.lnc�
Ship ttom: AIIC Gtn?ltf. Friorldl.n
�!p to: Xf'l ltd..
lr,eoiow.: OOP
MOT: CO,,Ulnt,
�
"*"•
Vfllft
�tOtdof
TCM Master
Data
Figure 188: Freight Order Charge Calculation Process
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
373
°'""
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
During freight charge calculation in the freight order, the following steps occur:
1. Collect the data from the following SAP TM core objects:
•
Transaction business object: freight order. booking order, stage, item. container
•
Configuration objects
•
BRF+ conditions
•
Master data
•
Any BAdl implementation
2. Determine the freight agreement
3. Calculate the values of each charge type in the calculation sheet
4. Hold the log file of the calculation run. and so on
5. Show the calculated results in the freight order
Freight Rate Derivation Process
Co°"ol....,. Q,.i,,(T�. �nlkt)
,,,_
P.itki..s-
Slllp from: ;\SC�. fr�
Sl!lp,to: XY2 tto., O.:�
••,ocrmiw DOP
A11iT, Conu,"'°' V�u,I
Oeli""Y
'™«Ill o�
l,m,.
c_, �..nU.n
<&>) IO..
fo:0.,0-fO
.lilnT, ('(lrjl,,.i- Vf"t�
SW!l).)to,:- U.oJ.iOO:O
no
i
st
10'!
'-.'---i
Figure 189: Freight Rate Derivation Process
During freight rating process, the following steps are performed:
1. Based upon the calculation item, the system determines the calculation base and the rate
table.
2. Given the dimension of the rate table (scales). it then obtains the logistics data.
3. Given the calculation profile, the system determines the baseline for the date determination
4. The system obtains the matching rate table record and then determines the appropriate
calculation rule
5. The system calculates the freight rate amount
374
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
Business Example: Road-Sea-Road
"
Denver
rn,
Newark
(Port)
Rotterdam
(Port)
Cologne
-
••• • • •
Full Container Load Scenario (Road-Sea freight)
Charge Calculation will be done for:
Freight Order - Denver to Port of Newark
• Booking Order - Port of Newark to Port of Rotterdam
Freight Order - Port of Rotterdam to Cologne
Figure 190: Business Example: Road-Sea-Road
In this scenario a full container load is being sent via road-sea freight. From SAP ERP. an orderbased transportation requirement for the entire move is sent to SAP TM. The planner decides the
routing for the container move. hence creating stages in the freight unit. Each stage is then
planned separately:
Table 3: Stages
Stage
Description
Pre-carriage
Truck move from shipper origin (Denver) to
port (Newark)
Main carriage
Vessel move from POL (port of loading) (Newark) to POD (Port of Destination) (Rotterdam)
On-carriage
Truck move from port (Rotterdam) to customer unloading location (Cologne)
Two freight orders are created - one for the pre-carraige stage (Chicago to Newark) and one for
the on-carraige stage (Rotterdam to Cologne). The amount calculated for these stages will be
used to pay the carrier.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
375
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
A booking order is also created for the main carriage stage (Newark to Rotterdam). The amount
calculated for this stage will be used to pay the ocean carrier.
Example Calculation for a Freight Booking
Example Calculation for a Freight Booking
Freight Move: Pol: Port of Newark to PoD: Rotterdam Port
ocean Fl'eight
Fl'elght Agreement
4711
Freight Agreement ID
Freight
Agreement
-1-
Freight
Agreement
points to a
TCCS
Charge type
l
Rate Table
L
SeaTem3
Con�racting Partner
Usage Code
Delta Pulp and Wood
Customer and Se(l,1ce Pro\tder
TCCS
TCCS_SeoTem,,_1
Tlil!ISPO!!a!ioo Calculatioo Sheel 1
Ult Numbtt Charge ElemfJfi Code
Transportation Charge
Calculation Sheet
J
Carrier
ChargeType
points to a
Rate Table
carc.-RtJe
Calculation Base
10
HAUL
Ha11I Octan fceioht
cha�abltwele:t'lt
=
Bunke< Ad�.st-nent Factor
Cu1Tency Adjustment factor
chargeable wei]ht
so
SAF
CAF
40
O_ISPS
Securty Surthame Origin
Line 10
Percentage
=
orsc
O�il Teonin.i Handling
chargeable wFl'lht
chargeable weQht
60
DlliC
D_ISPS
SUII
Oerlilation Termhal Handing
chargeatie weiJht
'"
ao
Oe;tilation Seci.rity Surcharge chargeable weiJht
Lmel0-50
A.utomatieallmanual
T(I(�
I
Rate table·. Haul
Rate Table is
built out of
Scales
Scales
Le Ha..te
Newa'1<
Portlond
Miami
Cala,lation Re,ult
line Nt.m bel O,;vgeCode Charge Code descmioo
10
FAK
FAK Base teigftt
Btemethawn
Rot1erdam
35.000USO
30.000USO
25.000USO
Base
Cootai�
40.000US
1
•s.ooo use
33,000 USO 40.000 us,
28.000 USO 35.000 US•
v�
Price
40.000 USO 39.680USC
Figure 191: Example Calculation for a Freight Booking
The example demonstrates how the system calculates the charge for a container ocean freight
booking from Newark to Rotterdam based on TCM master data.
Event-Based Charges
Events can influence how the customer is charged (via the forwarding order) and how the carrier
is charged (via the freight order and freight booking).
376
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
Execution Document (Freight Order/Booking)
Event
Planned Date/Time
Actual Date/Time
Loading Begin
01.01.2018; 09:00:00
01.01.2018; 09:00:00
Loading End
01.01.2018; 09:20:00
01.01.2018; 09:20:00
Proof of Pickup
01.01.2018; 09:20:00
01.01.2018; 09:20:00
Departure
01.01.2018; 09:30:00
01.01.2018; 09:30:00
Clear Customs
01.01.2018; 09:40:00
01.01.2018; 09:40:00
Delay
-
02.01.2018; 08:00:00
Arrival at Destination
03.01.2018; 13:30:00
Unloading Begin
03.01.2018; 13:45:00
Unloading End
03.01.2018; 14:30:00
Proof of Delivery
03.01.2018; 15:00:00
..
e
a,
>
w
..
.
,:,
a,
•
u
a,
...... -+ 05.01.2018; 07:30:00
...... - ..... 05.01.2018; 07:45:00
...... ..... 05.01.2018; 09:30:00
...... ..... 05.01.2018; 10:30:00
a.
><
a,
c
�
::)
�
'
r-
.
Forwarding Order Charges
Freight Order/Booking Charges
50 USO reimbursement for customer per
1 day delay
100 USO penalty charges for carrier per
1 day delay
Figure !92: Charges Based on Events
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
377
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
378
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Exercise 20
Calculate Charges for a Freight Order
Business Example
You are a charge analyst for a company implementing SAP Transportation Management. You
want to ensure that charges can be calculated in freight orders
1. Open the freight order you have used in the exercises for carrier selection and tendering.
2. Go to the Charges tab.
What is the charge calculation status?
3. Calculate charges for the freight order using the corresponding button in the main toolbar and
then save the freight order.
4. Review the freight charges that have been calculated.
What is the charge calculation status and the invoicing status of the freight order?
5. What is the total that has been calculated?
6. Which charge types have been calculated? Hint: Click the Expand All icon on top left of the
Charges table.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
379
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
7. How has the base freight been calculated?
8. How has the fuel surcharge been calculated?
9. Which freight agreement and charge calculation sheet have been used for charge calculation?
Hint: Choose Show/Hide Details in the charge table.
10. How has this freight agreement been determined?
380
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Solution 20
Calculate Charges for a Freight Order
Business Example
You are a charge analyst for a company implementing SAP Transportation Management. You
want to ensure that charges can be calculated in freight orders
1. Open the freight order you have used in the exercises for carrier selection and tendering.
a) In NWBC, choose Freight order Management-. Roed-« Edit Road Freight Order.
b) Enter the number of your freight order in the Freight Order field and choose Continue.
c) Make sure a carrier has been assigned to this freight order on one of the following tabs,
Subcontracting, Business Partner or General Data.
2. Go to the Charges tab.
What is the charge calculation status?
The charge calculation status is Not calculated.
3. Calculate charges for the freight order using the corresponding button in the main toolbar and
then save the freight order.
a) Go to edit mode and choose Charges/Settlement-. Calculate Charges and then Save.
Hint: If the Charges/Settlement button is not visible, click on the double arrow in the top
right of the screen. next to the tool icon.
4. Review the freight charges that have been calculated.
What is the charge calculation status and the invoicing status of the freight order?
The charge calculation status is Calculated. the invoicing status is Not Invoiced.
5. What is the total that has been calculated?
A total of 1.366.81 USD has been calculated.
6. Which charge types have been calculated? Hint: Click the Expand All icon on top left of the
Charges table.
BASE; FUEL; STOP
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
381
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
7. How has the base freight been calculated?
Actual distance (2.679.199KM) x 0.45 USD/KM = 1.205.64 USD.
8. How has the fuel surcharge been calculated?
Base freight (1.205.64 USD) x 3.00°A> = 36.17 USD
9. Which freight agreement and charge calculation sheet have been used for charge calculation?
Hint: Choose Show/Hide Details in the charge table.
Select the top line for carrier P&G Trucklines and choose Show/Hide Details in the charge
table. Scroll down and on the Overview tab. you can see that freight agreement FAOOCARR-01 and calculation sheet FTL_US_CARROl are displayed.
10. How has this freight agreement been determined?
The freight agreement has been determined based on carrier CARR-00-01 and purchasing
organization 50000808. You can see these on the General Data tab.
382
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating Supplier Charges in a Freight Order
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
,
Calculate charges in a freight order
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
383
E"
Unit 7
Lesson 3
Settling Supplier Freight Charges
LESSON OVERVIEW
After services have been rendered for the freight order. the settlement process must be initiated.
In this lesson you will examine the steps SAP TM performs to assist in the process of settling
transportation costs with your carriers.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
384
•
Generate a freight settlement document
•
Transfer freight charges to SAP ERP
•
Settle a charge in the collaboration portal
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
Freight Settlement
Freight Order I
Freight Booking
Freight
Settlement
Document
Charges &
Settlement
Accounting Document
�-----------------------------------'
'
:
SAP ERP1
Figure 193: Document Flow - Supplier Freight Settlement
The figure Document Flow - Supplier Freight Settlement isolates the freight settlement steps
within the context of the overall document flow.
What is Freight Settlement?
When an organization ships via a third party to a customer, costs may be incurred that have to be
charged back to this shipper. After services have been rendered the following activities should
take place:
•
Accruals are posted
•
Invoices are verified (in SAP ERP)
•
Vendors are paid
To manage this process properly in an integrated environment. a freight settlement document is
created and transferred to SAP ERP.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
385
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Carrier
Customer
Shipper
$
$
$
Figure 194: What is F reignt Settlement?
Freight Settlement Document
A freight settlement document (FSD) is a business document that is sent to SAP ERP requesting
the verification of an invoice received from a supplier or carrier. When the invoice is received, SAP
ERP checks it against the data from the freight settlement document. If performing an evaluated
receipt settlement. the automatically generated invoice is based on the data from the freight
settlement document.
FSDs can be used to enter the data for transportation invoicing and forwarded to SAP ERP for
invoice verification. The transportation charges are calculated in SAP Transportation
Management (SAP TM) based on a freight order. service order. or freight booking. After an SAP
NetWeaver Exchange Infrastructure (XI) message is sent to SAP ERP. the actual invoice
verification takes place in SAP ERP.
You can create an individual FSD for one freight order. service order. or freight booking. You can
create a collective FSD for multiple freight orders or freight bookings. You can also create
multiple FSDs at the same time.
386
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
• Invoicing Party
(default)
• Document Type, Invoice Date
• Purchasing Organization
• Payee (default)
• Paymt. Terms, Net Amt.
Doc. Currency
• Invoice Amount
Verified by ERP
au.me••
General Data
Business
Documents or
Business
document items
that are being
settled with the
FSD
Partner
Charges
• Additional
Business Partners
(Partner
Determination,
Manual Editing)
Charges for each
FSD itemdetermined
automatically
manual
maintenance
Figure 195: Freight Settlement Document Overview
An FSD contains the following information:
• General data: Document type. the purchasing organization, payment terms. document
currency. and so on
•
Business partner information: invoicing party. payee. additional business partners. which can
be entered manually or automatically determined by the system
•
Charges: For each FSD item the Charges tab page has the charges relevant for settlement with
the carrier
•
Orders: The business documents or the business document items that are being settled using
the FSD
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
387
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Freight Order
POWL
Individual &
Collective
Freight
Booking
POWL
Individual &
Collective
Freight
Booking
(Complete
/Partial)
Freight Order
(Complete
/Partial)
Batch Report
Figure 196: Creating a Freight Setllemenl Document
The FSD can be created in the following ways:
•
It is possible to create an individual FSD for one freight order. service order. or freight booking.
or a collective FSD for multiple freight orders. service orders. or freight bookings. To do this
access freight orders. service orders, or freight bookings from the personal object worklist
(POWL). in the relevant document overview. or in the freight settlement overview. The system
automatically creates the FSD based on the data in the freight orders. service orders. or
freight bookings and calculates the transportation charges.
•
It is also possible to create FSDs directly out of the freight booking or freight order UI.
•
It is also possible to create partial FSDs for previously invoiced freight documents.
•
You can create multiple freight settlement documents using the mass creation of FSD report.
))
Note:
Background reports are the following:
/SCMTMS/SFIR_CREATE - Creation of FSD
/SCMTMS/SFIR_TRANSFER - Transfer of FSD to ERP
388
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Exercise 21
Generate a Freight Settlement Document
Business Example
Once a freight order is created. a freight settlement document can be created. You use this to
calculate the applicable charges to be paid to the transportation service provider for handling the
freight order/shipment.
1. In NWBC, choose Freight Order Management-> Road-> Edit Road Freight Order.
2. Enter the number of your freight order in the Freight Order field and choose Continue.
3. Can a freight settlement document be created for this freight order?
4. Generate the freight settlement document.
5. What is the settlement document type associated with the freight settlement document?
6. Who is the invoicing party in the freight settlement document?
7. What is the lifecycle status of the freight settlement document?
8. View the preceding documents of the freight settlement document.
9. Save the freight settlement document and note the freight settlement document number.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
389
E"
Unit 7
Solution 21
Generate a Freight Settlement Document
Business Example
Once a freight order is created. a freight settlement document can be created. You use this to
calculate the applicable charges to be paid to the transportation service provider for handling the
freight order/shipment.
1. In NWBC. choose Freight Order Management-> Roed-« Edit Road Freight Order.
2. Enter the number of your freight order in the Freight Order field and choose Continue.
3. Can a freight settlement document be created for this freight order?
Yes. The invoicing status of the freight order is Not Invoiced and there are no blocks - a
settlement document can be created. You can check the invoicing status under Settlement
Data in the Charges tab. You can check whether there are blocks under Blocking Information
in the Statuses tab.
4. Generate the freight settlement document.
a) Expand the Charges/Settlement dropdown in the top menu bar and then choose Create
Freight Settlement Document.
5. What is the settlement document type associated with the freight settlement document?
0001 (Default Freight Settlement Document). You can see this in the Settlement Document
Type field under Settlement Data in the General Data tab.
6. Who is the invoicing party in the freight settlement document?
CARR-00-01. You can see this in the Business Partner tab.
7. What is the lifecycle status of the freight settlement document?
The status is Ready for Accruals. You can see this in the Statuses tab.
8. View the preceding documents of the freight settlement document.
a) Choose the Document Flow tab.
9. Save the freight settlement document and note the freight settlement document number.
a) Save the freight settlement document by choosing Save All.
390
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
Supplier Freight Invoicing
Transportation Charge Processing
Create Freight Order
I Freight Booking
....__�
�,,----,
Calculate Charges
L__:��=�:,,;r::-����:::� Freight Settlement Processln;;:g;,--.._
Create Freight
Settlement Document
Transfer Freight
Settlement Document
Accruals Posted
Figure 197: Posting Accruals
Freight charges are settled with the carrier (supplier).
Settlement includes the following:
,
Assigning and transferring shipment costs to Financial Accounting to generate accruals. and
assigning costs to a CO object
,
Settlement of costs with the carrier: posting payables by canceling the accruals.
You need to have entered and accepted the services provided before you can transfer costs to
Financial Accounting. The system automatically creates the service entry sheet based on a
purchase order for external services.
Before you can settle costs with the carrier. you need to create an invoice using manual invoice
verification or create a credit memo using the credit memo procedure.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
391
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
I
SAP ERPSD/MM
I I
Create
Order/Delivery
�
�
I
SAP TM
'
Order-I
DeliveryBased
Forwarding
Order
External
Customer
I
Create PO
�
Create Order
�
,....
, '"'
Receive
Order
Purchas;
Org.
.._
..._ Integration
I
•
Create SES
•
,
y
•
Create Freight Order I
Freight Booking
.
Canillr/SupJller
-'W
•
Transportalion Planning
Purchase
Org.
lnf�rmatio_n
0
TRQ
I
I
SAP ERP-MM
E
•
::> Determine Freight
Agreement
0
•
y
Calculate Charges
J
•
Create Freight
Settlement Document
�
••
••
Invoice
verification
Self-billing
(ERS)
-
Credit note
Invoice
Figure 198: Supplier Freight lnvorcmg - Process Flow
As you can see in the graphic. the typical freight settlement process flow is as follows:
1. Based on a transportation request. the planner carries out several planning steps and create a
freight order or a freight booking to subcontract to a carrier.
2. Upon settlement. the system creates a Freight Settlement Document (FSD). This document
contains all relevant logistical data as well as the charges and other commercial data. The
charges can be copied over from the freight order or booking (most common) or another
charge calculation is triggered based on the freight agreement between the purchasing
organization and the carrier. It is possible to manually change charges in the FSD. FSDs can
be created online or in batch. It is possible to do a collective settlement (several freight orders
or bookings are settled with one FSD). The FSD can then be transferred to the SAP ERP
system via SAP NetWeaver Process Integration (Pl. formerly known as XI/ Exchange
Infrastructure) or WSRM (Web Services Reliable Messaging).
3. A purchase order and a service entry sheet are created in the ERP system. This constitutes
the working list for invoice verification. You also have the option of self-billing.
Note:
The purchase order and service entry sheet are only used for technical purposes to
post accruals in SAP ERP. The service entry sheet comprises a list of services
performed by a vendor on the basis of a purchase order. containing service
descriptions and details of quantities and values. The descriptions of planned services
deriving from the purchase order are used as default descriptions in the service entry
sheet. Unplanned services that were entered in the purchase order without
descriptions using value limits are precisely specified in the service entry sheet.
Partial Freight Settlement
You can create a partial freight settlement document for a previously invoiced freight order.
392
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
The invoicing status of the freight order changes from Completely Invoiced to Partially Invoiced
before the additional freight settlement document is created. You can add charges to an invoiced
FO. but it is not possible to remove them. Invoice verification can be done with reference to the
SAP TM freight order. carrier. BOL, air waybill, flight number. and voyage number. You can view,
edit. and discard proposed FSDs from the interactive UI.
Freight Settlement Integration
1. Account Assignment
J
• G/L account determination
• Assignment for Cost Accounting
l
2. Transfer to Financial Accounting
l
• Purchase order determination
-
• Creation of the service entry sheet
• Accrual establishment
J I
3. Invoice creation
l
• Credit memo procedure (ERS procedure)
•
Manual invoice verification
I
Figure 199: Freight Settlement Integration
During account assignment. the system determines the correct GIL account in Financial
Accounting for each shipment cost item and the assignment for Controlling. Account assignment
can be carried out at different levels, depending on the level of detail at which you want to track
costs.
The transfer to Financial Accounting to establish accruals requires entering and accepting the
services rendered. The system automatically creates a service entry sheet. Using the credit
memo procedure, also referred to as the Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS) procedure, you can
settle the shipment costs with the carrier without having received invoices. You can choose from
different settlement periods. You transfer the calculated shipment costs to Financial Accounting.
The invoices are verified by the carrier. If the carrier discovers variances, you can post these as
subsequent debits or credits.
If you receive invoices from the carrier. you can also verify the invoices manually and create the
invoices manually.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
393
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Service Entry Sheets in SAP ERP
Purchase�
Order
Reference
,
to
-·
� ·
Service
Entry Sheet
.,.
Transfer
to
�,
�
i
� t====> l.:;;;;;F;;;;n;i ; ;a;;;;n;;;;c;;..a_li _A_c_c_o_-u tn -n_g_
Service
acceptance
I
...
Accruals
Service agent
Purchasing organization
Purchasing group
Plant
Item category
l-------------------------------------------�
figure 200: PO And Service Entry Sheet
Each service entry sheet is based on an external service order. Determining a valid purchase
order is required for transfers to Financial Accounting and for settlements. You can also create
the purchase order every month for the carrier. Important criteria for the service order include
carrier. purchasing organization. purchasing group, plant. and item category.
When the system has automatically determined a valid purchase order. a service entry sheet is
created that refers to the purchase order. During posting. you accept services and. in Financial
Accounting, an accounting document for generating accruals is created.
394
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
Invoice Submission
.Freight Forwarder
.. . ... . . .
..
.
.
.
.
...
.....
�
•'.
••• •'
• Strategic Freignt
Procurement
····· ...... . ... •••••••
Consignee
Shipper
----- Strategic Freight Mgmt. & Contract Lifecycle Mgmt. ----I!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!•
capacity &
.........
) Order Mgmt. &
) warehouse ) Freight exec. ) Freight
Demand Planning Freight Planning
Execution
& Monitoring
Settlement
UllUIJ
••
---------TracKing & Reporting--------, E,enl
• tnvoice SuD TIISSIC'n
• Fre1gh
Nohfication & • Sett-B,l�ng
•
Teridenng
HandMng
• Dispute Management ,•'
..
•
••••••
•••
-,
,•••
....... . --� -- .
•
--
,•' ••
•• ••
•' ••
•••
Carriers
Figure 201: Carrier Collaboration Portal Functionality Overview
With SAP TM 9.3. the Collaboration Portal can be used for the scenarios of strategic freight
procurement, freight tendering. event notification and handling, as well as the settlement
functionalities of invoice submission, self-billing, and dispute management.
Invoice submission is the process of publishing the freight charges in the carrier portal and
resolving differences in charges in a Freight Order (FO) or booking between a carrier or Logistics
Service Provider (LSP) and a requester of transportation services. such as a shipper or an LSP
This functionality simplifies and accelerates the carrier invoicing and correction processes.
Additionally, there is no need to set up additional interfaces from third parties to SAP ERP for
uploading incoming carrier invoices for invoice verification. The carrier creates an invoice directly
in the portal. This invoice gets matched to the calculated freight order amount, and the freight
settlement process can be executed subsequently.
The carrier can verify all relevant logistical and the respective charge amounts. If the carrier
wants to change or add data. the collaborative invoice dispute management functionality can be
triggered. The dispute can involve changes in logistics item quantities (weight, volume, and
distance) or item charges. and can lead to changes in charge amounts in freight order.
The Collaboration Portal can be seen as another UI for the SAP TM system. The carrier requires a
user ID and password for logging on to the Collaboration Portal. This can be created by the SAP
TM administrator.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
395
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Invoice Submission and Payment
Gamer
Creates
Invoice
-£
Freight
Order _.
___
Compare
Charges
CCinFO
Accept,
Reject, or
Char:ige
"+
Recalculate
FSD
I
Post Carner
FSO Delta
FSD
l
POISES
lnvo,ce
t
> [Create
lnvotee
and Issue
Payment
I
Figure 202: High Level Flow Invoice Submission
Invoice Submission: High-Level Process
1. The shipper creates a freight order and executes the charge calculation.
If invoice submission via the Collaboration Portal is enabled for the carrier, the FOs are visible
for the carrier on the Collaboration Portal and the charges get published in the portal.
2. The carrier creates an invoice directly in the portal.
This invoice gets matched to the calculated FO amount.
3. If applicable, a collaborative dispute process is triggered.
If that dispute process is solved, it results in a delta Freight Settlement Document (FSD) or
credit memo posted to ERP.
4. After the invoice amounts and the amounts of the FSD and FO match, a carrier invoice is
automatically created in SAP TM to be posted from SAP TM to SAP ERP.
5. The carrier invoice can then be automatically verified with the respective FSD and PO/SES in
SAP ERP. posted to the accounts, and the payments can be arranged.
The dispute management for self-billing functionality remains untouched and both scenarios can
run in parallel. However, a shipper will probably use either dispute management for self-billing or
let the carrier submit the invoices directly.
396
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
Collaborative Invoice Dispute Management
"
SAP Transportation Management
SAP
ERP
Match Process
Carrier
•
Carrier
Invoice
,,,,..-
...
�
Invoice
Match?
YES
.,
NO
Dlepute
ca..
-+
i
r
YES
Within
Tolerance?
NO
+
Worl<flow
.
•
Poat'
Corrter
lnvol/
POST
•
f
YES
Accept
Invoice
-
NO
I Reject/Propose I
F ,gure 203: Dispute Management for Invoice Submission
Dispute Management: High-Level Flow
1. The shipper creates an FO.
The FO becomes visible for the carrier on the Collaboration Portal.
2. The carrier creates a carrier invoice and submits it.
The carrier can review these orders and create a carrier invoice for one or more FOs. He can
also initiate a change request for the logistical and charge data and also capture the reason
via notes or attachments as justification. The carrier invoice gets created in the shipper TM
system, along with a dispute case capturing all the discrepancies, if any.
3. Dispute resolution occurs.
In cases where there are discrepancies. there can be multiple rounds of negotiations between
shipper and carrier until there is a convergence. The shipper can accept the charges or reject
and propose new charges. The dispute resolution process can also be automated by setting
tolerance rules. This enables automatic acceptance of a dispute without any manual
intervention. If workflow is enabled, a work item is also created in case tolerance rules fail.
enabling the shipper to take further action. Even if workflow is not enabled. the shipper can
see and access the dispute cases via a dedicated POWL. Once the dispute is resolved and the
changes accepted. the freight order and carrier invoice charges get updated.
4. Accruals are adjusted and the invoice is posted.
As soon as the dispute is resolved. the freight order is updated, and the FSD can be created or
updated. (The creation of the FSD depends on whether or not it was already created before
the dispute case.)
The updated FSD updates the PO and SES in SAP ERP with the revised charges using the SAP
ERP update strategy in the settlement profile, as follows:
•
Change current FSD and resend .
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
397
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
•
Create new FSD for delta amount.
•
Reverse and repost with new FSD .
The accrued charges are adjusted in SAP ERP. and then the carrier invoice is posted to SAP ERP.
Self-Billing
u .... "_____
-
•ote.-
·-- I
•otQ>-"tlrT\l""-"'
l"-!0:,,1-!
ftEi9!!t Ofct!r M•ri•me,111
'""""°'
It
HOME
FR8GHT ORDER MANAGa.1arr [ FREIGHT semeMENT
Fr•ight Orders toe Setf.t!illing
,.�Oill::l'll,tt!J
ml
¢fttlt()ifl)lllt
Sinn
-�
-.......
-
-
-
50
F<E<9t11 sememer-t
1
I FREIGHT AGREEf.lENT w,HAGEf.
836
.... °""'
r:res¢1 Ot,m
•
,,
"""
l>JI<* �
iC@J=@flB $ubmi!Wd II ror .\ppr�,• I�
•
Slrttl Name (Scura: Loe.non,)
$1).W(Jf Loc:illon
'""
, ....
CN�Bal.. .@'flUlflC_
115' SQl!i:Slfte1
CIIIW.O Bal.MU 11\iC
115'SQeoi:.SlJUI
100011�2
Ct!i�;o lb\enu ln.C
115'Set41dllett
100011989
CftiQ>".O lbteno Inc
115'SCZ.!181fttl
&100000129
ePM<::lltlllic;als
567 Jone-.Rd
32
---
F"-.gnt Jrgrffment Management
:i;r�
.,,,.
-
--
15
0
......
Figure 204: Carner Self-Bilhng ,n the Collaboration Portal
To enable the display of a freight order in the portal. the assigned carrier must be enabled for selfbilling. This setting is defined in business partner master data.
To access the portal. create business partners for contact persons and assign them to the carrier.
then create an internet user for each contact person.
To expose freight charges. the carrier logs into the Collaboration Portal and navigates to the
Freight Settlement screen.
All Collaboration Portal functionalities (such as table view. detail view. filters. and the search
function) are available.
Dispute Management
Carrier
Shipper
creates
executes the
Freight Order Freight Order
Carrier
requests
change on
charges
Shipper accepts change
Shipper updates) Carrier accepts
updated changes
change
Shipper posts
self-invoice
and pays
Figure 205: Dispute Management tor Seit-Billing
Freight dispute management is the process of resolving differences in logistics quantities and
charges in a freight order or booking, between a carrier (or LSP) and a requester of
transportation services. such as a shipper or an LSP.
398
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
The expected charges of a freight order are exposed on a portal. which the carrier can access.
The carrier can then verify relevant logistical data as well as charges. If the carrier wants to
change or add data. it is then possible to create a dispute. The dispute can involve changes in
logistics item quantities (weight. volume. distance) or item charges (USO or hour). and can lead
to changes in charge amounts in an FO.
Dispute management with self-billing can also be established between an LSP and a carrier or a
carrier and another subcontracted carrier.
The figure. High-Level Process. shows a common example.
The Collaboration Portal can be seen as another UI for the SAP TM system. The carrier requires a
user ID and password for logging on to the Collaboration Portal. This can be created by the SAP
TM administrator.
Dispute Management for Self-Billing: High-Level Process
1. Shipper creates FO.
If self-billing and settlement via the Collaboration Portal is enabled for the carrier. the FROs
are visible for the carrier on the Collaboration Portal.
2. Carrier executes the freight order.
3. Carrier requests change of calculated charges.
The carrier claims unplanned costs or enters changed charges or logistics data like weight
using the Collaboration Portal. The system creates a dispute case capturing the differences
between what the carrier claims versus the charges calculated by the shipper.
4. Shipper accepts or updates change.
The shipper accepts or updates the dispute case in SAP TM. If the shipper accepts the
change. the dispute case is closed and the follow-on process is executed. During this process.
SAP ERP is updated to reflect the changed freight cost, which is then the basis for self-billing
(ERS) run in SAP ERP. If the shipper does not accept the changes. the shipper's proposal is
sent back to the carrier via the Collaboration Portal. The carrier can then accept the proposal
or re-submits changes.
5. Carrier accepts updated changes.
When the carrier accepts changes, the dispute case is closed, and the follow-on process is
executed. During the follow-on process. SAP ERP is updated to reflect the changed freight
cost. which is then the basis for self-billing (ERS) run in SAP ERP.
6. Shipper posts self-invoice (in SAP ERP) and makes payment.
The self-invoice is created and payment is issued to the carrier.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
399
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Dispute Management for Self-Billing: Detailed Process Flow
START (Shipper)
CL
0:::
w
OTR/DTR -------,
PO/SES
t
8
ERS
� Invoice{
g
Pa�ent
---=
I
Freight
SetUement
FO with Self Billing
2�
Reject or propose
changes
7
•
._!.:
l
=�+
Dispute
Case 6
1'
Accept requested
Changes
7
Update Dispute
Case & Send
�
0
CL
c
.Q
-
Carrier
Worklist 4
�
ro
I4
4
J
Verify
Charges5
0
o
I Docu men ti [
•
f
i,
Create
O
Dispute 5
Accept
Payment
received
0
Activity ] Case 1: Shipper accepts first
dispute amount
•
Case 2: Shipper rejectsfproposes first
dispute amount
Figure 206: Detailed Process Flow
1. Order-Based Transportation Requirement (OTR) or Delivery-Based Transportation
Requirement (DTR) is created in SAP ERP by the shipper.
2. The transport requests are planned in SAP TM resulting in a freight order or freight booking.
In this scenario. self-billing is enabled for the carrier.
3. A FSD is created and charges are accrued in SAP ERP - a Purchase Order (PO) and Service
Entry Sheet (SES) are created in SAP ERP. During this process. the shipper or LSP may have
agreed a time period with the carrier within which the carrier can make changes or raise a
disputes. If necessary the FSD can be created after the time period has elapsed to avoid
multiple updates to SAP ERP. For example. if the shipper has an agreement with the carrier
that the carrier has up to 3 days to confirm or update the FO after the execution. then an FSD
can be created after this period has elapsed.
4. Simultaneous to step 3. upon calculating the FO charges. the shipper exposes the freight
order in the Collaboration Portal for the carrier to verify.
5. The carrier verifies the charges and. if a mismatch is found. creates a change request (or
dispute) for the logistical or charge data, and then submits the changes for approval. The
carrier can also capture the reason and upload an attachment as justification.
400
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
6. On submission. a dispute case is created in SAP TM which captures the dispute data.
Technically, the freight order in the SAP TM system is the basis for comparing the charges
(what the carrier claims versus what the shipper expected to pay). If any deviation is found
the dispute case is created. Tolerance rules. if defined by shipper. will run on the charge
dispute item. This enables automatic acceptance of a dispute without any manual
intervention. If workflow is enabled, a work item will also be created in case tolerance rules fail
enabling the shipper to take further action. Even if workflow is not enabled. the shipper can
see and access the dispute cases via a dedicated POWL.
7. The shipper can accept the charges or reject and propose new charges. There can be multiple
iterations of negotiation between the shipper and the carrier until they reach a consensus.
(After the shipper proposes new charges. the carrier can edit the proposal and further action
by the shipper is required). As soon as the dispute is resolved, the FO is updated, and the FSD
can be created. (The creation of the FSD depends on whether or not it was already created
before the dispute case.)
8. The updated FSD updates the PO and SES in SAP ERP with the revised charges using the SAP
ERP update strategy in the settlement profile:
,
Change current FSD and resend
•
Create new FSD for delta-amount
•
Reverse and repost with new FSD
9. An Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS) is run in SAP ERP. During this process. a self-invoice
is created and payment is made to the carrier for the service provided.
Note:
The straight-forward process of self-billing with no dispute raised by the carrier is
described. The step" Accept" on the carrier side is only required, and only possible if a
dispute has been created beforehand and the shipper has proposed updates or
rejected the case.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
401
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Dispute Creation
......
GEHERAL
�O.Ot U)
to•,1
QI
T,rt
• fi.t;tll Of=-c fct OffllO 1S6'6
+
_,,
/
• ..... ua
/
H•a)' �
ouol11:.
D
,,_
+
ATTACHl,l(NT'S
,,
!IDOOOUIO
"'"''�
''"''
·�
·-
"·-
Figure 207: Collaboration Portal Dispute Creation
To create a dispute in the Table Overview or in the Charge Details view of the FO, choose Create
Dispute.
The charge details are opened in a Dispute Creation view and the data can be updated.
In the Dispute Creation view. the following activities can be performed:
•
Change quantity of logistical data
In the Charge Details view the carrier can adapt logistical information of the FO like gross
weight. volume. or total distance.
•
Adapt existing charge items
Choose Edit next to a charge item to open a new row and add an updated rate.
•
Add new charge items
Choose the plus sign next to a stage to a new line and enter a charge type, rate, unit of
measurement. currency. unit of measure or quantity.
•
Upload a document
The carrier can browse and upload documents (for example. a picture showing damaged
goods) to prove the dispute case.
After entering the updated information, choose Calculate Charges to calculate charges for the
updated data.
Before submitting the dispute to the shipper. a note can be added in the Notes field.
Finally, choose Submit Proposal to submit the updated information.
402
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Supplier Freight Charges
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
Generate a freight settlement document
•
Transfer freight charges to SAP ERP
•
Settle a charge in the collaboration portal
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
403
E"
Unit 7
Lesson 4
Calculating and Settling Customer Charges in an
FWO
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson, you will examine how to calculate customer charges for forwarding orders. You will
also examine how to initiate the customer settlement process.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
404
•
Identify how charges are calculated for a FWO
•
Generate a customer freight invoice
•
Settle an internal charge
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating and Settling Customer Charges in an FWO
FWO Charge Calculation
I
Forwarding
Order
----,i
'
.
'
.'
•'
'
Forwarding
Settlement
Document
Charges &
,·
l
'
:
,
'""=======-"'-'-�·�·- -�- --��---- �· -· �·--�l-
··-···-···-�
"
Settlement
i------'.I'
I
:
Accounting Document
�-----------------------------------'
:
SAP ERP1
Figure 208: Document Flow - Forwarding Order Charge Calculation
Transportation charge management in SAP TM calculates charges that customers are required
to pay for the transportation services (and to to the carrier). including the integration of invoice
requests to SAP ERP. In the context of Forwarding Order (FWO) management. we are only
concerned with the functionality of charge calculation and what the customer is supposed to pay
for the transportation process entered in the FWO.
The charge calculation is enabled in the FWO type. Additionally. the charge calculation can be
configured so that it runs automatically when the FWO is saved and when required changes to the
document are made.
Integration of Charge Management
The charge calculation is carried out using the same charge calculation engine that is used for
calculating supplier charges on a freight order/booking. Based on the customer (ordering party)
and the sales organization of the FWO. a forwarding agreement is determined. Based on the
Forwarding Agreement (FWA) and the FWO data, customer charges are calculated.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
405
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
SAP TM
Forwarding
Order
Transportation
Charge
Pre-Processln
Trans ortatlon Char
TCM Processing
Mana
nt
Freight
Forwarding l+--+t Transportation
!+-<�I Settlement
Charge
Settlement
Process In
Documen
Document
Customer
Invoice
TCM Master Data and Configur ion
Forwarding ca:��lat
Agreement
Freight
Agreement
I
[
Rate
Table
]
Scale
Rules and Conditions
Figure 209: Integration of Charge Management
Cost Pull
FW01
50%
-100kg-
FW02
-100kg-
Example 1 (FWA)
Strategy
Aggregate
Complete Selective
95,00
Copy Active
50%
Freight Order
FBOO
100
DOCF
50
FUEL
40
Example 2 (FWA)
Strategy
Complete
Example 3 (FWA)
Selective
Aggregate
Copy Active
Complete
Selective
Aggregate
FUEL
20,00
Copy Inactive
Strategy
Copy Inactive
Copy Active
Copy
Inactive
FB 00 50,00
DOCF 25,00
FUEL 20,00
95,00 will be distributed to each
Forwarding Order.
20,00 (only Fuel charge) will be
distributed to each Forwarding Order.
, 95,00 will be distributed to each
Forwarding Order.
It will be shown in one
aggregated line.(not editable)
The charge type will be shown in an
individual charge line and is editable
• Each charge type will be shown in an
individual charge line (not editable)
Figure 210: Cost Pull Methodologies
406
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating and Settling Customer Charges in an FWO
The cost pull methodology allows costs that occurred on execution documents like Freight
Orders (FOs) or freight bookings to be used by a FWO. In order to do so, the cost distribution is
enabled. If several FWOs are consolidated into one FO. the cost distribution profile distributes the
costs. If an agreement is made with the customer that some of the charges incurred by the
Logistics Service Provider (LSP) are charged to the customer. the cost pull methodology is used.
The cost pull methodology offers three different strategies. which are documented in the figure
Cost Pull Methodologies: aggregate. active copy and inactive copy. For each strategy, you can
choose whether all of the costs or selective costs should be released to the FWO.
Customer Freight Invoicing
Forwarding Settlement Document
Once the charge calculation is performed the charges can be invoiced to the customer.
Note:
SAP TM does not create invoices. instead it creates documents that are used to
integrate with SAP ERP, where invoices are created.
From the forwarding order charges a new document is created. the forwarding settlement
document. Therefore. if you enable the charge calculation and the settlement (the settlement can
be enabled separately) in the forwarding order type. you must also maintain the document type
of the forwarding settlement document that is created for the charges. The creation of this
document is shown in the figure Forwarding Settlement Document Creation.
The forwarding settlement document does not necessarily need to be created for all charges but
several forwarding settlement documents can be created for one forwarding order. based on the
settlement Customizing. It is also possible to create forwarding settlement documents
collectively for several forwarding orders. The forwarding settlement document is then
transferred as a customer freight invoice request to ERP. where a sales order in SAP ERP Sales &
Distribution is created. From there. the common process of billing a customer in SD starts.
Transfer to ERP
Create FWSD
FWO
FWSD
Billing
Doc
TM
TM
ERP
Figure 211: Forwarding Settlement Document Creation
Forwarding Settlement Process
Business Case
A sales organization wants to create an invoice or billing document in ERP for the services
rendered to a customer.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
407
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Forwarding Settlement Document (FWSD)
A document created in TM that can be sent to SAP ERP to request the creation of an invoice to be
sent to a customer.
I
External Customer
I
-
Create Order
.
.
-
Sales Org
1-- Information
'
•
J-
I
SAP TM {LSP)
I
Create
Forwarding Order
...
Transportation
Planning
""',
l
0
c
Determine
o Forwarding
Agreement
.,
,
I
Charge
Calculation
..
..,..
SAP ERP-SD
Create Forwarding
Settlement Document
0
-
.....
'
Sales Org
'
Integration ).-'
.
.
Create Billing
Document
(Invoice)
I
Figure 212: Freight Forwarding Settlement Process
An external customer sends an order to a freight forwarder. The freight forwarder creates a
forwarding order in the SAP TM system.
In this process. when it is time for the freight forwarder to initiate customer billing. a forwarding
settlement document is created in SAP TM. This is a preparatory document in SAP TM.
The forwarding settlement document is transferred to SAP ERP using SAP NetWeaver Process
Integration (Pl) or Web Services Reliable Messaging (WSRM). Charge Management is used to
calculate charges in the forwarding order and in the forwarding settlement document.
In SAP ERP, an SD billing document is created that forms the basis for integration with Financial
Accounting and Controlling (Fl and CO).
»
Note:
The charge calculation doesn't have to be triggered explicitly in the forwarding order;
the calculation is completed automatically when the FWSD is created.
Change Process
The status of the FSD and FWSD can be changed when it is in status Ready for Invoicing or status
Invoiced. When you change FSDs or FWSDs that have already been saved, the lifecycle status is
returned to In Process.
408
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Calculating and Settling Customer Charges in an FWO
The following Customizing activities must be maintained on the ERP side for successful
integration of customer freight invoicing:
•
Customer master data must be defined
•
SAP TM sales organizations must be assigned
•
Transportation charges must be assigned to SD condition types
•
The SD pricing procedure must be maintained
•
Account determination must be maintained
To Generate a Forwarding Settlement Document
1. In NWBC. choose Forwarding Order Management
Order.
->
Forwarding Order _, Edit Forwarding
2. Enter the number of the forwarding order for which you want to create a settlement document
and choose Continue.
3. Generate the forwarding settlement document for the ordering party by choosing FollowUo-« Create Forwarding Settlement Document. On the popup, select the ordering party and
confirm.
4. Save the forwarding settlement document or choose Save and Transfer in the menu bar to
transfer the document to SAP ERP for invoicing.
Internal Settlement
In a logistics service provider. while the main business units take orders from customers. it is the
gateway consolidation centers that consolidate shipments from various business units and
create consolidated bookings with the ocean carrier.
LSP
Forwarding Settlement
•
Shipper
Freight Settlement
1 •
I ••
111
Vendor
FWH
= Forwarding House
Figure 213: Internal Settlement Overview
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
409
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
This requires an internal settlement between the gateway and the business unit. because only the
business unit is in contact with the customer.
An internal settlement document can be sent from an internal organization in a company to
another internal organization to recover costs incurred in delivering transportation services.
In the standard internal settlement process. the internal settlement is between the purchasing
organization of the freight order and the sales organization of the forwarding order.
You can also create internal settlement documents to settle the cost of providing internal
resources. In the internal settlement process for resources. the settlement is between the
organizations that own the resources that are used to execute the order and the purchasing
organization.
Internal Settlement Types
In some cases. the business unit and the gateway belong to different company organizations. In
this case the settlement is called an intercompany settlement.
When the business unit and the gateway belong to the same company organization. the
settlement is called an intracompany settlement.
LSP
r·------------------------------------------------------------------1
lll'UI.J--LJ.-------������!..�
f)VH1
.lll'UI.J--LJ.
lntracompany Settlement
FWH2
I
I
•l lntercompany Settlement
I
I
I
r-------�-----------------------------------------------------------:
I
!
Company 2
l••.ll1'4LJ-tJ
:
FWH3
!•'
•
l
�-------------------------------------------------------------------·
FWH = Forwarding House
Figure 214: Internal Settlement Types
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
410
•
Identify how charges are calculated for a FWO
•
Generate a customer freight invoice
•
Settle an internal charge
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Lesson 5
Distributing Costs
LESSON OVERVIEW
Freight costs incurred by the organization need to be allocated to individual cost or profit centres
in SAP ERP so that profitability can be properly assessed. In this lesson you will examine the
steps performed by the system in assisting the allocation of freight costs in SAP ERP. You will
also examine how to distribute costs in a LSP scenario.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
•
Distribute costs
Cost Distribution
In order to compute true profitability for any manufacturing organization, all operational costs
needs to computed correctly. Most organizations would like the freight costs for material
procurement to be included in the material cost. Similarly, for customer deliveries. the freight
cost for the delivery needs to be considered for margin and profitability computation. SAP TM
can distribute each of the charges used in the freight cost calculation to the item level of the
freight or forwarding order. The item level cost then can be processed in SAP ERP when the
accrual is posted for the supplier or customer freight invoices.
AB Posting
7a
7b
••
ERP
•
,.
----- so
--------- --)'I
I
-- --
r==-====----
•••
•
6a
Valuation
•
1>0/S10
1
TM
--�
ERP
I
I
6b
I
r------------------- 1
2
: Transfer FSD + Distributed Costs I
:
I
to ERP
3
4
L------�------------
..-----""":=:--� - - - - - - - Distributed :
I
Costs
I
O
5
-------
Figure 215: Cost Distribution Concept
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
411
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
The graphic shows the data flow in an integrated environment. Sales orders and purchase orders
are created in SAP ERP. These documents are transferred to SAP TM. where transportation
requests are created and subsequently planned. Freight settlement documents are created.
Based on the FSD type configuration. allocation is generated. The FSD and distributed costs are
sent to SAP ERP for posting. An Agency Billing Document (ABD) is used to post the entries to COPA, CO or material valuation.
Configuring Cost Distribution
Distribution Profile
Distr. Method
Distr. Rule
Distribution Method
Distr. Level
Distribution Rule
Direct
Gross Weight
Gross Volume
Hierarchical
Distribution Level
Net Weight
Forwarding Order
Distance x Weight
ERP Item
FSD Type
Enable Cost
Distribution
..
FO/FB Type
figure 216: Cost Distribution Configuration
Cost distribution needs to be enabled in the Freight Order I Freight Booking I FSD type
Customizing. Further settings for cost distribution include distribution profiles. methods. rules.
and levels. These are explained later. The distribution profile is assigned to the organizational unit
for charge calculation.
FSDTypes
An FSD type, used to calculate costs for planned freight orders. should be identified. The cost
distribution process should be activated for the FSD type as shown in the graphic.
412
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Distributing Costs
�-·F,.Jght-tDoaJment7-":Dlblls
'fJ ... ....,
.o G <$ S Iii Ill
• ......
__.__
_™"!"ClUOCIY
•
i ft;\ \':/JJbq,M
I�""- I
--
Figure 217: Cost Distribution For FSD Type
Distribution details are created for the valid FSD type when the FSD is created. Distribution
details are stored in SAP TM and can be viewed in the UI. SAP TM sends the FSD with distribution
details to SAP ERP when the FSD is sent for accrual.
Cost Distribution Profiles, Methods and Rules
Cost distribution profiles are used to identify the rules by which to distribute freight costs. A
profile consists of distribution methods. distribution rules (basis for distribution) and distribution
levels.
• I} s,.,� �1-WQlb)n �
• E} � �• 8dlHl Futlctk:lns
-c--
•
WNttY.,eaw,
.
fN'n*'*Olln�
w TiWPOl'IJCDl�
•
•
.
C,,,,.,. lw 'llelint""' IJiJb6ulJon ,,..., _
,u ...- �;,,asa
Tr1t,a1CiitlCM1 �
�nSOtlM
•
•
« ...
,_....._
. . ...
...,_,
o.d(�l'l\�
•
. --
O(,,c.,_ ....
· G (t Otxt Affilf YtniDtl n Modtl
·OEl.,�-(-.M,.t--
:J_t:!.':
:J.!..::
:·:lJDl
::m
·f!�-G.,.,.-.,.r,,s.,m .
·fl� Ot'ntSI.O�oflutNll�n .i;t_mx
"""'-
.•
.
I
Cot-
.
..
')
[
I'
•
''
'I
I'
!:!.ca:a
.
umi;r.�
!:!:lJJa::U
'/'.t),O ::m
::1_!!_!LP :Jm
::1_:i_:lj:Jro
::1.c_w�
:tiJI_(Sj!:t=lJa;�
':!,.:3!'
!:tl.lJ:t!:j,!
I
'
i..._.._.. __
,
•
__
.. ..,,........._,_,_,,,_,
,_,,_,,_,,_,_,,_ ,_
,_,,_,,,
""·:tc"'
Ooo.D
··=·
ol
•
• rc:iia..'1!tii: ,:� •
•OJ
t:�,
�:u ltl�:
�"ti, le;;
•W ;:.
_po.,,Ir.;::....
..,it ..i-,
•r::n.��:
fe:f,
a..,. Kfw 'Dtlint Cost IJIJIJlbu6ou Ptoflles': Otblll
'9 ,..r,,,, :a 61" II IHI
°"'""'
::JJtlJ
""'(>I-"""
_.
°"'·""*. ,
-
°"'·""'
gg
"°""""'"9' ...
Figure 218: Cost Distribution Profiles
Methods
SAP TM provides two methods for cost distribution. as follows:
•
Direct
This method is normally used when all charges incurred can be distributed to individual line
items of a delivery based on gross weight or volume. Normally. the charge elements may be
calculated at the header or individual item level.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
413
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
•
Hierarchical
This method may be used when the resolution base may include other levels such as container
or rail cars. In such case, there may be charges for individual container or rail car in addition to
other charges. So, other charges need to be distributed to the container level first and then the
final distribution should take place to allocate the cost to the line item level.
If required. you can add your own distribution methods.
Rules
SAP TM supports the following rule basis to be used for cost distribution:
•
Gross Weight
•
Gross Volume
•
Net Weight
•
Distance times Weight
Distribution Level
The distribution level specifies the target level to which the system allocates transportation
charges for a freight order or freight settlement document. The following distribution levels are
available:
•
Forwarding Order
•
ERP Item
Posting Cost Distribution Data
Agency billing configuration in SAP ERP needs to be completed before cost distribution data can
be posted.
Posted data can be viewed in SAP ERP using the transaction code WLFLTM. Distribution data can
be searched using the FSD number as the reference document number.
Customer Scenarios
Various customer scenarios are supported, including the following:
•
Transfer freight costs for inbound deliveries and stock transfers into material valuation.
•
Post distributed costs to CO so that material-relevant costs can be tracked at the profit center
level. (In such cases. material valuation is not impacted.)
•
Post freight costs back to CO-PA for the customer outbound delivery to be accounted during
profitability analysis.
Cost Distribution for LSPs
When trying to save costs by taking advantage of consolidation effects, one freight document
contains the freight units of several forwarding orders. In order to find out the share of costs for
each individual forwarding order. the costs incurred on the freight document are distributed to
the separate forwarding orders. The distribution is done using cost distribution functionality. It is
possible to set up cost distribution profiles so that the costs are shared based on the total weight
of the forwarding orders. freight unit (volume or equally).
414
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Distributing Costs
In the figure Cost Distribution, the costs are shared based on the total weight, but the costs could
also be distributed equally.
FW01
-100kg-
I
Freight Order
FBOO
OOCF
FUEL
FW02
-100 kg
100
50
40
FW01
-100kgFBOO
OOCF
FUEL
50
25
20
FW02
- 100 kg
FBOO
DOCF
FUEL
50
25
20
Figure 219: Cost Distribution to Forwarding Orders
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
,
Distribute costs
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
415
E"
Unit 7
Lesson 6
Settling Freight Charges in a Group Logistics
Company
LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson describes a group logistics company settlement.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
•
Describe a group logistics company settlement
Group Logistics Company Settlement
Companies are adopting various models to consolidate the transportation (and logistics)
operations within a company to achieve various benefits.
Transportation and Logistics Consolidation Models
•
Strategic reasons
Better visibility of transport costs across the business units
Complete transportation demand visibility
•
Consolidation
Higher volume of better rates
Centralized handling of goods and logistical operations
•
Standardization
Tracking and tracing across the companies
Document handling and design across the companies
Embedded Logistics Service Providers (LSP) Scenarios
In the embedded LSP business scenarios. some organizational units take care of the logistical
activities of the group company. These units can either be separate business units. exclusively
managing the transportation activity. or business units that take care of transportation for their
own needs and those of other business units.
This leads to a scenario in which such embedded organizational units need to take care of the
settlement with carriers for outsourced transportation. as well the settlement with internal
business units, billing them for the transportation service provided.
416
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Freight Charges in a Group Logistics Company
You need support for external and internal financial reporting of all such relevant financial
transactions to reflect on the financial statements. such as balance sheet and profit and loss
statements. and other management accounting statements.
Models for Embedded LSP Scenarios
The main models for embedded LSP scenarios are outlined below.
Embedded LSP Scenarios: Models
•
Exclusive logistics and transportation with own company code.
One organizational unit cares for the logistical activities of the group.
•
Exclusive logistics and transportation with own company code and external orders.
One organizational unit cares for logistical activities of the group and serves for external
companies.
•
One organizational unit has transportation services. additionally.
One organizational unit participates in the core business of the group and cares for the
logistical activities of the group.
�ECL
I
SAT
1
SAT
SSF
��·=
•
-
••
SAT
ECL
2
Model 1
ECL
SAT
SAT
SAT
1
2
SAT
Model 3
Model 2
F ,gure 220: Group Company Embedded LSP Scenarios
Exclusive Logistics and Transportation with Own Company Code
For the high-level process flow for exclusive logistics and transportation with own company code.
the relevant terminology is as follows:
Group company
A financially and legally independent organizational center that is not tied to a geographical
location and that is registered under business law. In this example. Super Animal Trading
(SAT) is the group company.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
417
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Company code
The smallest organizational unit for which a complete, self-contained set of accounts can be
drawn up for the purposes of external reporting. In this example, SAT 1 (producing pigs), SAT
2 (producing cows) and SAT 3 (internal LSP) are covered under the group company SAT.
Exclusive Logistics Transportation Scenario
SAT: Group Company
ECL
SAT 1: Trades Pig Meat
SAT 2: Trades Cow Meat
SAT 3: Logistics Organization
ECL: Efficient Cargo Lines
SAT 1
SAT2
SAT
figure 221: Exclusive Logistics Transportation Scenario
The company SAT has three business units in this scenario. Business Unit SAT 1 produces pig
meat. and business unit SAT 2 produces cow meat. The business unit SAT 3 is responsible for the
transportation of the goods. That includes consolidation of meat, organization of the
transportation. and execution of the transportation. Since the company SAT does not own its
own fleet. it is working with external carriers for the actual transportation. ECL is a trucking
company that takes orders from different clients and does the transportation.
The flow of goods and documents appears as follows:
1. SAT 1 has pig meat that needs to be transported. Therefore, SAT 1 transfers the
transportation demand to SAT 3 for transportation execution.
2. SAT 2 has cow meat that needs to be transported. It also transfers the demand to SAT 3.
3. SAT 3 consolidates the demand and plans the transportation. In the next step. it finds the
most suitable carrier, which in this case is ECL. SAT 3 then does the subcontracting with this
company.
4. After transport execution by ECL, the SAT 3 company receives an invoice from the ECL to pay
for the transport of the pig and cow meat.
5. SAT 3 receives the invoice. checks it. and does a cost distribution to bill SAT 1 and SAT 2.
6. SAT 1 and SAT 2 receive the internal costs, and pay SAT 3 for the transportation.
418
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Settling Freight Charges in a Group Logistics Company
Typical SAP Transportation Management (TM) and ERP System Document Flow and Setup
SAT 1 in ERP
SAT3inTM
SO/ DEL
/STO/
PO
SAT 2 in ERP
OTR/
DTR
SO/ DEL
I STOI
PO
OTR/
DTR
-:
<,
FO/FB
ISO
Account
Payable
.l
ABO
,.
FSO
ISO
'
I"-
�
I"-
SD Billing
Doc
PO/SES
Carrier
Invoice
SAT 3 in ERP
SD Billing
Doc
l,....,---"'
�
Account
Pa, able
1
ABO
I
Figure 222: TM and ERP Document Flow Setup
The independent SAP ERP blocks in the figure do not indicate different ERP systems or clients.
because this is not currently fully supported. It is only supported without the cost distribution
functionality in the internal settlement document.
In this scenario. different documents are exchanged between SAP TM and SAP ERP. The
document flow typically appears as follows:
1. Business unit SAT 1 and SAT 2 transfer the demand as a Sales Order (SO), Delivery (DEL),
Stock Transfer Order (STO). or Purchase Order (PO) to the TM system. SAT 3 takes over
from here.
2. The demands are saved as Order-Based Transportation Requirements (OTRs) or Delivery·
Based Transportation Requirements (DTRs) in SAP TM. Then freight units are built. and these
are then planned to Freight Orders (FO) or Freight Bookings (FB).
3. After transport execution. the Internal Settlement Documents (ISO) and Freight Settlement
Document (FSD) are created.
4. These documents are then transferred to the SAP ERP system for SAT 3. The freight
document creates a PO and a Service Entry Sheet (SES). The ISDs create an SD billing
document. These billing documents then create account payables (in the same ERP system
only) on SAT 3 (as vendor) in the company code for SAT 1 and SAT 2. which act as payers of
the freight cost.
5. Account payable documents are created in Financial Accounting (Fl) and, if the cost
distribution is enabled. the Agency Business Document (ABO) is also created.
Process Requirements
Process requirements are as follows:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
419
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
•
Creation of payables for the shipper companies (for example. SAT 1 and SAT 2. to pay for
internal settlement from SAT 3).
•
Each of the shipper companies involved in the internal settlement require to post the freight
cost to the underlying transportation requirement.
•
Transportation cost distribution is done in SAP ERP via ABDs. and is then posted; for example,
the SO items.
ERP-SAT 1
TM-SAT3
Internal
Settlement
Document for
OTR1
Fl Incoming Invoice
1
Agency Business Document
ERP-SAT 3
- ...
lntercompany SD Billing
Document
Figure 223: Process Requirements
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
420
Describe a group logistics company settlement
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Lesson 7
Managing a Freight Contract
LESSON OVERVIEW
In this lesson. you learn how SAP TM can support the process of negotiating long-term
transportation contracts with customers and transportation service providers alike.
LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson. you will be able to:
,
Describe the process of strategic freight management
Strategic Freight Scenarios
Strategic Transportation Agreement
Building
Strategic Freight
Selling
Rating
�
Transportation
Commodity &
Requirement
Capacity�----�
Strategic Freight
Procurement
Carrier/LSP
Shipper
Service
levels
lll
.,.
....
RFQ
.
Trade lanes
_
�
Profit Maximizallon
11111
Cost Minimization
..
Cost Analysis
I
Quote
.'·�:..,,,
'
'
I
I
Quote
.� .....
'·,
I"'
'
Carrier/Customer Analytics & Carrier I Customer I
KPls
Facfsheef
Simulations
Figure 224: Strategic Freight Scenarios
Strategic Freight Management (SFM) impacts the scenario in which you propose. negotiate and
create agreements for long-term transportation service contracts with both transportation
service providers and customers. SFM can be divided into two different processes. as follows:
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
421
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
•
Strategic Freight Procurement
A shipper. using SAP TM. requests a contract proposal from one or several Logistics Service
Providers (LSPs). providing them with information such as requested volume and other
prerequisites. This information is gathered by SAP TM in collaboration with SAP Analytics
tools. The request for a contract is sent to the LSP as a Request for Quotation (RFQ) and is
answered with a quote received from the LSP.
•
Strategic Freight Selling
The LSP uses an SAP TM system and receives an RFQ from a customer. In this case. the LSP
needs to compare the customer's request with the existing services offered and needs to find
the matching service products. adapt them to the customer's needs. and respond by creating
and sending an appropriate quote to the customer.
As you can see, strategic freight management is rarely used by a single company in isolation. It is
rather likely that only one of the two SFM scenarios are used. However. both scenarios make use
of Transportation Charge Management master data provided by SAP TM. or else create new
master data for Transportation Charge Management.
Strategic Freight Procurement
Comprehensive
trade lane analysis
Define carriers to be
included in the RFQ.
Forecast
transportation
requirements
Define target
business shares
Determine
procurement needs
for each
combination of
trade lane,
equipment,
commodity, service
level.
Receive responses
from carrier.
Determine
transportation spend
by trade lane.
Approval workflow.
Generate agreements
based on quotations
Generate allocations
based upon awarded
business shares
Approval workflow for
Analyze multiple
RFQ
seen anos
Submit RFQ to
Monitor and adjust
carriers
Start negotiation with agreements/allocations
carriers and initiate
based upon
Support multiple
additional bidding
planned/actual
negotiation rounds
round.
comparisons
Create master RFQ
figure 225: Strategic Freight Procurement
Strategic freight procurement is tailored to support shippers (for the most part) to procure longterm transportation services at LSPs or carriers. However. LSPs can also use this scenario to
procure transportation services from carriers, while offering transportation services to clients at
the same time. The strategic freight procurement process is divided into four process steps, as
follows:
422
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing a Freight Contract
•
Prepare RFQ
•
Submit RFQ
•
Evaluate Responses and Optimize
•
Generate Agreements
More details on each process step are included in the following sections.
Prepare RFQ
In the first process step, the shipper prepares the procurement requirement. There is no
interaction with carriers during this process step. The preparation step includes the analysis of
historic transportation and turning the analysis into a forecast for the forthcoming period. Once
the procurement need or requirement has been determined, the shipper divides the requirement
into different scenarios. separated by trade lanes. commodity codes. transportation modes. and
so on. The preparatory work up to this point does not necessarily need to be done in an SAP TM
system. The analysis of historic data, forecast of transport volumes, and classification of
procurement needs could also be carried out in legacy systems. As the final task of the first
process step, the central document for the strategic freight procurement process. the Freight
Agreement Master RFQ is created. All procurement needs and their classifications are entered in
this master RFQ.
Submit RFQ
In the second process step, the interaction with carriers begins. Carriers supposed to take part in
the strategic freight procurement process are added to the Master RFQ and, if needed, target
business shares are assigned amongst them. After an optional approval step inside the
purchasing organization. the individual RFQs are created for each carrier and sent.
Evaluate Responses and Optimize
Once the carriers have responded to the RFQ. the responses can be evaluated and compared.
The SAP TM system supports the comparison by creating ranking lists and suggesting the
optimal business shares. Negotiation rounds with carriers can also be started from here.
Generate Agreements
Once the optimal business shares and carriers are selected for the next period. they can be
awarded. Awarding the carriers in the SFP process means freight agreements are generated for
them. Freight agreements act as the contract between shipper and carrier.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
423
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
Freight Agreement Management on the SAP TM Collaboration Portal
:H6Mil°: FREIGHT ORDER l.1ANAGEt.1ENT FREIGHT SETTLEM£NT
37
FREIGHT AGREEMENT MANAGEMENT
9
410
Open
Open
Freight Settlement
Sel1-B Ing
Self-8111,ng
lnvotee Subm,ss,on
lnvoiC8 Subm,ss«>n
Di�tt
°""""
F""f'
1......
°"""
9
75
85
For�cval
SUbrn'""'
Nol lM'OiCtd
129
2
Freight Agreement Management
Fre,ghl Agroomen1
Fre,ght Agreement
RFOs
RFOs
193
0
30
Open
Sllt>mll'.ec:I 'i\ttll ErrOfS
OJrrena
figure 226: Freight Agreement Management on the SAP TM Collaboration Portal
In the Freight Agreement Management screen on the SAP TM Collaboration Portal you can
perform the following actions:
424
•
As a shipper. you can specify terms and conditions in the Freight Agreement RFQ. Your carrier
or logistics service provider must accept your terms and conditions the first time they open a
freight agreement RFQ. Your carrier can download the freight agreement RFQ master
Microsoft Excel document only after accepting the terms and conditions.
•
Your carrier can upload and submit multiple responses in the SAP TM Collaboration Portal for
the same freight agreement RFQ master. The SAP TM system considers the latest response
that is before the response deadline.
•
Your carriers can view all freight agreements that they have with you, including the freight
agreements that have expired, that are valid on the current date. or are valid for a period of
time in the future.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing a Freight Contract
Freight Agreement Details in the SAP TM Collaboration Portal
HOME
FREIGHT ORDER MANAGEl>EITT
frefJlll Agreement RFOS
ShowO.....
,,
Status
FREIGHT SETILEMENT
FREIGHT AGREEMENT MANAGEMENT
Frtf,ght Agrttments
E>pon
Ou1CkAl\ef EXJNftCI
•
Fre�hl Agreement
@ii/tf fr I Future
All
View
=II
Agreement \laid From
DeS(tlpiiofl
,tgeement Vaid To
Februar, 28, 201s
Ftbru'ar, 01, 2016
Co_Tt$1
Stptiffiber 30, 2014
OWbtIOI, 2015
CP_FA_COMPLEX.03
CP Complex Fr�ht Agfeectent
Stpllernb« 30, 20•4
OtcernbefOl,2016
',!
KAN_FR_�GR1
Qnh lrt1!t\l 80tttmtnt
Ftbnlir, 12. 2015
Mlfe!l 30, 2016
,!
KD_AGIUAAS$_01
TEST MASS RELEASE 01
Ocaobe, 09, 2014
Ocaobtr 10. 20tS
",
KO_AGR_fl.ASS_Ol
TEST MASS REJ.EASE 02
OC.Obtl' es. 2014
O<lobtf 10, 201$
,!
KO_fA_MASS
TEST MASS RELEASE
OcaobeJ 09, 2014
Ocmbe:110, 2015
L
KO_FA.•MSS_01
TESUtASS RELEASE 01
Qaobtt Oi. 2014
OQobtf 10. 2015
,!
KO_FA_WSS_02
TEST MASS RHEA.SE 02
December 31, 2014
NOYe-nbeI 10, 201S
L
CKS_MASS_RT-t.Cl<>GBL
TEST· MASS RELEASE LOCAL
,!
CP_AGREE..Sl•n>tE
',!
FREIGHT AGREEMENT DETAILS
r,
J(]
Agreement
KO_ACR_MASS_01
FREIGHT AGREEMENT OETAI.S
OtsttlPIOII TESTMASS
RELEASE01
Notes
htlo a9teem!nt (...)
Frtight Agt..mtn1 oocunwnu
File Name
Type
@
@
(iip
Kll_fA_MASSilsx
KDJIOR...MASS_OI dsx
KD..,AOR_w.ss_o1 ,tu
Sla!U1 Currt>l'II
Valldfrom.: Orelober9, 2014
va11010 OCtol>er 10, 2015
MOTES
Figure 227: Freight Agreement Details in the SAP TM Collaboration Portal
You can display all the freight agreements that you have with your shipper. You can apply the
quick filter to restrict the number of freight agreements displayed. The system displays the exact
validity status of each freight agreement (Expired. Current. Future. and A//). as well as the validity
period of the freight agreement. You can navigate to the details of a freight agreement either
using the ID of the freight agreement or choosing the Show Details pushbutton for the selected
freight agreement. You can also review a list of documents that relate to a freight agreement.
Filter
From the toolbar. you can apply the quick filter to filter freight agreements by their validity
statuses (Expired. Current, Future. and A//). In the table view, you can apply a filter to those fields
that support the filter function by entering a filter value in accordance with the SAP Ul5 standard.
You can show or hide individual columns and change their sequence by using drag and drop. To
remove the filter. delete the value from the input field and press ENTER.
Search
You can find freight agreements using the search field in the toolbar. The system returns all
freight agreements that contain the search term in a field (fuzzy search) irrespective of whether
the field is shown or hidden. If you want to delete the search term. click the cross at the end of the
search field.
Sort
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
425
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
If a field can be sorted. you can display the contents of the individual columns in ascending or
descending order. To do so in the detail view. place the cursor on a column header and press the
primary mouse button. Alternatively, press ENTER when the focus is on the UI element. If you
repeat the operation, the sort sequence is reversed. To do so in the table view. place the cursor
on a column header and press the primary mouse button. Then select the required sort option
(Sort Ascending or Sort Descending). If you want to sort by several columns. press and hold
CTRL.
Freight Agreement Microsoft Excel Integration
... .
en
Ill
" '""
... ic..
'. C..�,DOCr'-�J .1 '
"""" "''
1'' . '
JI.GI tAYOOt
.
....
·
,_.tli11c.,,
,.,,_,_
,'
Al
··-
.
•
..,_
. ...
'
>'
•
,.
.
•
...
f,
tm'M
�tMucltf
-- •
'
KD_AGR)\,\SS_o
•
,1
-__
W,,9t I Cerle' •
��·flto'I
1£ST...SS
O.,t0l.MASS.t1•, £cd
.......
.,.
' ,,,
0
' """'"
.� .
-
--.....
•
,
,
t
• •
,...
C.......f-•
f-111 ..
v....='... o.»
10.10.20!!
.
kltll :lellk fC.ll'C
.
,..,
u
.
••
•
n
"
"""''""
!l
�
.i.,u11tttr,,.
JHJ13U
-
.
r
il:11·
l O.·
-
.
' "' -
-� il
,..
• ......
'
-
•
.........
,..,...,
AIM_CAAfiJI
'•
b
'""' Oi,ltill
1�»xSMO«t :O!�
Item
No.I
2 100
3
Trede Lal\es
Orientation
Calculation
Oesaiotion
Sheet
Source Type
o.,.
G
H
Uovement, Stage Catego,y
T•10.03_2015
10.10.2014
Source
e
f
VllJid,fo Oate Shipping lype
Destinadon
lTl (ltu ThM T Door to CFS
P,..Carri-1
OeMi:iw,,tfon
o.,au,
R8le la�e
00000000000000390652
Cale ShMI
00000000000000130517
Instruction Tu...
a.a,- T
MM BASE
Ptlsit""1f1Mattre
12 Value T
13 Valid ff()ffl
1.i Valid To
Ptlsl!NeVab
Absoktte ValiM
10.10.2014
09 11.2014
1S Currencv
USO
16 •
Sourct Loe,tlOl'I
Cor<irmed
".
Valkl,from
•
T·-
'
18
IOIH.OW l�l&H ,HI$
D
Item
NlM FRA. rTEY IJOSn
s
6
7
8
9
10
11
1G0-l90651 !0-Sl..20U
c
8
A
,I
I0)-»)652 10-M'>'>' 20'4
{:
AOM SI.OC1
c
0
v....
100
Figure 228: Freight Agreement Microsoft Excel Integration
You can export the content of a freight agreement table from the table view to a Microsoft Excel
file.
426
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Lesson: Managing a Freight Contract
Strategic Freight Selling
1i1
"
Commercial/Freight Manager
Product I
Service offering
LSP/
Carrier
Pricing & Margin
Optimization
)11&19
Shipper I
LSP
Workflow /Alerts/ TM BW
Historical demand
per trade lane per
customer
Historical revenue
analysis on a trade
lane or per customer
Convert customer
data into internal
format.
Automatic proposal
of lane-based
freight rates
Derive lane based
service products
Arrive at price
which includes all
attributed costs
Provide one
single document
for the end to end
quote to contract
process.
Evaluation of
product
offerings and
performance
periodically (BW
reports)
Contract
creation/extension
Rate builder from
shipper's quote.
Simulate
forwarding
charge/ revenue
based on the
proposed bid.
ongoing
Instantly
Instantly
ongoing
Figure 229: Strategic Freight Selling
The strategic freight selling process also consists of four process steps that are designed to lead
to a Forwarding Agreement (FWA). The steps are as follows:
•
Data Analytics
Similar to the strategic freight procurement process. analysis of historic demand is crucial in
allowing LSPs and carriers evaluate whether a trade lane is in demand. This analysis is not
mandatory for the strategic freight selling process.
•
Product I Service Offering
Once the RFQ has been received from the customer. the LSP creates the leading document for
the strategic freight selling process. the Forwarding Agreement Quotation (FWAQ). This
document contains all data requested by the customer.
•
Pricing & Margin Optimization
Once the FWAQ has been created. the correct rates can be derived for the customer. Because
the LSP already provides standard service product catalogs. the task of the sales agent is to
determine the service products that match the customer's requirements. Once the matching
service products are found, the corresponding rates are drawn from the service product into
the FWAQ where it can be amended if the customer requires some deviations from the
standard services or has a particular discount applied. If the customer accepts the offer and
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
427
E"
Unit 7: Charge Calculation and Freight Settlement
signs a contract. the FWAQ is turned into a forwarding agreement which acts as a contract
between the LSP and the shipper.
•
Relationship Management
Similar to the data analytics process step, the customer's orders are monitored in order to
decide whether the currently offered services and volumes are appropriate for the customer.
Data analytics and relationship management are ongoing processes. while product or service
offering. and pricing & margin optimization are instant process steps initiated by a customer's
RFQ.
FWA Microsoft Excel Integration
Review
Quotati-On
Exrel (via Mail, or
any system)
t
Multi-Round
Negotiotions with
Revisions
'
•
'
Determine
Matching
Agreements
, Location pairs
, Calculation sheet
• Charge types
'
Finalized
Download Forwarding
Agreement Quotation
to Shipper Exrel
Quotation
•
New
•
Forwarding
Agreement
Suggest Rates f
Services
Figure 230: FWA Mrcroso� Excel Integration
The LSP can process the FWAQ which was created from an upload of a Microsoft Excel file. Once
this has been completed, the quotation can be submitted by downloading the derived rates into
the Microsoft Excel sheet format. which the customer initially provided.
LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:
•
428
Describe the process of strategic freight management
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Learning Assessment
1. A forwarding agreement is used to define the contractual agreement between you and the
carrier you sub-contract to deliver goods. It forms the basis of the charges payable by you to
the carrier.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
2. Based on what you have learned about calculation sheets. place a tick beside each of the
options below which is true.
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A The CS is closely connected to rate tables and scales.
B The CS provides a clear view on how the final amounts owing to carriers are arrived at.
C Even though the final amounts for two deliveries. A and B. may vary according to the
specifics of each individual delivery. the underlying rationale as defined in the CS may be
the same.
D A new CS must be created for each delivery.
3. Using a rate table. a rate can be determined based on different dimensions.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
4. Scales have a 1:1 relationship to rate tables.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
429
E"
Unit 7: Learning Assessment
5. What does the master data cockpit provide an overview of?
6. When calculating carrier charges in a freight order. the freight agreement is determined based
on what?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Sales organization
B Purchasing organization
c
Carrier
D Ordering party
7. Which of the following options are possible freight settlement scenarios?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
A Shipper freight invoicing
B Customer freight invoicing
C Supplier freight invoicing
8. During supplier settlement. a separate FSD is created for every freight order.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
9. Which of the following business documents are created in SAP ERP when transferring a
freight settlement document from SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
430
D
A Sales order
D
D
D
B Purchase order
c
Service entry sheet
D Shipment cost document
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7: Learning Assessment
10. Place the steps of the high-level invoice submission process in the correct sequence.
Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.
0The carrier invoice can then be automatically verified with the respective FSD and PO/SES
in SAP ERP. posted to the accounts. and the payments can be arranged.
D After the invoice amounts and the amounts of the FSD and FO match, a carrier invoice is
automatically created in SAP TM to be posted from TM to ERP.
D If applicable. a collaborative dispute process is triggered.
D The carrier creates an invoice directly in the portal.
0The shipper creates a freight order and executes the charge calculation.
11. When calculating charges in a forwarding order. the forwarding agreement is determined
based on what?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
D
A Sales organization
B Purchasing organization
c
Carrier
D Ordering party
12. When transferring a forwarding settlement document to SAP ERP, a billing document is
created in SD.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
D
True
False
13. Provide an overview of the internal settlement types.
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
431
E"
Unit 7: Learning Assessment
14. Which of the following options are methods of cost distribution provided by SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
D
D
D
A Direct distribution
B Indirect distribution
C Hierarchical distribution
15. In the embedded LSP business scenarios. some organizational units take care of the logistical
activities of the group company. These units can either be separate business units. exclusively
managing the transportation activity. or business units that take care of transportation for
their own needs and those of other business units.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
D
False
16. SAP TM supports the negotiation and creation of agreements for long-term transportation
service contracts with both transportation service providers and customers.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
432
D
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7
Learning Assessment - Answers
1. A forwarding agreement is used to define the contractual agreement between you and the
carrier you sub-contract to deliver goods. It forms the basis of the charges payable by you to
the carrier.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
0
True
False
Correct. The description here refers to a freight agreement. not a forwarding agreement.
2. Based on what you have learned about calculation sheets. place a tick beside each of the
options below which is true.
Choose the correct answers.
0
0
0
D
A The CS is closely connected to rate tables and scales.
B The CS provides a clear view on how the final amounts owing to carriers are arrived at.
C Even though the final amounts for two deliveries. A and B. may vary according to the
specifics of each individual delivery. the underlying rationale as defined in the CS may be
the same.
D A new CS must be created for each delivery.
Correct. It is not necessary to create a new CS for each and every delivery.
3. Using a rate table. a rate can be determined based on different dimensions.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
433
E"
Unit 7: Learning Assessment - Answers
4. Scales have a 1:1 relationship to rate tables.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
0
True
False
5. What does the master data cockpit provide an overview of?
The master data cockpit provides an overview of the agreements and related charge
management master data.
6. When calculating carrier charges in a freight order, the freight agreement is determined based
on what?
Choose the correct answers.
D
A Sales organization
0
0
B Purchasing organization
D
D Ordering party
c
Carrier
7. Which of the following options are possible freight settlement scenarios?
Choose the correct answers.
D
0
0
A Shipper freight invoicing
B Customer freight invoicing
C Supplier freight invoicing
8. During supplier settlement. a separate FSD is created for every freight order.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
D
True
0
False
That's correct. Collective settlement is also supported.
434
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
Unit 7: Learning Assessment - Answers
9. Which of the following business documents are created in SAP ERP when transferring a
freight settlement document from SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
D
0
0
D
A Sales order
B Purchase order
c
Service entry sheet
D Shipment cost document
10. Place the steps of the high-level invoice submission process in the correct sequence.
Arrange these steps into the correct sequence.
�The carrier invoice can then be automatically verified with the respective FSD and PO/SES
in SAP ERP, posted to the accounts, and the payments can be arranged.
� After the invoice amounts and the amounts of the FSD and FO match, a carrier invoice is
automatically created in SAP TM to be posted from TM to ERP.
0 if applicable. a collaborative dispute process is triggered.
[3J The carrier creates an invoice directly in the portal.
[!] The shipper creates a freight order and executes the charge calculation.
11. When calculating charges in a forwarding order. the forwarding agreement is determined
based on what?
Choose the correct answers.
0
D
D
0
A Sales organization
B Purchasing organization
c
Carrier
D Ordering party
©Copyright.All rights reserved.
435
E"
Unit 7: Learning Assessment - Answers
12. When transferring a forwarding settlement document to SAP ERP. a billing document is
created in SD.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
D
True
False
13. Provide an overview of the internal settlement types.
When the business unit and the gateway belong to different company organizations. the
settlement is called an intercompany settlement. When the business unit and the gateway
belong to the same company organization. the settlement is called an intracompany
settlement.
14. Which of the following options are methods of cost distribution provided by SAP TM?
Choose the correct answers.
0
D
0
A Direct distribution
B Indirect distribution
C Hierarchical distribution
15. In the embedded LSP business scenarios. some organizational units take care of the logistical
activities of the group company. These units can either be separate business units. exclusively
managing the transportation activity, or business units that take care of transportation for
their own needs and those of other business units.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
0
True
D
False
16. SAP TM supports the negotiation and creation of agreements for long-term transportation
service contracts with both transportation service providers and customers.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
436
0
True
D
False
©Copyright.All rights reserved.